PocketWizard Wiki - User contributions [en]

Getting Started

2026-03-29T20:06:25Z

Heathers: added note at top about not updating Plus V and older units

__NOTOC__
'''Thank you for using PocketWizard radios!'''

PocketWizard radios run on sophisticated firmware that is updated regularly. While the radios are shipped from the factory with the most updated version, sometimes new firmware is released between the time of it leaving our warehouse to being sold to a consumer.

{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
|
If you have a PocketWizard radio with a mini-b USB connection, you can update or upgrade the firmware in your radios.

'''IMPORTANT NOTE:''' PocketWizard now has two different frequency protocols. Legacy firmware has been our standard for the past 30 years. The E Release is our new system and was introduced in September 2019.

'''YOUR RADIOS MUST ALL USE THE SAME FIRMWARE PROTOCOL (LEGACY OR E RELEASE) OR THEY WILL NOT WORK TOGETHER.''' Please see the [[PocketWizard Firmware|PocketWizard Firmware]] page for details.

Plus Ve users: there will be an app coming for Bluetooth updates for your radio. At this time, you have the most current version of firmware installed in your new Plus Ve. They will not be updated through the PocketWizard Utility program.

PlusX users: If you want to upgrade to the E Release firmware, you can send the radio in to us. Please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact contact us] for details.

If you have a radio without a USB port, like a MAX, Plus, Plus II, PlusX, or older MultiMAX, you do not need to update.
|}

It's important to make sure you have the newest firmware and that all of your radios are using the same version. To check and update the radios, you'll first need to install the PocketWizard Utility onto your computer then update them through the program. Follow the steps below, just click the Expand option on the option that matches your equipment. You will need a [https://pocketwizard.com/products/replacement-mini-b-to-usb-cable-2/ standard mini B to mini USB data cable] to update the radios.

{| class ="wikitable"
|New! Raven '''[https://pocketwizard.com/products-radios-raven/ Learn more]'''

[[File:Raven.png]]
|}

====1. Download the PocketWizard Utility====

<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''Windows'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
Attention Google Chrome Browser Users:Occasionally there are times when Google Chrome will not properly download the files linked below by simply clicking on the links. To resolve this issue, right-click on the links and select "Save link as...", then select a location to download the file to. The download will proceed normally from there. Or you can copy the link for the PocketWizard Utility program and paste it into a new tab, which should also start the download. 
# To update Legacy firmware in your radios or to upgrade to the E Release, first download the [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup%20v2.10.exe PocketWizard Utility Setup 2.10] for Windows versions 7 (SP1), 8.1, and 10.
#* You will need to uninstall the previous version of the PocketWizard Utility before installing Version 2.10. Click [[PocketWizard Utility FAQ#Try a complete uninstall and re-install of the Utility|here]] for instructions.
# Save the setup program to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)
# Run the setup program and follow the installation instructions. HIGHLY RECOMMENDED - Right click the setup program and "Run as Administrator"
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Start Menu. Find it there and run it! You can delete the setup program. HIGHLY RECOMMENDED - Right click the program and "Run as Administrator"

</div>
</div>

<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''Mac'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
Attention Google Chrome Browser Users:Occasionally there are times when Google Chrome will not properly download the files linked below by simply clicking on the links. To resolve this issue, right-click on the links and select "Save link as...", then select a location to download the file to. The download will proceed normally from there. Or you can copy the link for the PocketWizard Utility program and paste it into a new tab, which should also start the download. 
# To update Legacy firmware in your radios or to upgrade to the E Release, first download the correct Utility.
##If you have macOS Monterey (12), Big Sur (11), Catalina (10.15), or Mojave (10.14), you can use our 64-bit Utility. We have not tested Ventura (13) yet but have not had any reported issues. Click here to download [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%202.12.dmg PocketWizard Utility Installer 2.12]. The release notes can be downloaded [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/8/8f/Utility_2.12_beta.pdf here].
##If you are using an older version of macOS, you can download our 32-bit version. For OS X and macOS versions 10.8 (Mountain Lion) through High Sierra (10.12), use [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%202.10.dmg PocketWizard Utility Installer 2.10]. Mojave (10.14) can use either version of the Utility.
# Save the Installer Disk Image file (.dmg) to the directory of your choice (usually the Downloads folder)
# Open the downloaded .dmg file
# Run the PocketWizard installer package within the Disk Image, and follow the installation prompts
# The PocketWizard Utility is now installed in your Applications folder. Find it there and run it! You can delete the Installer Disk Image file (.dmg)

</div>
</div>
 

====2. Check for Updates====
'''IMPORTANT NOTE:''' When you click the Update radio button, for most radios, you will see 2 firmware protocol options available - "Free" (Legacy firmware) or "Paid" (E Release firmware). You can see more details about the firmware options [[PocketWizard Firmware | here]]. All of your radios must use the same firmware protocol.

 
<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''MiniTT1, FlexTT5, FlexTT6, PowerST4, and PowerMC2'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility
# Connect your radio to your computer via a mini-B to USB data cable
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.
# Under the Update Tab, click "Update Firmware", which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio. For the FlexTT5, FlexTT6, and PowerMC2, you can choose between Legacy ("free") or E Release ("paid"). Please see the [[PocketWizard Firmware]] page for details. The MiniTT1 and PowerST4 cannot be upgraded to the E Release. All of your radios must use the same protocol, either Legacy or E Release, as the systems use different frequencies. Click on the box you want.
## For Legacy Firmware: click OK. Click OK in the confirmation window
## For E Release Firmware: enter your email address in the field provided and click Find and Apply License. If it finds the license, proceed to install the firmware. Once installed, the Firmware License will be tied to that serial number and it is non-transferable. If it does not find the license, you may need to purchase one. Visit our [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_E_Release#How_do_I_update_to_the_E_Release.3F E Release Firmware] page to learn more about licenses.
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer. You do not need to "eject" the radio.
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding TEST as you power on the radio for about 15 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks in a row. [[Factory Reset|Click here to view a video of this reset process]]
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.

</div>
</div>
<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''Plus III / IIIe or Plus IV / IVe'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility
# Connect your radio to your computer via a mini-B to USB data cable
# Once the Utility recognizes your radio, the connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window. You will also see the firmware, hardware, and loader versions of the unit.
# Under the Update Tab, click "Update Firmware", which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio. You can choose between Legacy ("free") or E Release ("paid"). Please see the [[PocketWizard Firmware]] page for details. All of your radios must use the same protocol, either Legacy or E Release, as the systems use different frequencies. Click the box to select the option you want.
## For Legacy Firmware: click OK. Click OK in the confirmation window
## For E Release Firmware: enter your email address in the field provided and click Find and Apply License. If it finds the license, proceed to install the firmware. Once installed, the Firmware License will be tied to that serial number and it is non-transferable. If it does not find the license, you may need to purchase one. Visit our [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=PocketWizard_E_Release#How_do_I_update_to_the_E_Release.3F E Release Firmware] page to learn more about licenses.
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and make sure the radio is turned off. You do not need to "eject" the radio.
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the TEST button as you power on the radio.
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.
</div>
</div>
<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''MultiMAX, MultiMAX II'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
# Launch the PocketWizard Utility and connect a mini-B to USB data cable to the computer but not to your MultiMAX.
# Enable USB Mode on the MultiMAX:
#* Turn off the MultiMAX
#* Hold the Backlight button (between TEST and MENU), and connect the mini-B to USB data cable to your MultiMAX.
#* Continue to hold the Backlight button, and move the power switch to Transmit
#* Release the Backlight button. The LED on top of the radio should blink.
# The connected radio will be displayed in the top left of the Utility window.
# Note the current Firmware Version of the connected radio. If the Firmware Version matches the Current Versions listed below, skip steps below and proceed to the next radio. NOTE: The E Release is not available for the MultiMAX or MultiMAX II. These radios can only use the Legacy firmware.
# Under the Update Tab, click Check for Updates, which will download the latest firmware version, and prompt to update the firmware in the connected radio.
# The Utility will update the firmware in the connected radio. Do not disconnect the radio while the progress bars are visible.
# After the Utility confirms a successful firmware update, disconnect the radio from your computer, and move the power switch off. You do not need to "eject" the radio.
# Perform a Factory Reset of your radio, by holding the C key as you power on the radio.
# Repeat the above steps for all of your radios, making sure all firmware versions match the Current Versions listed below.
</div>
</div>

<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''Current Firmware Versions'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">

{| class="wikitable" style="text-align: center;"
!''Radio''
!''Firmware Version''
!''Release Date''
!''Release Notes''
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Canon
|{{Latestcanon}}
|6/8/2017
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/bc/MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Canon_6.905_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|MiniTT1 / FlexTT5 Nikon
|{{Latestnikon}}
|4/26/2019
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/2/25/MiniTT1_FlexTT5_Nikon_3.906.pdf Release Notes]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|FlexTT5 Panasonic
|{{Latestpanasonic}}
|8/24/2017
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/6/66/Panasonic_FlexTT5_Firmware_Release_Notes_1.132.pdf Release Notes]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|FlexTT6 Canon
|{{Latestflextt6}}
|8/24/2017
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/b/b5/FlexTT6_Canon_7.003_Firmware_Release_Notes.pdf Release Notes]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|PowerMC2
|{{Latestmc2}}
|6/11/2013
|[https://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/883PowerMC2_Firmware_ReleaseNotes_2.400.pdf Release Notes]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|PowerST4
|{{Latestst4}}
|6/11/2013
|[https://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/1076ST4_Firmware_Release_Notes_5.400.pdf Release Notes]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|Plus III
|{{LatestP3}}
|4/26/2019
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/d/de/Plus_III_1.210_firmware_release_notes_v2.pdf Release Notes]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|Plus IIIe
|'''2.740/2.840'''
|5/30/2023
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=File:Plus_III_2.740_and_2.840_firmware_release_notes.pdf Release Notes]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|Plus IV
|{{LatestP4}}
|3/1/2016
|
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|Plus IVe
|'''2.605'''
|12/11/2019
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=File:Plus_IVe_2.605_firmware_release_notes.pdf Release Notes]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|MultiMAX
|{{Latestmax}}
|4/1/2014
|[https://www.pocketwizard.com/upload/photos/733MM3_Eng_Man_LPF100v1.5_plus_Add_7.5v1.1_7.51RN_2.pdf Manual]
|-
|style="text-align: left;"|MultiMAX II
|{{LatestMM2}}
|4/26/2019
|[https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/images/9/9c/MultiMAX_II_Firmware_Release_Notes_8.111.pdf Release Notes]
|}
</div>
</div>
 
 
Information about current Beta firmware (if any) is [[Beta_Firmware|available here]].
 
 

====3. First Time Setup====
 
<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''MiniTT1, FlexTT5, & FlexTT6 - Canon'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
# For the radio that will be used as the transmitter attached to your camera, change the Camera Model setting to match the camera the radio will be attached to for Configuration C1. This setting is located under the Misc tab when your radio is connected to the PocketWizard Utility. Make sure to Apply Changes in the bottom left of the Utility window after applying this setting. Once the radio has briefly disappeared and reappeared in the Utility window (which confirms the settings have been applied to the radio), you can disconnect the USB cable. [[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]] This step is only required once, or when the camera model changes.
{{CanonQuick}}
</div>
</div>
<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''MiniTT1 & FlexTT5 - Nikon'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
# Set your camera to use Auto-FP. On most Nikon Cameras, this is Custom Function e1, located under the Pencil menu. This setting should be set to the slowest shutter speed with the "(Auto FP)" option. Most Nikon cameras will use "1/250 (Auto FP)", although some will be 1/200 (Auto FP)".
# Connect your receiving flashes to their respective FlexTT5's. Turn the flash on, and set it to the normal TTL mode - NOT "Master" or "Slave" mode. Then, turn the FlexTT5 on to Configuration C1. Within a few seconds, a low power flash will be emitted from the directly-connected flash, confirming the flash and FlexTT5 are communicating through the hotshoe properly.
# Connect the transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 to your camera. Turn the radio on to Configuration C1.
# Turn on the camera, and set to 1/160th shutter speed. Take a test shot with the camera at this shutter speed - the remote flash will fire, but may not sync properly (this is a Calibration Shot for the radio). Take a second test shot, and your remote flashes will fire a TTL exposure!

Step 1 is only required once, or when you set up a new camera. The normal power-up sequence is Steps 2-4.

These steps are for basic TTL operation.
Using an AC3? [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Ac3 Continue Here]
Using a Master Nikon flash? [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Advanced_Wireless_TTL Continue Here]
</div>
</div>

<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''PowerST4'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
# Connect your PowerST4 to your remote Elinchrom Flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.
# You will now be triggering your PowerST4! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.

You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.
</div>
</div>

<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''PowerMC2'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
# Connect your PowerMC2 to your remote Einstein flash, and power on the flash unit. The radio will power on when the flash is turned on.
# Use the Einstein's LCD to change the Channel and Zone settings to channel: "CTL-01" and "Zone A"
# Follow the above instructions for starting up a Canon or Nikon transmitting radio.
# You will now be triggering your PowerMC2! Use the in-camera Flash Exposure Compensation settings to adjust the power levels.

You can also use your AC3 or Canon / Nikon master flash controls to adjust the manual power level of the connected flash. See the respective links above.
</div>
</div>

<div class="toccolours mw-collapsible mw-collapsed" style="width:50%">
'''Plus III, Plus IV, MultiMAX, MultiMAX II'''
<div class="mw-collapsible-content">
# With all equipment powered off, connect your remote radio to the camera or flash you'd like to trigger (with appropriate [https://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/ cable])
# Connect your transmitting radio to the hotshoe of your camera (or for a remote camera, simply have the radio in your hand)
# Power on the remote radio, the remote flash, and the transmitting radio.
# Ensure the Plus III/IV's are set to TxRx mode, or for a MultiMAX that the transmitting radio is set to Transmit, and the receiver to Receive mode.
# Set the Channels and Zones to match.
# Take a test shot, or press the TEST button, and the remote unit will fire!
</div>
</div>

 

====4. Further Reading====
 
For more information about specific topics, continue reading here:

:[[PocketWizard Firmware]] Explains the difference between Legacy and E Release firmware.

:[[PocketWizard E Release]] Information about our new firmware protocol and how to upgrade or downgrade your radios.

:[[Channels]] Details about the frequency each PocketWizard Channel uses.

:[[HyperSync]] How to achieve higher sync speeds with studio strobes.

And for more radio-specific information, start here:

:[[Plus III FAQ]]

:[[PlusX FAQ]]

:[[MultiMAX FAQ]]

:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]]

:[[PowerMC2 FAQ]]

:[[PowerST4 FAQ]]

:[[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]]

Main Page

2026-03-29T20:02:27Z

Heathers: /* Want more details about your PocketWizard radios? */ tweaked "contact us"

[[File:PocketWizardLogo.png]]

'''Hello and welcome to the PocketWizard® Wiki!'''

[[File:Raven.png|thumb|right|250px|Meet the new Raven!'''[https://pocketwizard.com/products-radios-raven/ Learn more]''']]

This wiki, written exclusively by the PocketWizard support team, is for helping photographers use and understand their PocketWizard radios. This Wiki has 3 main purposes:
*To help you set up your new PocketWizards
*Provide technical support and troubleshooting
*Provide detailed information about your specific radio
You can use the search box up above to help you find something, or you can choose from one of the options below.

NOTE: You can use Google Translate to view this Wiki in a different language. Go to [https://translate.google.com translate.google.com], then type ''wiki.pocketwizard.com'' into the box. Click the arrow in the box to see the new page.'''

==I just bought a new PocketWizard! What do I do first?==

#Download the Quick Guide for your radio '''[https://pocketwizard.com/manuals/ here]'''
#Check your firmware! Go to the '''[[Getting Started]]''' page to download our Utility and update your radios. (note: PlusX users do not need this step)
#'''[https://pocketwizard.com/registration/ Register your radios!]''' A PocketWizard radio purchased new from an authorized dealer has a 2 year warranty against manufacturer's defects. Extend your warranty to 3 years by registering them online!

{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
|'''IMPORTANT NOTE:''' If you just purchased a new Plus IIIe or Plus IVe and it is not working with your previously purchased PocketWizard radios, please '''[[PocketWizard Firmware|click here]]''' to learn about our new firmware protocol.
|}

==Helpful links for technical support questions and common features==

*'''[[PocketWizard E Release|E Release]]'''
Our new firmware upgrade is a game changer! This is paid upgrade for the Plus III and Plus IV radios but you may be eligible for a free license-click [[E Release#E Release FAQs|here]] for details!

*'''[[The FAQ|Frequently Asked Questions]]'''
Looking for a quick solution to a common problem? This is a great place to check!

*'''[[HyperSync|Learn about HyperSync]]
If you want to sync a strobe over your camera's X-sync speed, our patented HyperSync technology might be able to help you!

*'''[[Remote Camera Triggering]]'''
Did you know you can trigger your camera remotely (and you might be able to start and stop videos) using your PocketWizards?

==Want more details about your PocketWizard radios?==

''PocketWizard Standard Channel Radios''

*[[PlusX]]

*[[Plus III]]

*[[Plus IV]]

*[[MultiMAX]]

''ControlTL Technology''

*[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|Canon and Nikon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]]

*[[FlexTT6|Canon FlexTT6]]

*[[PowerMC2]]

*[[PowerST4]]

This is a living document. As features change and grow, so will this wiki. If you have a question that is not answered here (or you just can't find it!), please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact contact us directly.]

You may also want to visit [https://pocketwizard.com PocketWizard.com]. It's a nice place, too.

<videoflash>6wsSFsyJTOA</videoflash>

Channels (CE/Europe)

2026-02-26T15:52:04Z

Heathers: /* CE E Release Camera (LR) Channels */

{{recommended reading|Canon Compatibility|or [[Nikon Compatibility]]}}
__TOC__

Channels allow you to work with other photographers or keep your triggering exclusive. Some Channels operate on different frequencies to help you avoid radio interference. All PocketWizard radios set to the same Channel work together.

This section has Channel tables for the CE / European frequency radios that operate between 433.62 and 434.22 MHz. If you have FCC frequency radios that operate between 340 and 354 MHz range then visit the [[Channels|FCC Channels]] page.

There are two kinds of PocketWizard Channels: Standard Channels and ControlTL Channels.

== CE Standard Channels ==

Standard Channels are used when triggering a Plus series (Plus, Plus II, PlusX or Plus III), MultiMAX or other PocketWizard radio that performs triggering only and not power control or TTL functions.

=== CE Standard Channels 1 through 16 ===

Standard Channels 1 through 16 are considered Classic or Legacy Channels and are the most basic PocketWizard Channels. They are used for simple triggering scenarios, and contain no zones, power control, or TTL functions.

These Channels all exist on the same frequency. Each channel is its own 16-bit digital code on top of that frequency. The frequency in use for CE radios is 433.62 MHz.

The Plus and Plus II radios use only channels 1 through 4. The PlusX radios use Channels 1 through 10

All other PocketWizard radios use Standard Channels 1 through 16.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="5"|CE Standard Channels 1 through 16
|-
!Standard Channel
|rowspan="5"|Plus and Plus II only use channels 1 through 4
|rowspan="17"|All PocketWizard radios including: MAX, MultiMAX, ControlTL radios, OEM flashes, Sekonic meters, Classics *
|-
|1
|-
|2
|-
|3
|-
|4
|-
|5
|-
|6
|-
|7
|-
|8
|-
|9
|-
|10
|-
|11
|-
|12
|-
|13
|-
|14
|-
|15
|-
|16
|-
|}
<nowiki>*</nowiki> = some very early models of the Classic only had Channels 1 through 10
</div>

=== CE Standard Channels 17 through 32 ===

Standard Channels 17 through 32 were introduced with the PocketWizard MAX. They are also called Quad-Zone Triggering channels or MultiMAX channels. These Channels add the benefit of Zones A, B, C, and D. Zones allow you to control up to 4 different groups of lights on the same Channel.

These Channels use the 434.22mHz frequency, and each Channel number is its own 24-bit digital code.

== CE ControlTL Channels ==

ControlTL Channels were introduced with the Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5. They are used in all ControlTL radios like the Nikon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5, as well as the PowerST4, PowerMC2, or other ControlTL radios. These channels allow for remote power control of compatible studio flashes, and work with Canon E-TTL II and Nikon i-TTL/CLS commands.

ControlTL Channels do not have a unique channel code like Standard Channels and are separated only by frequency.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="3"|CE ControlTL Channels 1 through 3
|-
!ControlTL Channel
!Frequency
|rowspan="21"|All PocketWizard ControlTL radios like: MiniTT1, FlexTT5 PowerST4, PowerMC2
|-
|1
|433.42
|-
|2
|434.42
|-
|3
|433.92
|}
</div>

== CE E Release Flash Channels ==

E Channels were introduced with the E Release firmware upgrade in September 2019. This upgrade is available for the Plus III, Plus IV, FlexTT5, and Canon FlexTT6 radios. The E Channel range is from Channel 1 to Channel 32. These Channels are QuadZone Triggering Channels and Zones are available for all 32 Channels. The E Channels are only available on PocketWizard radios that have been upgraded to the E Release firmware protocol and will only communicate with other E Channels.

Many Channels use the same frequency but all Channels have their own digital code. For example, a radio set to Channel 1, operating at 433.560 MHz cannot trigger another radio set to Channel 6, even though they share the same frequency.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="3"|CE E Release Flash Channels 1 through 32
|-
!E Release Flash Channel
!Frequency
|rowspan="33"|All PocketWizard radios with E Release firmware (either pre-installed or upgraded after purchase
|-
|1
|433.560
|-
|2
|434.280
|-
|3
|433.200
|-
|4
|434.640
|-
|5
|433.920
|-
|6
|433.560
|-
|7
|434.280
|-
|8
|433.200
|-
|9
|434.640
|-
|10
|433.920
|-
|11
|433.560
|-
|12
|434.280
|-
|13
|433.200
|-
|14
|434.640
|-
|15
|433.920

|-
|16
|433.560
|-
|17
|434.280
|-
|18
|433.200
|-
|19
|434.640
|-
|20
|433.920
|-
|21
|433.560
|-
|22
|434.280
|-
|23
|433.200
|-
|24
|434.640
|-
|25
|433.920
|-
|26
|433.560
|-
|27
|434.280
|-
|28
|433.200
|-
|29
|434.640
|-
|30
|433.920
|-
|31
|433.560
|-
|32
|434.280

|}
</div>

== CE E Release Camera (LR) Channels ==

E Channels were introduced with the E Release firmware upgrade in September 2019. This upgrade is available for the Plus III, Plus IV, FlexTT5, and Canon FlexTT6 radios. The E Channel range is from Channel 1 to Channel 80. These Channels are QuadZone Triggering Channels and Zones are available for all 80 Channels. The E Channels are only available on PocketWizard radios that have been upgraded to the E Release firmware protocol and will only communicate with other E Channels.

Many Channels use the same frequency but all Channels have their own digital code. For example, a radio set to Channel 2, operating at 433.420 MHz cannot trigger another radio set to Channel 14, even though they share the same frequency.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="3"|CE E Release Camera Channels 1 through 80
|-
!E Release LR Channel
!Frequency
|rowspan="81"|All PocketWizard radios with E Release firmware (either pre-installed or upgraded after purchase
|-
|1
|433.320
|-
|2
|433.420
|-
|3
|433.520
|-
|4
|433.620
|-
|5
|433.720
|-
|6
|433.820
|-
|7
|433.920
|-
|8
|434.020
|-
|9
|434.120
|-
|10
|434.220
|-
|11
|434.320
|-
|12
|434.420
|-
|13
|433.320
|-
|14
|433.420
|-
|15
|433.520
|-
|16
|433.620
|-
|17
|433.720
|-
|18
|433.820
|-
|19
|433.920
|-
|20
|434.020
|-
|21
|434.120
|-
|22
|434.220
|-
|23
|434.320
|-
|24
|434.420
|-
|25
|433.320
|-
|26
|433.420
|-
|27
|433.520
|-
|28
|433.620
|-
|29
|433.720
|-
|30
|433.820
|-
|31
|433.920
|-
|32
|434.020
|-
|33
|434.120
|-
|34
|434.220
|-
|35
|434.320
|-
|36
|434.420
|-
|37
|433.320
|-
|38
|433.420
|-
|39
|433.520
|-
|40
|433.620
|-
|41
|433.720
|-
|42
|433.820
|-
|43
|433.920
|-
|44
|434.020
|-
|45
|434.120
|-
|46
|434.220
|-
|47
|434.320
|-
|48
|434.420
|-
|49
|433.320
|-
|50
|433.420
|-
|51
|433.520
|-
|52
|433.620
|-
|53
|433.720
|-
|54
|433.820
|-
|55
|433.920
|-
|56
|434.020
|-
|57
|434.120
|-
|58
|434.220
|-
|59
|434.320
|-
|60
|434.420
|-
|61
|433.320
|-
|62
|433.420
|-
|63
|433.520
|-
|64
|433.620
|-
|65
|433.720
|-
|66
|433.820
|-
|67
|433.920
|-
|68
|434.020
|-
|69
|434.120
|-
|70
|434.220
|-
|71
|434.320
|-
|72
|434.420
|-
|73
|433.320
|-
|74
|433.420
|-
|75
|433.520
|-
|76
|433.620
|-
|77
|433.720
|-
|78
|433.820
|-
|79
|433.920
|-
|80
|434.020
|-

|}
</div>

Channels

2026-02-26T15:50:34Z

Heathers: /* Standard Channels 17 through 32 */

PocketWizards send and receive signals by using radio waves. Just like a transistor radio, you can choose a specific frequency (aka Channel) and your radios will send and receive signals with the specific frequency you chose. Channels allow you to work with other photographers or keep your triggering exclusive. All radios using the same Channel will be able to talk to each other.

Channels usually operate on different frequencies and use different coding so photographers will not trigger each other's remotes. PocketWizard radios are made in two different frequency ranges, based on regulations and approval from local governments. FCC frequency units are allowed in North and South America, while CE frequency radios are used for most of the rest of the world. A CE radio cannot talk to an FCC radio and vice versa. The radios also need to use the same firmware protocol - either Legacy or E Release. Each firmware protocol has its own set of Channels.

This section has Channel tables for the USA FCC / IC (Industry Canada) frequency radios that operate between 340 and 354 MHz. If you have CE frequency radios that operate between 433.42 and 434.42 MHz range then visit the [[Channels (CE/Europe)|CE Channels]] page.

==Frequencies, Firmware Protocol, and Channels==

PocketWizards use 2 different frequency ranges (FCC and CE) and have 2 different firmware protocols (Legacy and E Release). Channels are assigned to specific frequencies within those ranges, based on the firmware protocol in the radio. Each Channel is unique. All PocketWizard radios using the same Channel, with the same frequency, with the same firmware protocol, will work together.

=== Frequency Ranges ===
PocketWizard radios communicate wirelessly via radio waves. They operate by sending and receiving information via an internal radio transmitter and receiver (click [https://www.livescience.com/50399-radio-waves.html here] for more info on the basics of RF communication). Just like any radio, they operate on certain frequencies and some frequencies are better than others for our purpose.

In North and South America (and some parts of Asia) we use the 340 – 354 MHz range because it is the least crowded frequency range for our class of wireless triggering devices. This frequency has been approved by the FCC and you will notice an FCC logo on your radios. Other choices like 433 MHz, the 900 – 930 MHz ISM band, or 2.4 GHz have many more interfering devices on them.

You probably noticed that either your home phone system or internet wireless network work off of the popular 900 MHz or 2.4 GHz bands. Bluetooth devices, including cellphones, also operate on 2.4 GHz. You probably don’t know that a lot of utilities (water, gas & electric companies in the US) have adopted the 900 MHz to send/receive communications with throughout their grids and systems.

In our research, we found millions of devices on these bands, whereas between 340-354 MHz, there was much less crowding. A less crowded frequency improves reliability and reduces the possibility of missed shots due to interference.

Unfortunately, this same band is not available for use in many markets including Europe or Asia. The EU has more restrictions on which frequencies can be used. For Europe we use a very narrow band around 433 MHz as permitted by EU regulators. CE regulations do allow for a slightly higher power output that offsets some of the crowding of this frequency range.

Frequency ranges:
North & South America = 340.00 to 354.00 MHz FCC/US
Europe, Asia, and Australia = 433.62 – 434.22 MHz CE

IMPORTANT, PLEASE READ:
PocketWizard radio devices operating on one frequency can not operate with PocketWizard devices on a different radio frequency. Retailers can not ship devices to markets that use a different frequency and we can not provide proper warranty service for products shipped out of their intended market.

=== Firmware Protocol ===

PocketWizard's frequency ranges (340.00 to 354.00 MHz for FCC/US radios and 433.62 – 434.22 MHz for CE radios) have been used for the past 30 years. In 2019, we decided to see if we could extend the range and reliability of our products and created the E Release firmware protocol. Our Legacy firmware protocol and the E Release firmware protocol both offer Channels within our official frequency bands but the different systems use different frequencies within those bands. For example, Legacy Standard Channel 1 uses an FCC frequency of 344.04 MHz while an E Release Flash Channel uses a frequency of 345.44 MHz.

IMPORTANT, PLEASE READ:
PocketWizard radio devices using one firmware protocol can not operate with PocketWizard devices using the other firmware protocol. All radios must be using either all Legacy or all E Release.

==== ''Legacy Firmware'' ====

Hundreds of thousands of photographers have relied on our Legacy firmware since 1990. This firmware has performed well in home studios as well as at worldwide sporting events. The Legacy firmware protocol consists of 3 different types of Channels: Standard Channels, QuadZone Triggering Channels, and ControlTL Channels. See below for details about each type of Channel. All PocketWizard radios can use Legacy Channels.

==== ''E Release Firmware'' ====

The E Release firmware protocol was released in September 2019. This release was a complete overhaul of our firmware and was created for 3 main reasons:
*To give the radio signal better range and reliability
*To streamline our system so you can mix and match your PocketWizard radios more easily
*To help the radios communicate differently with the newer camera models for better compatibility

The E Release firmware protocol consists of 2 different types of Channels: Regular (Flash) E Channels and Long Range (LR) Camera Channels. Some radios now come with the E Release firmware preinstalled. If you have PocketWizards with Legacy firmware, you may be able to upgrade your existing radios to the new firmware protocol. Please see the [PocketWizard E Release] wiki page for more information.

=== Channels ===

To make your PocketWizard radios "talk" to each other, they must be using the same Channel. Once you have confirmed that you have the same frequency and same firmware version on all of your radios, you can choose your Channel. This is done either on the PocketWizard itself or within the PocketWizard Utility program, depending on which radios you are using.

Each PocketWizard Channel uses a specific frequency and a specific coding. If you are in a setting where there may be more than one photographer using PocketWizards, you should each select different Channels so you should not trigger each other's remotes. You can leave the radios set to the default Channel if you are working alone or choose a specific Channel if you prefer.

== Legacy Firmware Standard Channels ==
Standard Channels are used when triggering a Plus series, MultiMAX, or other PocketWizard radio that performs triggering only and not power control or TTL functions.

=== Standard Channels 1 through 16 ===
Standard Channels 1 through 16 are considered Classic Channels and are the most basic PocketWizard Channels. They are used for simple triggering scenarios, and contain no Zones, power control, or TTL functions. The transmitter sends a very simple, "fire now!" signal.

These Channels all exist on the same frequency. Each Channel has its own 16-bit digital code on top of that frequency. The frequency in use for USA FCC/IC radios is 344.04 MHz.

The Plus and Plus II radios use only Channels 1 through 4. The PlusX uses Channels 1 through 10. The Plus III, Plus IV, and MultiMAX radios use a total of 32 Channels. 1-16 are Standard Channels, 17-32 are Quad-Zone Triggering Channels (see below for details).

The ControlTL radios can also use Standard Channels, in addition to ControlTL Channels, though adjustments may need to be made through the PocketWizard Wiki.

Older PocketWizard "Classic" radios use Standard Channels 1 through 16. Some very early models of the Classic only had Channels 1 through 10.

Aftermarket (OEM) product compatibility:
*Sekonic meters with PocketWizard modules can use Standard Channels 1-32.
*Flashes with built in PocketWizard receivers, like Profoto, Photogenic, Dynalite, and Norman can use Standard Channels 1-32.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="5"|Standard Channels 1 through 16
|-
!Standard Channel
|rowspan="5"|Plus and Plus II only use Channels 1 through 4, PlusX radios use Channels 1 through 10
|rowspan="17"|Most PocketWizard radios including: MAX, MultiMAX, ControlTL radios, Plus III, Plus IV, OEM flashes, and Sekonic meters use Channels 1-16
|-
|1
|-
|2
|-
|3
|-
|4
|-
|5
|-
|6
|-
|7
|-
|8
|-
|9
|-
|10
|-
|11
|-
|12
|-
|13
|-
|14
|-
|15
|-
|16
|-
|}
</div>

<nowiki />*

=== Standard Channels 17 through 32 ===
Standard Channels 17 through 32 were introduced with the PocketWizard MAX. They are also called Quad-Zone Triggering Channels or MultiMAX Channels. These Channels add the benefit of Zones A, B, C, and D. This allows you to enable or disable up to 4 different groups of lights (Zones) from your transmitting PocketWizard. You can have as many remotes as you want in each Zone.

These Channels are each on their own frequency and each Channel number is its own 20-bit digital code.
Quad Zone Triggering Channels are available on any PocketWizard radios that have 32 Channels, including the MAX, MultiMAX, Plus III, and Plus IV.

The ControlTL radios can also use Quad Zone Triggering Channels, in addition to ControlTL Channels, though adjustments may need to be made through the PocketWizard Utility program.

Aftermarket product compatibility:
Sekonic meters with PocketWizard modules can use Standard Channels 1-32.
Flashes with built in PocketWizard receivers, like Profoto, Photogenic, Dynalite, and Norman can use Standard Channels 1-32.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="3"|Standard Channels 17 through 32
|-
!Standard Channel
!Frequency
|rowspan="17"|Most PocketWizard radios including: MAX, MultiMAX, ControlTL radios, Plus III, Plus IV, OEM flashes, and Sekonic meters use Channels 17-32
|-
|17
|346.5
|-
|18
|347
|-
|19
|347.5
|-
|20
|348
|-
|21
|348.5
|-
|22
|349
|-
|23
|349.5
|-
|24
|350
|-
|25
|350.5
|-
|26
|351
|-
|27
|351.5
|-
|28
|352
|-
|29
|352.5
|-
|30
|353
|-
|31
|353.5
|-
|32
|354
|-
|}
</div>

== ControlTL Channels ==

ControlTL Channels were introduced with the Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5. They are used in all ControlTL radios like the Canon & Nikon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5, the Canon FlexTT6, as well as the PowerST4, PowerMC2, or other ControlTL radios. These Channels receive TTL communication from the camera and send it to the flashes. This allows the radios to use TTL metering and/or HSS with compatible flashes, power control, and HyperSync.

ControlTL Channels do not have a unique channel code like Standard Channels, and are separated only by frequency. Note: FCC radios have 20 ControlTL Channels. For CE radios, there are only 3 ControlTL Channels, due to the limited bandwidth. Please see our [[Channels (CE/Europe)|CE Channels]] page for details.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="3"|FCC ControlTL Channels 1 through 20
|-
!ControlTL Channel
!Frequency
|rowspan="21"|All PocketWizard ControlTL radios like: MiniTT1, FlexTT5 PowerST4, PowerMC2
|-
|1
|340
|-
|2
|345
|-
|3
|341
|-
|4
|346
|-
|5
|346.5
|-
|6
|347
|-
|7
|347.5
|-
|8
|348
|-
|9
|348.5
|-
|10
|349
|-
|11
|349.5
|-
|12
|350
|-
|13
|350.5
|-
|14
|351
|-
|15
|340.5
|-
|16
|341.5
|-
|17
|342
|-
|18
|342.5
|-
|19
|343
|-
|20
|345.5
|-
|}
</div>

== E Release Flash Channels ==

E Channels were introduced with the E Release firmware upgrade in September 2019. This upgrade is available for the Plus III, Plus IV, FlexTT5, and Canon FlexTT6 radios. The E Channel range is from Channel 1 to Channel 32. These Channels are QuadZone Triggering Channels and Zones are available for all 32 Channels. The E Channels are only available on PocketWizard radios that have been upgraded to the E Release firmware protocol and will only communicate with other E Channels.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="3"|FCC E Release Flash Channels 1 through 32
|-
!E Release Flash Channel
!Frequency
|rowspan="33"|All PocketWizard radios with E Release firmware (either pre-installed or upgraded after purchase
|-
|1
|345.44
|-
|2
|346.16
|-
|3
|346.88
|-
|4
|343.64
|-
|5
|347.60
|-
|6
|348.32
|-
|7
|344.36
|-
|8
|346.52
|-
|9
|347.24
|-
|10
|347.96
|-
|11
|348.68
|-
|12
|345.08
|-
|13
|342.92
|-
|14
|344.00
|-
|15
|344.72
|-
|16
|349.04
|-
|17
|345.80
|-
|18
|341.48
|-
|19
|340.76
|-
|20
|340.04
|-
|21
|343.28
|-
|22
|342.56
|-
|23
|341.84
|-
|24
|341.12
|-
|25
|340.40
|-
|26
|342.20
|-
|27
|349.76
|-
|28
|350.48
|-
|29
|351.20
|-
|30
|349.40
|-
|31
|350.12
|-
|32
|350.84

|}
</div>

== E Release LR (Long Range) Camera Channels ==

LR Channels were introduced with the E Release firmware upgrade in September 2019. This upgrade is available for the Plus III, Plus IV, Nikon FlexTT5, and (FCC version only) PowerMC2 radios and will be expanded to more radios in the future. To access the LR Channels, press the Mode button on the radio until you see LR on the screen. The LR Channel range is from Channel 1 to Channel 80. These Channels are QuadZone Triggering Channels and Zones are available for all 80 Channels. The LR Channels are only available on Plus III or Plus IV radios that have been upgraded and will only communicate with other E Channels.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="3"|E Release LR Channels 1 through 80
|-
!E Release Long Range Channel
!Frequency
|rowspan="81"|All PocketWizard radios with E Release firmware (either pre-installed or upgraded after purchase)
|-
|1
|340.00
|-
|2
|340.20
|-
|3
|340.40
|-
|4
|340.60
|-
|5
|340.80
|-
|6
|341.00
|-
|7
|341.20
|-
|8
|341.40
|-
|9
|341.60
|-
|10
|341.80
|-
|11
|342.00
|-
|12
|342.20
|-
|13
|342.40
|-
|14
|342.60
|-
|15
|342.80
|-
|16
|343.00
|-
|17
|343.20
|-
|18
|343.40
|-
|19
|343.60
|-
|20
|343.80
|-
|21
|344.00
|-
|22
|344.20
|-
|23
|344.40
|-
|24
|344.60
|-
|25
|344.80
|-
|26
|345.00
|-
|27
|345.20
|-
|28
|345.40
|-
|29
|345.60
|-
|30
|345.80
|-
|31
|346.00
|-
|32
|346.20
|-
|33
|346.40
|-
|34
|346.60
|-
|35
|346.80
|-
|36
|347.00
|-
|37
|347.20
|-
|38
|347.40
|-
|39
|347.60
|-
|40
|347.80
|-
|41
|348.00
|-
|42
|340.10
|-
|43
|340.30
|-
|44
|340.50
|-
|45
|340.70
|-
|46
|340.90
|-
|47
|341.10
|-
|48
|341.30
|-
|49
|341.50
|-
|50
|341.70
|-
|51
|341.90
|-
|52
|342.10
|-
|53
|342.30
|-
|54
|342.50
|-
|55
|342.70
|-
|56
|342.90
|-
|57
|343.10
|-
|58
|343.30
|-
|59
|343.50
|-
|60
|343.70
|-
|61
|343.90
|-
|62
|344.10
|-
|63
|344.30
|-
|64
|344.50
|-
|65
|344.70
|-
|66
|344.90
|-
|67
|345.10
|-
|68
|345.30
|-
|69
|345.50
|-
|70
|345.70
|-
|71
|345.90
|-
|72
|346.10
|-
|73
|346.30
|-
|74
|346.50
|-
|75
|346.70
|-
|76
|346.90
|-
|77
|347.10
|-
|78
|347.30
|-
|79
|347.50
|-
|80
|347.70
|-
|}
</div>

== Channel and Frequency Overlap ==

Some ControlTL Channels use the same frequencies as some Standard Channels. A ControlTL Channel broadcasting on a Standard Channel's frequency will not trigger it, but if the radio transmissions are occurring at the same time, then there is a possibility one or both may not trigger. A single ControlTL transmitter set to transmit on both Standard Channel 17 and ControlTL Channel 5 will handle this properly. Two radios on the same frequency, like a MultiMAX transmitting on Standard Channel 18 and a ControlTL radio receiving on ControlTL Channel 6, may interfere with each other - when the MultiMAX is transmitting, the ControlTL receiver may not hear its trigger because it is on the same frequency.

<div align="center">
{| border="1" class="wikitable"
!colspan="3"|Channels on the same Frequency
|-
!Standard Channel
!ControlTL Channel
!Frequency
|-
|17
|5
|346.5
|-
|18
|6
|347
|-
|19
|7
|347.5
|-
|20
|8
|348
|-
|21
|9
|348.5
|-
|22
|10
|349
|-
|23
|11
|349.5
|-
|24
|12
|350
|-
|25
|13
|350.5
|-
|26
|14
|351
|-
|}
</div>

==Mixing ControlTL and Standard Channels==

It is easy to use [[ControlTL]] and Standard Channel radios together, combining both types of Channel into one setup. How you make this work will depend primarily on the transmitter you are using.

===ControlTL Transmitter===
If you are using a [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1, FlexTT5]] or a [[FlexTT6|FlexTT6]] as a transmitter, you can incorporate Standard Channel remotes without changing any radio settings. The MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 transmit both ControlTL and Standard Channels simultaneously, allowing any PockwetWizard receiver to be triggered in sync. This enables you to use TTL or power-controlled flashes alongside other manual flashes.

For this setup, simply match all the Channels on your radios. To see what Channels you are using on your ControlTL transmitter, connect the radio to your computer via USB and launch the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. Navigate to the [[Channel Tab]] and note both the ControlTL Transmit Channel and Standard Transmit Channel. By default the MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 use ControlTL and Standard Channel 1 in Configuration 1 (C1).

===Standard Channel Transmitter===
If you are using a Standard Channel radio like the [[Plus III]], [[PlusX]], [[MultiMAX]], or [[Plus II]] as a transmitter, you can still use your FlexTT5s as receivers. The FlexTT5 can only receive on one type of Channel at a time. In order for the FlexTT5 to receive on a Standard Channel, you will want to configure it for [[Misc Tab#Basic Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]]. Once the radio is set to Basic Trigger, just match the receive Channel to that of your transmitter.

''NOTE: We highly recommend using Basic Trigger Mode for FlexTT5s meant to receive on a Standard Channel. Only use the "Use ControlTL for Receive" check-box if you need your receiving FlexTT5 to use [[Relay Mode]] to trigger a TTL remote in turn.''

== Mixing E Release Channels with Legacy Channels ==

A radio that has been upgraded to the E Release will not work with any PocketWizard radios that have not been upgraded to the E Release. However, any radio that has the E Release can be downgraded to work with Legacy Channels. If you wish to use your E Release upgraded radio with a Legacy radio, connect it to the Utility program. Click "Check for Updates". Select Legacy Firmware and proceed as directed. Once your radio has been downgraded, it will use the Legacy Channels and you can use it with any older PocketWizard radio.

PocketWizard Wiki:Privacy policy

2026-01-02T16:31:20Z

Heathers: updated to Falls Rd address

Lab Partners Associates, Inc. d/b/a LPA Design ("LPA") has created this Privacy Policy ("Privacy Policy") to demonstrate its commitment to fully disclosing the information collection and use practices applicable to this Internet website (the "Site").

'''By using or accessing the Site, you signify your acceptance of the terms of this Privacy Policy. If you do not agree to the terms of this Privacy Policy, please do not use the Site, products and/or services and exit the Site immediately.'''

#'''Types of Information Collected On The Site And Method of Collection'''
#;'''A. General Information Collection'''
#:*By Browsing. As you browse the Site the Internet protocol (IP) address of your computer will be collected by a third party entity to evaluate Site traffic and usage patterns. LPA will not have access to data pertaining to individual site visitors. Such information is aggregated with tracking data from all visitors to the Site. If you only browse this Site, you are not required to identify yourself or provide any personally identifiable information. For purposes of this Privacy Policy, the term "Personally Identifiable Information" refers to any information that identifies or can be used to identify, contact, or locate the person to whom such information pertains.
#:*By Site Requirement. You will be required to provide Personally Identifiable Information in the following circumstances:
#::*To register as a member of the POCKETWIZARD blog ("Blog") you will be required to provide a user name that you create and a personal, active e-mail address to Auttomatic Inc. ("Auttomatic"), the company which hosts the Blog through its website at WordPress.com.
#::*To register your product on the Site you will be required to provide your name, address, e-mail address, date the product was purchased, country from which the product was purchased, product name, and product model and serial number.
#::*If you send a message or inquiry to LPA you will be required to provide your e-mail address.
#:*By User's Voluntary Submission. You may voluntarily provide Personally Identifiable Information in the following circumstances:
#::*When commenting on the Blog hosted by Auttomatic you may choose to provide Personally Identifiable Information, such as your residential or business contact information. If you post Personally Identifiable Information anywhere on the Blog, it will be subject to Auttomatic's Privacy Policy at WordPress.com. Such information will be available to third parties and you may receive unsolicited messages from those parties. LPA has no obligation to ensure the security or confidentiality of any information you choose to make available anywhere on the Blog. Also, LPA cannot ensure that third parties who have access to such information will respect your privacy. Please exercise caution when deciding to disclose Personally Identifiable Information.
#::*If you register a product on the Site, you may choose to provide your company name, job position, or telephone number.
#::*If you send a message or inquiry to LPA, you may choose to provide your name and telephone number, or other Personally Identifiable Information in your message or inquiry.
#;'''B. Cookies'''
#;In the customer service and warranty portions of the Site, LPA uses a feature of your browser to set "cookies" on your computer. Cookies may also be set by Auttomatic when you use the Blog. To learn about how Auttomattic uses cookies, please review its Privacy Policy on WordPress.com. Cookies are small packets of information sent by the Site through your browser to your computer. LPA uses cookies to save information that you submit to the Site so you do not have to re-enter it each time you visit theSite. These cookies can be deleted or modified through your browser Internet settings. If you do not want your browser to accept cookies, you can turn off the cookie acceptance option in your browser's setting. You may modify your browser preference to provide you with choices relating to cookies. You have the choice to accept all cookies, to be notified when a cookie is set or to reject all cookies. If you choose to reject cookies you may be unable to use those LPA services that require registration in order to participate, will have to sign in each time you visit the Site, or may not be able to utilize fully all of the Site's features and information.
#;'''C. Information on Children'''
#;LPA does not knowingly collect information from children under the age of 13. Product registration and Site usage is not intended for people under the age of 13. If LPA learns that it has Personally Identifiable Information on a child under the age of 13, LPA will delete that information from its systems. LPA encourages parents and guardians to monitor children's online usage. Parental control protections, such as computer hardware, software or filtering services, are commercially available to limit the access to material that is harmful to minors.
#'''How Information Collected On The Site Is Used By LPA'''
#;The information collected by and through the Site is owned solely by LPA and will be used, in whole or in part, by LPA and its subsidiaries, affiliates, distributors, and other entities that may be involved in the operation of this Site. The third parties that LPA shares Personally Identifiable Information with and the use of that information by such third parties is discussed more fully in Sections 3 and 4. LPA may use the information collected by and through this Site, individually or in an aggregate form, as follows:
#*to contact you about the Site. For example, LPA may use the information to inform you of changes to this Privacy Policy and the Terms of Use Agreement of the Site, to inform you that you have violated the Terms of Use Agreement, to inform you that the Site is suspended for maintenance, or to inform you of a change in ownership or control of the information collected by and through the Site;
#*to evaluate products and services LPA could offer to you;
#*to monitor or improve use of the Site;
#*to monitor compliance with LPA's Terms of Use Agreement of the Site;
#*to track products that you have purchased;
#*to track your product warranties, service requests, repairs, and technical support inquiries;
#*to send you product update bulletins for products that you have purchased; and
#*to respond to inquires you send to LPA. 
#;The Site, LPA, and/or a subsidiary or division of LPA may be sold along with its assets, or other transactions may occur in which your Personally Identifiable Information is one of the business assets transferred. In such a case, your Personally Identifiable Information, which LPA has collected, may be one of the business assets LPA transfers. 
#;LPA reserves the right to disclose the information collected by and through this Site, including your Personally Identifiable Information, as required by law and when LPA believes that such disclosure is necessary (i) to protect LPA's rights, a third party's rights, or the rights of the public at large; or (ii) to comply with a judicial proceeding, subpoena, court order or other legal process served on LPA. The disclosure of this information may be without notice to you.
#'''With Whom LPA Shares Information Collected On This Site'''
#;LPA may share the Personally Identifiable Information collected by and through this Site with its subsidiaries, affiliates, distributors, and entities that may be involved in the operation of this Site. LPA does not sell, rent, or transfer your Personally Identifiable Information to any other third parties, except as otherwise provided in Section 2. Some of LPA's subsidiaries, affiliates, distributors, and entities involved in the operation of the Site may be located outside of your home country. '''By using LPA's Site, you consent to the transfer of your Personally Identifiable Information to these parties.''' 
#;Auttomatic hosts the Blog on this Site through its website at WordPress.com. LPA does not have access to the e-mail address(es) that you provide to Auttomatic to register for the Blog. If you provide any information to Auttomatic, including any information you submit while using the Blog, you will be subject to Auttomatic's Privacy Policy on WordPress.com.
#'''How Information Shared By LPA Is Used By Its Distributors'''
#;LPA's distributors may use your e-mail address to contact you about special offers, send you promotional material, or to track product warranties, repairs, and service inquiries. Once Personally Identifiable Information is shared with LPA distributors, you will be subject to that distributor's privacy policy or practices. 
#;While LPA will seek to require its affiliates, subsidiaries, and distributors to follow appropriate privacy policies and security measures, LPA does not bear responsibility for the actions or policies of any third party, and you should review the privacy practices of such third parties prior to providing any of your Personally Identifiable Information on the Site or the Blog. If you would like more information about any third party receiving your Personally Identifiable Information, please contact LPA at the contact information provided in Section 9 of this Privacy Policy.
#'''Security And Encryption'''
#;LPA does not currently use SSL encryption technology to secure Personally Identifiable Information that you provide to LPA on the Site. As a result, Personally Identifiable Information that you submit to the Site may not be secure. LPA does use a secure server which encrypts information transmitted between your browser and our server. Our security policies are reviewed periodically and revised as required. The servers and databases for the Site that contain Personally Identifiable Information are stored in a physically secure and climate controlled off-site facility. We protect against data loss by backing-up data, performing consistency checks, and restricting access to information on our servers and in our databases. It is important to remember that whatever you transmit or disclose online can be collected and used by others or unlawfully intercepted by third parties.
#'''Third Party Links'''
#;Our Site may contain external links to third party websites. We have no control over, and are not responsible for, the content of, or information gathered by these other websites. Any Personally Identifiable Information collected by such third parties is subject to such third parties' privacy policies. The third party owners of these Sites, except LPA distributors and Automattic, which hosts the Blog, do not have access to the Personally Identifiable Information collected on the LPA Site. These third parties may themselves set and access their own cookies on your computer if you choose to have cookies enabled in your browser and you access their websites. Third parties' use of cookies is subject to their own privacy policies.
#'''Notification Of Changes'''
#;LPA reserves the right, at any time and without notice, to add to, change, update or modify this Privacy Policy simply by posting such change, update, or modification on the Site. Any such change, update or modification will be effective immediately upon posting on the Site. If at any point LPA decides to use Personally Identifiable Information in a manner different from that stated at the time it was collected, we may notify you by way of an e-mail or some other means. Your continued use of the Site shall constitute your acceptance of such revised Privacy Policy. Since this Privacy Policy may change from time to time, you should review it periodically before you provide any additional Personally Identifiable Information anywhere on the Site.
#'''LPA Contact Information'''
#::Heather Simons
#::Lab Partners Associates, Inc. dba LPA Design
#::935 Falls Road
#::Shelburne, VT 05482
#::Telephone: (802) 318-4456
#::Email: [mailto://wiki@pocketwizard.com/ wiki@pocketwizard.com]

Last Revised 10/08

PocketWizard Games

2025-11-06T16:11:36Z

Heathers: /* Hot Shoe Disable */ added note about hot shoe connection with mirrorless

'''You can use Google Translate to view this Wiki in a different language. Go to [https://translate.google.com translate.google.com], then type ''wiki.pocketwizard.com'' into the box. Click the arrow in the box to see the new page.'''

This page was specifically designed to help support photographers at The Games in Tokyo for July 2021. The information here can also be helpful for any events with large quantities of photographers. This page was created by Shawn Cullen, a veteran of many large sporting events and Heather Simons, PocketWizard Tech Support Manager. It is designed to help you with setup, answer questions, and includes basic troubleshooting ideas. It will also let you know about special features that you may not be aware of. For best results, we suggest that photographers use Plus III radios with the E Release firmware and strongly consider installing a Custom ID on their units.

==PocketWizard Radios and Firmware==

'''August 1, 2020: SEE NOTE [[#The E Release and Custom IDs|BELOW]] FOR NEW PLUS III FIRMWARE UPDATE!'''

MultiMAX radios have been the gold standard for triggering remotes at sporting events and are known for their rock solid reliability. Our firmware has worked well over the past 30 years but since it was released, there have been many changes in technology. In today’s world, there are a lot more products that can cause RF interference than ever before, between television cameras, LED scoreboards, and simply far more photographers on the field at the same time.

At PocketWizard, we wanted to ensure that photographers would never miss a shot. We released the new E Release firmware protocol on September 19th, 2019. This new special firmware upgrade for PocketWizard Plus III radios extends the signal range drastically. It is also less susceptible to RF interference.

PocketWizard FCC radios use a frequency range of 340-354 MHz. With Legacy firmware, Standard Channels 1-16 have the same frequency of 344.04 while the frequency of QuadZone Triggering Channels 17 to 32 ranges from 346.50 to 354.00 MHz. These Channels allow the user to assign their radios to 4 different Zones as well as having more advanced coding functions and features.

The E Release can more than double the shooting distance of our Legacy firmware and now offers QuadZone Triggering on all Channels. It has E Release Channels 1-32 for flash triggering and adds new LR Channels 1-80, designed specifically for triggering remote cameras. With the new E Release firmware upgrade, each individual channel now has its own separate frequency, so no more Channels sharing the same frequencies, as 1-16 used to. This is especially helpful to increase channel and frequency separation between users.

Besides the increase in the number of additional channels, the E Release firmware enhances the frequency reliability by eliminating frequency drift and making it a more stable frequency over a longer distance.

The E Release firmware is available for the Plus III, the Plus IV, and the Nikon FlexTT5. It is not currently available for the MultiMAX radios. Any new Plus III or Plus IV radios were shipped with the firmware pre-installed and are now called Plus IIIe or Plus IVe radios. You can upgrade any existing units to the E Release by simply purchasing a license for each radio and upgrading through our Utility program. Learn more [https://pocketwizard.com/e-release-firmware/ here].

==Custom IDs and Frequency==

===The Truth about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID can be a valuable asset to a photographer at a major event, as it ensures that nobody else can trigger your Channel.

===A Misconception about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID is NOT a "private frequency"! It is a common misconception that you are getting your own frequency, you are not! A Custom ID which is an exclusive digital code that rides on top of the PocketWizard device frequencies. This exclusive digital code prevents other users from triggering your remote camera or strobes. However, this does not mean you are completely protected. It is possible that other PocketWizard users on the same frequency can block your signal to your receiver, and you can block theirs, even though you have this digital code.

===How Custom IDs Actually Work===

When a Custom ID is created for your device, you are given a 3 digit Custom ID and it is traditionally assigned to Channel 17. However, the Custom ID channel does not use Channel 17’s frequency. The actual frequency used for the ID will vary, depending on your Custom ID code. Most Custom ID’s are placed within channel 17 to 32 since channels 1-16 share the same frequency. Custom ID code information is kept securely and confidentially on file by PocketWizard. Nobody can be assigned to your code and there are no duplicates.

The reason for assigning the Custom ID to Channel 17 with Legacy firmware is due to the Reset feature within the MultiMAX, MultiMAX II, and Plus III. It is recommended every time you turn on your device, do a reset at start up so that any timing delays or other features last use are cleared out, and the device is set to factory default which is Channel 17 with all Zones active.

==Knowing your PocketWizard Frequency==

In situations where you have multiuser environments such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, you need to know your exact Custom ID frequency. This way you know if others will be triggering on your frequency, which could cause issues. If you need to change your Custom ID to another channel for channel separation from other users, you can move the ID to a different frequency if you are using MultiMAX and MultiMAX II radios. However, you can only move it within the 16-channel spread between Channels 17-32.

Switching from TxRx to LR (Long Range mode) does not change your frequency or create channel separation from other users if you have Legacy firmware! LR uses the exact same frequencies, and your receiver can still be blocked by other users. To view your Custom ID and the frequency it is on, for the MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, you can press and hold "A" on your MultiMAX and slide the power switch to one of the ON positions (Transmit or Receive) to display your Custom ID. For the Plus III there should be a label inside the battery compartment with your Custom ID and frequency information.

Let’s use the 100-meter dash at the Games as an example. There will be at least 50+ photographers covering the event, and just think how many remote cameras will be set up just for the finish line. With every photographer triggering their remotes all at the same time as the athletes cross the finish line, with all of those frequencies in the air, the potential for signal blocking is very high! Remember, every Channel between 17 to 32 has a different frequency, but there are only 16 Channels from 17 to 32, so there will be some overlap with Custom IDs. Because Channels 1-16 share the same frequency, 344.04MHz, so there is no point in having your Custom ID set to this frequency. So, with 50+ photographers and possibly 25-30 remotes set up, with only a 16-channel spread for all those Custom ID’s to be placed on, you can see why it is important to know your Custom ID frequency. You need to know what frequency will work best for you and possibly get some Channel separation from everyone else. You can look at the PocketWizard Channel sign-up sheet in the media room to see who is set up on the different channels and know if anyone is set up on the same frequency as your Custom ID.

You can find the frequencies for the different Channels on our [[Channels]] Wiki page.

==The E Release and Custom IDs==

The Plus III units with the E Release and Custom IDs work a little differently. Unlike the Legacy firmware, your Custom ID will use the frequency that the ID is assigned to. For example, when you use your Plus III with Legacy firmware, your Custom ID is assigned to Channel 17 (346.5 MHz) but it may actually trigger on Channel 23’s frequency (349.5 MHz). When you upgrade your radio to the E Release, your Custom ID will trigger on the same frequency as Channel 17, but with E Release frequencies (345.80 MHz for regular Channels or 343.20 MHz for LR Channels).

'''You can now move the Custom ID installed on your Plus IIIe radio to a different frequency and Channel. Please see the '''[[Plus III#Plus_III_CUSTOM_ID|Plus III Custom ID]]''' page for details.'''

==The Essentials of Remote Camera Triggering - Tips from Shawn==

When setting up your remote camera there is a lot to consider and think about. Obviously you want to select the best spot for composition of the image but the way your PocketWizard device is mounted is also very important. You will need to determine the best location to mount the receiver, plus consider other factors as well to ensure that receiver unit can receive the signal from the transmitter consistently and reliably. Shawn has set up literally thousands of cameras at various events, from small gyms to international stadiums, all around the world. His tips and tricks are incredibly valuable and have served him well over the years.

{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
|'''PLUS III E Release FIRMWARE UPDATES'''

Firmware 2.717 or higher: This firmware adds a new mode: Rx LR. This mode is specifically designed for remote camera triggering, when you have a camera in your hand transmitting to a remote camera. Use regular LR mode for the transmitting radio and Rx LR on the remote radio. IMPORTANT: You should also DISABLE the hot shoe on the remote camera. You can do this by taking it out of the hot shoe, turning the camera's hot shoe off, or by holding in the D button till the display changes from CH to Cd to indicate the Plus III's hot shoe is disabled.

'''Plus IIIe current firmware:'''

'''2.740''': This firmware is for most cameras. This will allow the Plus III to be connected to either a mono or stereo cable. If you are using a button trigger or footpedal with the transmitting radio, you MUST use this firmware version for the transmitter, even if you are using remote Sony camera.

'''2.840''': This firmware is for Sony cameras. The Plus III will ONLY trigger with a stereo cable. If you are using a remote Sony camera, you MUST use 2.840 on the remote Plus III. You can use 2.740 on the transmitting radio, even if you are transmitting from another camera (Sony or otherwise) or from a mono connection. You can also use 2.840 on the transmitting radio as long as you have a stereo connection.

Please contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] if you need more help.
|}

===CABLES ARE CRITICAL!===

To trigger a remote camera, you need to use a remote camera cable to connect the PocketWizard to the camera. This allows the radio to trigger the camera through the camera's remote port.

When you are using a mirrorless camera in your hand (with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe) to trigger a remote camera, you '''MUST''' use a cable on the handheld camera as well as one on the remote camera. Many settings on the camera will automatically disable the hot shoe. Using a cable connected to the remote port will ensure the transmitting radio will get a trigger signal from the handheld camera. It is always more reliable than the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. We also suggest disabling the hot shoe on Plus III radios for best results. Hold in the D Zone button for a few seconds until the display changes from CH to Cd.

'''SONY USERS:'''
*Plus III or Plus IV:
For your transmitting camera/PocketWizard with Plus III or Plus IV radios, you '''MUST''' use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your handheld camera. For the remote cameras, you can use the S-VPR1-ACC, the 13377-S, OR the 13369-S (with the USB power tail).
*PlusX:
For your transmitting camera/PocketWizard with Plus III or Plus IV radios, you '''MUST''' use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your handheld camera. For the remote cameras, you the should use the 13377-S, OR the 13369-S (with the USB power tail). If you use the S-VPR1-ACC cable for your remote camera, if the remote camera falls asleep, the radio will lock up.''

'''Choose Your Cable'''

There are 6 main cables, based on camera connections:
*N10-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 10 pin connection, like the D6 and Z8
*N-MCDC2-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 4 pin MCDC2 port, like the D750 and Z7
*CM-N3-ACC: for Canon cameras with the 3 pin port, like the 1DX Mark III and EOS R3
*CM-E3-ACC: for cameras with the 2.5 mm subminiphone port, like most Canon mirrorless as well as many Fuji or Olympus cameras
*S-VPR1-ACC: for Sony cameras with the micro USB port, like the a9 II, when using the Plus III or Plus IV radios
*13377-S: for Sony cameras with the micro USB port, like the a9 II, when using the PlusX radios
If you are not sure which cable you need, you can [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact us] at PocketWizard support.

===TxRx or LR mode===
The main options are: TxRx (Transmit or Receive), Tx Only (Transmit Only), Rx
Only (Receive Only), and LR (Long Range mode). With Plus III firmware 2.716 or higher, you will also have RxLR. For more details and other modes, please see the MultiMAX or Plus III pages. Rx LR mode increases the contact time for your remote camera, which gives you more reliable and consistent triggering, especially in continuous drive mode.

Advice from Shawn:
Personally, I always choose LR (Long Range) mode for triggering remote cameras. It is a slightly slower traveling signal, specifically designed for frequency stability. This keeps the signal true to the transmitted frequency, limiting the frequency drift to prevent it from spreading to adjacent frequencies or Channels. This frequency stability increases signal reliability and distance. The new Rx LR mode also increases contact time on the remote camera, resulting in more reliable triggering. If you have that option, you should be using LR mode on your transmitting radio and RxLR mode for the remote radios.

TxRx mode is mostly intended for use with strobes. It has smaller packets of data being transmitted which allows it to be transmitted and received at faster speeds. These signals allow you to trigger up to X-sync. LR mode has much larger packets of data which transmit at slower speeds. This holds the frequency stable but you will lose a stop or two of sync speed. TxRx mode cannot accept these larger packets with is why you cannot combine the different modes.

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR SONY SHOOTERS: If triggering from a handheld camera to a remote camera with Plus III radios: you must use firmware 2.716 or higher. Use LR mode for your transmitting radio and use RxLR for your remote radios.

===Placement of the Receiver: Hot Shoe vs Railing===

This really depends on the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, and how close the receiver might be to metal objects when placed in the hot shoe. As a general rule, you want to keep the radios away from metal. All digital products, including cameras, are known to put out small amounts of RFN noise or interference. With the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, this amount of RF Noise could definitely be a factor in the transmitted signal being blocked from the receiver. Whenever possible, mount the receiver to a metal railing for stability, using an Isolation/Mounting bar and super clamp to extend the distance away from the metal railing. I fully understand how much space and weight a Super Clamp requires, however it can mean the difference in the ability to trigger the remote camera or not. I never ever suggest putting the receiver on the ground. If the remote camera is set up on the floor, then the hot shoe would be best spot, to at least get the unit higher off the ground. Also, try to avoid placing your receiver next to any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content.

===Height of PocketWizard Device from Ground Level===
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
The height of the PocketWizard device from the ground level is an extremely significant factor to think about. The ground can definitely cut down the signal distance and quality, plus increase the frequency spread to other frequencies. You do not need to mount the receiving radio in the hot shoe of the camera. You can mount the radio in a better position for reception and put the camera where you want it. Remote camera cables are available in 1’ or 3’ lengths and a 10’ extension cable is available to help with extreme situations

===Maintain line of sight to transmitter===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
In smaller venues this may not be such a big deal, but why risk it? With so much RF noise at major events, line of sight to the transmitter should be the top priority when setting up the receiver. Always make sure you can see the transmitter from the receiver once it is mounted and keep the antennas parallel. The only exception to keeping the antennas parallel is when setting up remote cameras in higher elevated positions. I routinely place the receiver upside down so the antenna is more exposed to the rising signal at a lower level. (Note from PocketWizard: upside down is usually not recommended but in extreme situations may be the best course of action.)

===Mini phone extensions and Isolation/Mounting Bar===
I always make it a practice to carry some miniphone extension cables like the PocketWizard MMX for those situations where I need to mount the receiver in places the remote camera cable will not reach. There are also situations where you might want to place the transmitter off the camera to obtain line of sight to the receiver unit. For example, when shooting under an overhang, or dugout. I suggest having options from 10’ to 20’ mini phone extensions just to make sure you can place the receiver in the best spot possible. However, with the longer cables try to avoid running your cables near any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content. The MMX is a 10' cable.

As mentioned earlier, Isolation/Mounting bars are very useful in placing your PocketWizard device in a more optimal position for receiving or transmitting a signal. These are called MB4s and are sold in 4” lengths, however you can connect two of them together by threading one into the other to make an 8” length. And don’t forget about key rings to run your safety cables through. Never ever use the lanyards that come with the PocketWizard devices. They were not designed with intent to be used as a safety when mounting remote cameras. Make sure that the key ring is big enough to slip through the eyelet on the Plus III, and big enough to to slip the safety cable through.

===Hot Shoe Disable===
This feature that allows the photographer to disable the hot shoe contact of their radios. Hot Shoe Disable can be used on both the transmitter and receiver. There are a few reasons to use this feature.

When you’re using a handheld camera with a radio in the top shoe and triggering remote cameras, you may sometimes want to disable the hot shoe of the transmitting radio. This prevents the handheld camera from triggering your remotes with every picture taken, as the radio in the hot shoe won’t get the sync signal from the camera. Turning off the hot shoe gives the photographer the ability to use a trigger button cable (like the BT1) plugged into the transmitting radio, to trigger the remotes when you see fit, just by pressing on the trigger button.

The reason for disabling the hot shoe contact of the receiver is to prevent Auto Relay Mode from engaging. When using a Plus III in the hot shoe of a remote camera, connected by a remote cable, after triggering the camera, the Plus III will automatically transmit a relay signal one Channel higher than the signal it received. For example, if the transmitting radio and the Plus III receiver connected to the remote camera are set to Channel 1, the remote Plus III will then relay a transmitting signal on Channel 2 to trigger a third Plus III unit set to receive and set to Channel 2. This feature was designed in order to trigger strobes with the third Plus III unit. This is the way the product is designed to work.

However, if a second photographer is using Channel 2 and the first photographer is not using relay but just a remote camera, the relay signal could inadvertently trigger the second photographer’s equipment.

In a situation such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, photographers need to register the Channels they plan to use. If a photographer is only planning on triggering remote cameras on (for example) Channel 24, another photographer could be assigned Channel 25. When the photographer using Channel 24 fires his camera remotely, his connected Plus III will trigger any PocketWizard receiver set to Channel 25.

We have also found that the hot shoes of some mirrorless cameras seem to behave differently with a radio in their hot shoe and may not properly trigger the camera. We suggest disabling the hot shoes of your Plus III radios for best results, especially if you are using a mirrorless camera. In some cases, you may need to also block the connection between the PocketWizard's center pin and the camera's sync pin. You can use a thin piece of tape or paper to cover that contact point or just take the PocketWizard out of the camera's hot shoe.

====How to Disable a Plus III Hot Shoe====

Hold down the Zone D button for three seconds until the “CH” on the display changes to “Cd”. The Plus III will not receive any signal from its hot shoe. To enable the hot shoe contacts, simply hold the Zone D button for another three seconds until “Cd” switched back to “CH” on the display or turn the radio off. When the radio is turned back on, it will return to an active hot shoe.

*Legacy Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 1.215
*E Release Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 2.505 or greater

====How to Disable a MultiMAX Hot Shoe====

Start by turning on your MultiMAX to transmit. Then press the *MENU button. Next press the “L” button for Other Functions. Now you will press “B” for Hot Shoe Off. The MultiMAX will show what function is active. For example, if it says "Hot Shoe Off", the shoe is disabled. When you press *MENU L B again, it will change to "Hot Shoe On" and the shoe will be active again.

====Other Ways to Disable a Hot Shoe====

The camera thinks the PocketWizard in its shoe is a flash, which it triggers through the center pin contact. To disable this function, you need to break the connection between the radio and camera's center pins.

The easiest solution is to take the radio out of the remote camera's hot shoe. Unless you are using Relay mode, it does not need to be the in shoe.

One simple way to disable the hot shoe is to physically block the center pin connection, using a thin piece of tape or paper.

You can also turn the hot shoe off by using the camera's flash settings. Simply set the flash setting to "off".

Some settings in your camera will automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent mode, continuous high speed drive, and with Nikons, certain Live View options in the Custom Setting menu (usually d8-"Apply Changes to Live View"). Check your camera's instruction manual for details.

===Batteries vs AC Power Supplies===

Batteries have a finite life span, 50 to 60 hours, whereas AC power supplies can provide continuous power to your PocketWizard device for the duration of your needs, as long as a power outlet is within an acceptable distance.

You can use either AA alkaline or Lithium batteries to power the MultiMAX or Plus III. The Lithium batteries will only last about 10-20% longer than Alkaline batteries. However, they will die off at a faster rate at the end of their capacity than Alkaline batteries. You will need to keep an eye out for this.

AC power supplies obviously need a power outlet to plug into to power your PocketWizard device. It is up to you, the user, to decide what is an acceptable distance to run an extension cord to the nearest power outlet. Most modern arenas, stadium, and sports venues now have power outlets within 10’-20’ of each other eliminating the need for long extension cord runs.

The type of AC power supply depends on your PocketWizard device. The original MultiMAX has three options depending on what version of the MultiMAX you have. Please see the [[AC Adapters]] Wiki page to find the correct adapter for your specific MultiMAX.

The AC power supply for the MultiMAX II, Plus IV, and Plus III is the PW-AC-USB. In all honesty, if you find yourself in a pinch to power your Plus III with AC, you could even use an iPhone charging cube and a USB Mini B cable.

In the event of a power failure or a tripped circuit breaker for the outlet the AC power supply is plugged into, the MultiMAX USB, MultiMAX II, Plus III, and Plus IV, will all still operate as long as two fresh AA batteries are installed. Unfortunately, the first generation MultiMAX using the PW-AC-MX power supply will not work even with batteries installed.

==Troubleshooting & Best Practices==

It is important to know some basic troubleshooting techniques. When you are out in the field and have an issue, you can often isolate and solve the problem by just knowing what to do first. Below are the most common solutions. For more detailed information and for other troubleshooting ideas, please download [[Media:Trouble Shooting - Remote Camera.pdf|this PDF]].

'''Sometimes we all just need a good reset.'''
A reset is ALWAYS one of the best places to start. It is easy to change something without realizing it. Here’s how to reset your radio:

MultiMAX: To reset your MultiMAX unit start with the unit turned OFF. Then press and hold in the C button and slide the power switch to Transmit. When you see the "CLEAR/RESET" message on the LCD screen, release the C button. The radio has now been reset to factory defaults and will automatically reset to channel 17 with all Zones enabled.

Plus III: To reset your Plus III unit, start by holding in the TEST button as you power the radio on. Once you see the LCD screen turn on you can release the TEST button.

*Legacy Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 17 with all Zones enabled.
*E Release Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 1 with all Zones enabled

'''Check your Firmware'''
It is always best to have the most recent firmware version running. To update all PocketWizard device’s that have a USB port you can use the PocketWizard Utility. You can learn more about it here.
To download the PocketWizard Utility click here

Here are the most up to date firmware available for PocketWizard devices
*MultiMAX with USB 7.53
*MultiMax II 8.117
*Plus III Legacy 1.215
*Plus IIIe (E Release) 2.740 / 2.840

'''Check or change your batteries and check your battery contacts'''
Fresh batteries are always a good idea. Also, check your internal battery contacts for signs of corrosion (usually blue or green) or rust. If the contacts are damaged, you can try cleaning them with a pencil eraser, rubbing them with aluminum foil, adding a drop or two of lemon juice or alcohol if needed. Be careful about getting any liquid onto the main board. If the damage is bad, you can usually replace the contacts or back cover.

'''Watch the Lights'''
The LED on your radio should go red briefly any time it sends or receives a signal.
-If your transmitter is not going red, check to see if you disabled the hot shoe on your radio or on your camera. (hint: Silent Shooting mode usually disables the shoe!). You can also use a pencil eraser to clean the hot shoe contacts on your camera and radio. Seems basic but has “fixed” a lot of “broken” equipment over the years.
-If your receiver is not going red, check to see if the radios are on the same Channels, Zones, and/or modes.
-If everything is going red but your remotes are not firing, check your cable. Press test on the radio connected to the camera or flash. If it doesn’t fire, there is an issue with the radio, the cable, or the sync port on the remote equipment.

'''Label Your Radios!'''
If you have 10 Plus III radios and have a problem with one unit, you’ll probably just swap it out for an immediate fix if you’re in a tight spot. But if you don’t know which radio you swapped out and that unit has a problem, how will you know that for next time? When testing equipment, it’s a good idea to label everything-your cameras, flashes, radios, and cables. Then you can swap things around and know what did or didn’t work and can narrow down the issue.

We hope these tips will help ensure a troublefree and successful photo shoot. Please do not hesitate to reach out to PocketWizard tech support for assistance if you are stuck. When contacting us, keep in mind we are typically available from about 10 am – 4 pm EST, Monday through Friday. We do work remotely sometimes and are not always in the office. If you have an urgent matter, please email us at [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] with the word URGENT in the subject line, so we can better see it. We will try to respond as soon as possible. We do check email on the weekends sometimes and will do our best to contact you as soon as possible.

The FAQ

2025-11-05T15:32:55Z

Heathers: /* My PocketWizards aren't working on my new camera! */

Do you have questions about PocketWizard radios in general? Check out these Frequently Asked Questions, compiled by [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support].

====Nothing is working! What should I do?====

Try the following steps:
* If you have a radio with TTL communication, make sure your cameras and flashes are compatible. Please check the [[Canon Compatibility]] and [[Nikon Compatibility]] Wiki pages for details.
* Check your [[batteries]] - sometimes low batteries can affect radio performance.
* Check your camera's flash settings and make sure you did not turn the camera's flash off in the menu, as that disables the hot shoe.
* Make sure all of your radios have been updated to the latest firmware and are using the same version. Connect your radio to the [[PocketWizard Utility]] and navigate to the "[[Update Tab]]." Click the “[[Update Tab#Check for Updates Button|Check for Updates Button]].”
* Make sure your camera and flashes are using the latest firmware, too!
* Perform a [[Factory Reset]] on all of your radios.
* Be sure to power on your equipment top down: flashes first, then radios, then cameras. This is more important for ControlTL radios.
* Take your first shot at 1/160th or 1/200th so the system can properly calibrate timing.
* Take a look at the [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wHu4IF3BIHo troubleshooting video] on YouTube. The video is designed for Plus radios but there is helpful information about all PocketWizard radios.
* Check the [[The FAQ#Questions about your specific radio|FAQ pages]] for your specific PocketWizard radios for detailed troubleshooting.
* Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for troubleshooting help.

===My new PocketWizards aren't working with my old PocketWizards!===

PocketWizards are backwards compatible BUT they need to be using the same frequency and same firmware protocol. Here's what you can check:
* What firmware protocol are your radios using? If you just bought a new PlusXe and are trying to trigger your Plus IIs, they can't talk to each other. You can downgrade and upgrade as needed to make them work. Here's a link for info about how to check that and what to do: [[PocketWizard Firmware]]
* Check the label for your frequency. Radios for North and South America use FCC frequencies (344-354 MHz) while CE radios (for most of the rest of the world) use 433 MHz. If one sticker says CE and the other says FCC, they will never talk to each other. The 2 frequencies use different boards and different antennas.
* If you have ControlTL radios like the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5s and now you are adding in Plus or MultiMAX radios, you need to understand how the Channels work. The [[Channels]] page can help explain that.

====My PocketWizards aren't working on my new camera!====

A transmitting PocketWizard radio needs the sync pulse trigger through the hot shoe so it knows to send a signal to your remote PocketWizard. Camera manufacturers are always trying to improve options for photographers but especially with mirrorless cameras, some of these "new improved" features will automatically disable the hot shoe. If your hot shoe is turned off, your transmitting radio won't get a signal to fire the remote. Any time you take a photo, the LED on the transmitting PocketWizard should go red. If it's not doing that, there's a communication error between the radio and camera, most likely that your hot shoe is disabled. Here are some things to check:
*Check to see if the camera is set to Silent Shooting mode. For most cameras, this disables the hot shoe.
*Check to see if the flash is turned off. This disables the hot shoe.
*Check your drive speed. With some cameras, when you put it in the highest FPS setting (like 20 FPS), it disables the hot shoe.
*If your camera is set to electronic shutter, try switching to mechanical shutter. For some cameras, electronic shutter disables the hot shoe.
*Nikon users: check your custom setting for "Apply Changes to Live View" (usually setting d8 or d9). This mode needs to be turned off. We have also heard that "Starlight Mode" (d10 on some models) may need to be turned on.
*If you have radios with TTL, like the MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and/or FlexTT6, please make sure your new camera is TTL compatible with your existing equipment. If you do not see your camera listed on either the [[Nikon Compatibility | Nikon]] or [[Canon Compatibility | Canon]] compatibility page, it may not be able to communicate with the radios in TTL mode. You should be able to always use them in [[Misc Tab | Basic Trigger]] mode, for manual triggering up to X-sync if TTL is not yet available for your new camera.

====I just upgraded my firmware and it doesn't work! What do I do?====

After updating your firmware, always perform a factory reset with the radio: See RESET B [[Factory Reset#Reset B - Factory_Defaults|here]], or simply hold TEST before you power on your radio and continue to hold TEST for 15 seconds until you see 4 green blinks. While the PocketWizard Utility performs a factory reset automatically when you upgrade the firmware, and has a Factory Reset button on the Update tab, Reset B remains the recommended method after a firmware upgrade.

====What cable do I need?====

You can use the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] at [http://www.pocketwizard.com/ PocketWizard.com] to find the right cable for lots of different cameras and flashes.

Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] if you still have questions.

====How many radios do I need?====

You will need at least 2 PocketWizards, one to work as a transmitter and one for each remote to work as a receiver. For example, if you are triggering one flash from your camera, you would need one for the camera and one for the flash, a total of 2. If you have 3 remote flashes, you would need 4 total radios. If you are triggering 2 remote cameras, you would need 3 radios - one in your hand to send the signal and one for each remote camera.

====Is my camera or flash compatible with your radios?====

Virtually all cameras and flashes with a standard size hot-shoe, PC socket, or sync port are compatible with Standard Channel radios like the [[Plus II]], [[Plus III]], [[PlusX]], and [[MultiMAX]].

Visit our [[Canon Compatibility]] or [[Nikon Compatibility]] pages to see if your camera or flash is compatible with our [[ControlTL]] radios like the [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]].

Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] if you still have questions.

====I can’t update my firmware. Why won’t the Utility recognize my radios?====

Try the following steps:
* Start by making sure you're connecting your radios directly to your computer, rather than through a USB hub.
* Try disconnecting all additional USB devices from your computer.
* Uninstall the [[PocketWizard Utility]] and reinstall the latest version, available for download on this website, https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started.
* Attempt to update the radios using another user account.
* Attempt the update while running your computer in Safe Mode.
* See more options in our [[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]] page.
* Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for troubleshooting help.

====I think my radio needs to be repaired. What do I do?====

Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support]. Warranty and repair inquiries are handled by the distributor in the region in which the radios are purchased, so please include this information in your message.

====Why does PocketWizard make radios in two different frequencies?====

Our radios are sold in [[Frequency|two different versions]] to comply with radio laws in different countries. In the United States, the FCC reserves the 344-354 MHz frequency for PocketWizard systems. In Europe, regulations assign 433-434 MHz. A PocketWizard sold in the USA bears the letters “FCC” on the outer shell; a European version will have the letters “CE.”

====Can I buy my radios directly through PocketWizard?====

Yes! You can buy PocketWizard products directly through the PocketWizard online store if you live in the US or Canada: https://shop.pocketwizard.com/. Or if you prefer, check with your local camera shop to see if they carry our products.

====The hot-shoe on my radio broke off! How do I get it fixed?====

Our radios are made from a glass-reinforced resin material, and shouldn’t break with normal usage. However, if gear gets dropped or knocked over, there is a high risk that some piece of gear will get damaged. A plastic foot allows for a less expensive (and user-serviceable) part to need replacement over a more expensive part like a camera or flash repair. In general, photography equipment like cameras and flashes and radios are not designed to be dropped or knocked over. We’re no exception. We provide a simpler, less expensive, and more accessible repair.

If you feel comfortable with minor repairs and are in the US or Canada, you can purchase a hot shoe directly from https://shop.pocketwizard.com and do the repair yourself or you can send it into us and we will do the repair for you. There are videos on each page so you can see the process before ordering the part. Please contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for details.

If you are outside North America, you can contact your local distributor, they should be able to help you. If you need help finding your local distributor, you can contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for information.

====Why is my remote flash not firing on the first shot?====

While our FlexTT5, FlexTT6, and Standard Channel radios don’t go to sleep, your flash does! Please be sure to set the sleep timer on your flash to either a fairly long period of time or just plain “off”. In Nikon, this setting is called STBY mode in the menu, for Canon it is in the Custom Functions. The MiniTT1 does go to sleep when the camera's meter sleeps so we always suggest doing a half press when you are ready to shoot again.

Note: if you are using ControlTL radios for Canon, the first shot is a calibration shot and will NOT fire the flashes. The second shot will.

====I'm trying to remotely trigger my camera and flash but they don't seem to sync!====

This setup is called relay mode. The trick is that you need to set the radio with your remote flash to receive on a different Channel. Here's how it works:
* The radio in your hand sends signal on Channel 1 (for example) to the radio attached to the camera. That radio triggers the camera through the remote port.
* When the shutter fires, the radio gets a signal through its hot shoe. The radio knows it needs to relay a signal one Channel higher than the one it received, so it will send a trigger on Channel 2. (or whatever is one higher than the one you chose).
* The receiving radio (attached to the flash) receives the signal on the higher Channel and fires the flash.
If you set all the radios to the same Channel, the flash will fire before the camera opens its shutter. The flash just needs the radio to tell it to fire and it does. The camera gets the signal and then needs to confirm focus and exposure before firing, even if everything is set to manual, so there is a slight delay. Relay solves that problem.

====Can I start and stop video recording with my PocketWizards?====
This is not a setting we test but we have found that for most cameras, video mode can be controlled by your PocketWizard. In some cameras, you will need to make a menu change so the camera knows you want to use the shutter for starting and stopping video. For best results, we recommend using the Plus IIIe radios.

====Questions about your specific radio?====

Check out our other FAQ pages for more information on your PocketWizard system:

:[[PocketWizard_E_Release#E_Release_FAQs | PocketWizard E Release FAQ]]

:[[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]]

:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]]

:[[Plus III FAQ]]

:[[PlusX FAQ]]

:[[MultiMAX FAQ]]

:[[PowerMC2 FAQ]]

:[[PowerST4 FAQ]]

MiniTT1 and FlexTT5

2025-09-26T02:50:14Z

Heathers: /* Operation */ adjusted spacing and tweaked wording a little bit

[[File:FlexTT5+MiniTT1.jpg|right|400px|PocketWizard Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5/FlexTT6]]Congratulations on your purchase of the PocketWizard MiniTT1® / FlexTT5/FlexTT6® Wireless Photo Control System for Canon or Nikon DSLR cameras and flashes. You can use the MiniTT1 Transmitter and FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver to control single or multiple off-camera electronic or intelligent TTL flashes. The PocketWizard ControlTL® System takes the complex TTL data being sent through the camera’s hot shoe and digitally interprets and transmits it as a reliable radio signal. You can now place TTL or manual flashes anywhere to illuminate the scene: Around corners, out-of-sight and in bright sunlight. The MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 are compatible with any PocketWizard radio for triggering manual flash or remote cameras.

The Canon-specific MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 radios work within the Canon E-TTL II system. Be sure to check the [[Canon Compatibility]] wiki page for compatibility with your specific camera.

The Nikon-specific MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 radios work within the Nikon i-TTL / CLS system. Be sure to check the [[Nikon Compatibility]] wiki page for compatibility with your specific camera.

All references to TTL are exclusively for the electronic or intelligent TTL systems specific to Canon (E-TTL II) and Nikon (i-TTL / CLS), and not film TTL.

The terms Speedlite or Speedlight are used interchangeably throughout this wiki.

This wiki contains the latest information about the operation of your radios. If you would like to download a PDF of this information, [[PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual|click here]] and follow the instructions.

{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #ffffcc;"
|'''Note:''' The FlexTT6 was created to make the newest generation of Canon cameras (such as the 1DX Mark II and 5D Mark IV) compatible with our ControlTL system. The difference between the FlexTT6 and FlexTT5 is a circuit board hardware change. The functions of the radios are identical. Any information or videos you see, with the exception of compatible cameras, is identical between the FlexTT6 and FlexTT5. To use a FlexTT5 with a FlexTT6, the FlexTT5 will need to be updated to firmware version 6.905 or later to function properly.
|}

__NOTOC__

== Operation ==

{{treasure map}}

'''To quickly begin using your radio, you can follow the directions in the [https://wp2.pocketwizard.com/wp-content/uploads/2020/03/121213255v1.0-Mini_and_Flex-combined_quick_guide.pdf Quick Guide].

For more detailed information, use the links below to find the specific feature you are looking for.

==== [[Getting Started]] ====

This is the first place to start. [[Getting Started | This page]] will walk you through downloading the Utility program to your computer then updating the radios to the latest firmware version. It will also walk you through the proper start up sequence so you can start shooting right away.

==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features|Key Features]]====

Learn more about the key features of your MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 / FlexTT6. Additional information on features can also be found at [https://pocketwizard.com PocketWizard.com]

==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]] ====

Having trouble with your MiniTT1 or FlexTT5/FlexTT6? Check out our [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]] page!

==== [[Safety Warnings]] ====

Information about operating the radios safely can be found here.

==== [[Nikon Compatibility]] ====

Find out exactly what cameras and flashes work with the Nikon-Specific ControlTL radios, and what specific operational considerations are required for your gear.

==== [[Canon Compatibility]] ====

Find out exactly what cameras and flashes work with the Canon-specific ControlTL radios, and what specific operational considerations are required for your gear.

==== [[Batteries]] ====

Battery types, polarity, and life expectancy information.

==== [[PocketWizard Utility]] ====

Connect your radios to your computer via USB and control many aspects of them via the PocketWizard Utility.

==== [[Basic Wireless TTL]] ====

Simple TTL operation instructions. Use all of your Speedlites as one zone of light with the camera making the exposure decision.

==== [[Advanced Wireless TTL]] ====

Advanced i-TTL operation instructions. Control individual zones of light. Control your remote Speedlights manually from the camera position.

==== [[Manual Flash]] ====

Trigger any remote flash simply.

==== [[PowerTracking]] ====

Trigger a compatible remote studio flash and control its power level directly from the camera position.

==== [[HyperSync]] ====

Learn more about increasing your X-Sync speed using HyperSync.

==== [[High Speed Sync]] / Auto FP ====

Use your Speedlites with your camera's fastest shutter speeds. See [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]].

==== [[Channels]] ====

Channels allow you to work collaboratively with other photographers, or to work with your radios exclusively.

==== [[Remote Camera Triggering]] ====

In addition to triggering remote flash, your PocketWizard radios can trigger a remote camera's motor drive port. Relay Mode is covered in this section.

==== [[Factory Reset]] ====

Sometimes you just need the settings in your radio to be like they were when you first took them out of the box.

==== [[Status LED]] ====

This section covers the various colors and blink patterns used by the Status LED.

==== [[Mounting]] ====

Radios perform best when mounted properly.

==== [[Long Range Performance]] ====

Optimize range using these techniques.

==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications]] ====

Details on radio specifics are found here.

==== [[FCC Notice]] ====

The FCC wants you to know...

Long Range Performance

2025-09-12T16:00:28Z

Heathers: /* Orientation */

{{recommended reading|MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications|}}

{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=Antenna performance comparisons.
| image=LongRangePerformanceGraphic.jpg
}}

Long distance performance from your PocketWizards depends on the orientation and position of the radios.

Whenever possible, try to maintain a line of sight between the radios and keep the antennas parallel. While radio does not require line of sight, it does help dramatically. Make sure the radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure they are not blocked by these objects or by hills. Do not mount the radios close to the ground – try to have them several feet above the Earth or building floors whenever possible.

Maintain at least 36" (~ 1 meter) distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

'''''SPECIAL NOTE''''': Some Canon flash models emit RF interference that can reduce the effective operating range of many radio slaves, including PocketWizards and especially the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6. Those models include: 430EX, 430EX III-RT, 580EX, 580EX II and others. See the [[Canon Compatibility]] page for more information. For those model flashes, please consider the mounting suggestions in the pictures above to optimize range. If using Canon’s off shoe cord OC-E3, consider adding a ferrite clamp on the cable near the flash to further increase range.

=Range Extending Options=

==Orientation==
'''Solutions for improved range performance with the Canon 430EX, 430EX III-RT, 580EX and 580EX II flashes.'''

- These flashes emit high levels of RF interference that can affect any PocketWizard radio.

- NOTE: The Canon 600EX-RT II, 600EX-RT, 430EX II, 550EX, 420EX and 270EX have excellent range performance because they do not have high RF noise emissions.

Every electronic device emits some amount of unintended radio frequency (RF) noise. These emissions can range from very little to a lot depending on many factors. This noise can be troublesome for any radio device that depends on receiving radio signals because the RF noise may make it harder for the device to hear the incoming signal. It’s the same as trying to listen to someone talk at a party when everyone around you is talking at the same time and the noise level is very high.

{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 on a Canon 580 EX II.
| image=AC5_image.jpg
| image-width=224
}}

A few Canon flashes, including the popular 580EX II, 580EX and 430EX, emit strong RF noise across the frequency range used by PocketWizard radios, impacting both the FCC 344MHz radios used in the American market and the CE 433MHz radios used in Europe and other international markets.
This interference can impede the out-of-box range performance with any PocketWizard radio. We have found that the amount of interference varies from flash to flash so it is impossible to say precisely what the impact is. In our testing, we found some 580EX II's worked consistently on an FCC 344MHz FlexTT5 Transceiver in the upright position at 100 feet (33 meters) or more. However, some flashes we tested were noisier and in the worst-case scenarios, without any intervening steps to improve range, consistent working range was reduced to 30 feet (10 meters).
There are several ways to improve signal reception and thus increasing the range performance of the radios.

'''Although many of these solutions are demonstrated with a receiving FlexTT5, they can be applied to any PocketWizard radio, including the Plus and MultiMAX radios.'''

''' Read More About Internal Modification to Canon 580EX II reduces RF emissions.[http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/tech_bulletins/580exii_mod/ here].'''

'''The AC5 RF Soft Shield is also available, this is your first line of defense against noisy flashes. With the AC5 correctly installed, your range will increase substantially. For information on how to properly install the the AC5, click [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/ac5_install/ here].'''

===Use the default C2 setting on the receiving FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver===
This channel uses a different frequency than C1 and may reduce RF noise interference and increase range from 10 to 30%. You can also try other channels that operate at different frequencies, especially around 345 to 347 MHz, which include channels 2, 4, 5, 6 & 20. A channel frequency guide can be found on the [[Channels|Channels page.]]

===Use a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver as your transmitter and your receiver.===

As a transmitter, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver has a more optimize-able antenna than the MiniTT1 Transmitter and will improve range up to 20%.

===Straighten out the flash head.===
Lay it on its side and put the antenna in a 180º position. This should increase range from 50 to 100%.

{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better
| image=Flash_straight_out.jpg
}}
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best
| image=Flash_best.jpg
}}

===Orient your antenna so that the tip of the antenna is a vertical straight line with the opposite corner of the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver.===

Yes, it's a bit contorted but it works.
[[File:FlexOptimal.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Optimal Antenna Position]]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
 
 
 

=Hardware Options=
==Use a Canon OC-E3 cord.==
Ideally, use the cord with a ferrite choke added to the end of the cord nearest the flash, to separate the flash from the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver.
For best performance, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 should be 18” or more away from the flash and ideally positioned above it (the higher the radio, the better the reception). For best results, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 should be positioned at least five feet off the ground. This should increase range from 200 to 500%.

{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better
| image=Flex_below_flash.jpg‎
| image-width= 200
}}
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best
| image=Flex_above_flash.jpg
| image-width= 200
}}

{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Ferrite Choke
| image=564Optimize-0318.jpg‎
| image-width= 200
}}

==Mount your flash on one light stand and your FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver on another stand.==
Just be sure there is at least 18" between the Flash and the FlexTT5.

- Use a wide dual light bracket to separate the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transciever from the flash.

{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Dual Flash Bracket with OC-E3 cord.
| image=Dualflashbracket.jpg
| image-width=250
}}

- Use a Manfrotto Superclamp and Flexible Arm attached to a light stand, as seen here when used with a softbox.

{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption=Rear View.
| image=Flashsoftbox2.jpg‎
| image-width=250
}}
{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption= Front view.
| image=Flashsoftbox.jpg‎
| image-width=250
}}

==Use flashes that have no noise issues.==
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=270EX Speedlite.
| image=270EX.jpg
| image-width=150}}
These flashes include the 600EX-RT II, 600EX-RT, 430EX II, 550EX and the 270EX. The 430EX II provides almost as much light as the bigger 580EX II. This flash is smaller and less expensive then the 580EX II. Another alternative is the 270EX flash. The range of this flash is almost as good as the 430EX II. It is compact and easy to carry with the FlexTT5.

 

 

 

 

==Use a PocketWizard designed AC7 Hard Shield for Canon Speedlites.==
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC7 Hard Shield.
| image=AC7.jpg
| image-width=200}}
To enhance the ControlTL™ System range performance when paired with the Canon 580EX, 580EX II and 430EX flashes, PocketWizard developed the AC7 Hard Shield.

The body of the AC7 Hard Shield is made with a material that effectively blocks RF interference (EMI) from clouding the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 antenna. To block noise traveling through connections in the hot shoe, an electronic filter has been added to a hot shoe built into the AC7. Combined, the AC7 shield allows the FlexTT5 to receive transmissions at distances 300 to 500% farther then before and well within the range of most off-camera lighting needs. [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/transmitter_receiver/ac7%20rf%20hard%20shield/ Read more...]

==Use a PocketWizard designed AC5 Soft Shield for Canon Speedlites.==
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 Soft Shield.
| image=AC5_image.jpg
| image-width=200}}
The AC5 RF Soft Shield was designed to block the RF emissions from certain flashes (580EX II, 580EX and 430EX) from interfering with the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6, allowing the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to work at considerably longer range. For proper performance the AC5 must be installed correctly. You can see how to properly install the AC5 Soft Shield [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=AC5_RF_Soft_Shield here]

=Additional Resources=

Looking for additional information on RF and long range radio performance? Check out our [[RF Resources]] page!

Long Range Performance

2025-09-12T15:59:14Z

Heathers:

{{recommended reading|MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications|}}

{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=Antenna performance comparisons.
| image=LongRangePerformanceGraphic.jpg
}}

Long distance performance from your PocketWizards depends on the orientation and position of the radios.

Whenever possible, try to maintain a line of sight between the radios and keep the antennas parallel. While radio does not require line of sight, it does help dramatically. Make sure the radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure they are not blocked by these objects or by hills. Do not mount the radios close to the ground – try to have them several feet above the Earth or building floors whenever possible.

Maintain at least 36" (~ 1 meter) distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

'''''SPECIAL NOTE''''': Some Canon flash models emit RF interference that can reduce the effective operating range of many radio slaves, including PocketWizards and especially the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6. Those models include: 430EX, 430EX III-RT, 580EX, 580EX II and others. See the [[Canon Compatibility]] page for more information. For those model flashes, please consider the mounting suggestions in the pictures above to optimize range. If using Canon’s off shoe cord OC-E3, consider adding a ferrite clamp on the cable near the flash to further increase range.

=Range Extending Options=

==Orientation==
'''Solutions for improved range performance with the Canon 430EX, 430EX III-RT, 580EX and 580EX II flashes.'''

- These flashes emit high levels of RF interference that can affect any PocketWizard radio.

- NOTE: The Canon 600EX-RT II, 600EX-RT, 430EX II, 550EX, 420EX and 270EX have excellent range performance because they do not have high RF noise emissions.

Every electronic device emits some amount of unintended radio frequency (RF) noise. These emissions can range from very little to a lot depending on many factors. This noise can be troublesome for any radio device that depends on receiving radio signals because the RF noise may make it harder for the device to hear the incoming signal. It’s the same as trying to listen to someone talk at a party when everyone around you is talking at the same time and the noise level is very high.

{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 on a Canon 580 EX II.
| image=AC5_image.jpg
| image-width=224
}}

A few Canon flashes, including the popular 580EX II, 580EX and 430EX, emit strong RF noise across the frequency range used by PocketWizard radios, impacting both the FCC 344MHz radios used in the American market and the CE 433MHz radios used in Europe and other international markets.
This interference can impede the out-of-box range performance with any PocketWizard radio. We have found that the amount of interference varies from flash to flash so it is impossible to say precisely what the impact is. In our testing, we found some 580EX II's worked consistently on an FCC 344MHz FlexTT5 Transceiver in the upright position at 100 feet (33 meters) or more. However, some flashes we tested were noisier and in the worst-case scenarios, without any intervening steps to improve range, consistent working range was reduced to 30 feet (10 meters).
There are several ways to improve signal reception and thus increasing the range performance of the radios.

'''Although many of these solutions are demonstrated with a receiving FlexTT5, they can be applied to any PocketWizard radio, including the Plus III, Plus X and MultiMAX.'''

''' Read More About Internal Modification to Canon 580EX II reduces RF emissions.[http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/tech_bulletins/580exii_mod/ here].'''

'''The AC5 RF Soft Shield is now available, this is your first line of defense against noisy flashes. With the AC5 correctly installed, your range will increase substantially. For information on how to properly install the the AC5, click [http://www.pocketwizard.com/inspirations/tutorials/ac5_install/ here].'''

===Use the default C2 setting on the receiving FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver===
This channel uses a different frequency than C1 and may reduce RF noise interference and increase range from 10 to 30%. You can also try other channels that operate at different frequencies, especially around 345 to 347 MHz, which include channels 2, 4, 5, 6 & 20. A channel frequency guide can be found on the [[Channels|Channels page.]]

===Use a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver as your transmitter and your receiver.===

As a transmitter, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver has a more optimize-able antenna than the MiniTT1 Transmitter and will improve range up to 20%.

===Straighten out the flash head.===
Lay it on its side and put the antenna in a 180º position. This should increase range from 50 to 100%.

{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better
| image=Flash_straight_out.jpg
}}
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best
| image=Flash_best.jpg
}}

===Orient your antenna so that the tip of the antenna is a vertical straight line with the opposite corner of the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver.===

Yes, it's a bit contorted but it works.
[[File:FlexOptimal.jpg|200px|thumb|left|Optimal Antenna Position]]

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 
 
 
 

=Hardware Options=
==Use a Canon OC-E3 cord.==
Ideally, use the cord with a ferrite choke added to the end of the cord nearest the flash, to separate the flash from the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver.
For best performance, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 should be 18” or more away from the flash and ideally positioned above it (the higher the radio, the better the reception). For best results, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 should be positioned at least five feet off the ground. This should increase range from 200 to 500%.

{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Better
| image=Flex_below_flash.jpg‎
| image-width= 200
}}
{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Best
| image=Flex_above_flash.jpg
| image-width= 200
}}

{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Ferrite Choke
| image=564Optimize-0318.jpg‎
| image-width= 200
}}

==Mount your flash on one light stand and your FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver on another stand.==
Just be sure there is at least 18" between the Flash and the FlexTT5.

- Use a wide dual light bracket to separate the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transciever from the flash.

{{ Annotated image |float=left| caption=Dual Flash Bracket with OC-E3 cord.
| image=Dualflashbracket.jpg
| image-width=250
}}

- Use a Manfrotto Superclamp and Flexible Arm attached to a light stand, as seen here when used with a softbox.

{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption=Rear View.
| image=Flashsoftbox2.jpg‎
| image-width=250
}}
{{ Annotated image |float=left |caption= Front view.
| image=Flashsoftbox.jpg‎
| image-width=250
}}

==Use flashes that have no noise issues.==
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=270EX Speedlite.
| image=270EX.jpg
| image-width=150}}
These flashes include the 600EX-RT II, 600EX-RT, 430EX II, 550EX and the 270EX. The 430EX II provides almost as much light as the bigger 580EX II. This flash is smaller and less expensive then the 580EX II. Another alternative is the 270EX flash. The range of this flash is almost as good as the 430EX II. It is compact and easy to carry with the FlexTT5.

 

 

 

 

==Use a PocketWizard designed AC7 Hard Shield for Canon Speedlites.==
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC7 Hard Shield.
| image=AC7.jpg
| image-width=200}}
To enhance the ControlTL™ System range performance when paired with the Canon 580EX, 580EX II and 430EX flashes, PocketWizard developed the AC7 Hard Shield.

The body of the AC7 Hard Shield is made with a material that effectively blocks RF interference (EMI) from clouding the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 antenna. To block noise traveling through connections in the hot shoe, an electronic filter has been added to a hot shoe built into the AC7. Combined, the AC7 shield allows the FlexTT5 to receive transmissions at distances 300 to 500% farther then before and well within the range of most off-camera lighting needs. [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/transmitter_receiver/ac7%20rf%20hard%20shield/ Read more...]

==Use a PocketWizard designed AC5 Soft Shield for Canon Speedlites.==
{{ Annotated image |float=right| caption=AC5 Soft Shield.
| image=AC5_image.jpg
| image-width=200}}
The AC5 RF Soft Shield was designed to block the RF emissions from certain flashes (580EX II, 580EX and 430EX) from interfering with the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6, allowing the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to work at considerably longer range. For proper performance the AC5 must be installed correctly. You can see how to properly install the AC5 Soft Shield [http://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=AC5_RF_Soft_Shield here]

=Additional Resources=

Looking for additional information on RF and long range radio performance? Check out our [[RF Resources]] page!

PocketWizard Games

2025-08-04T02:28:01Z

Heathers: /* The Essentials of Remote Camera Triggering - Tips from Shawn */ misc adjustments

'''You can use Google Translate to view this Wiki in a different language. Go to [https://translate.google.com translate.google.com], then type ''wiki.pocketwizard.com'' into the box. Click the arrow in the box to see the new page.'''

This page was specifically designed to help support photographers at The Games in Tokyo for July 2021. The information here can also be helpful for any events with large quantities of photographers. This page was created by Shawn Cullen, a veteran of many large sporting events and Heather Simons, PocketWizard Tech Support Manager. It is designed to help you with setup, answer questions, and includes basic troubleshooting ideas. It will also let you know about special features that you may not be aware of. For best results, we suggest that photographers use Plus III radios with the E Release firmware and strongly consider installing a Custom ID on their units.

==PocketWizard Radios and Firmware==

'''August 1, 2020: SEE NOTE [[#The E Release and Custom IDs|BELOW]] FOR NEW PLUS III FIRMWARE UPDATE!'''

MultiMAX radios have been the gold standard for triggering remotes at sporting events and are known for their rock solid reliability. Our firmware has worked well over the past 30 years but since it was released, there have been many changes in technology. In today’s world, there are a lot more products that can cause RF interference than ever before, between television cameras, LED scoreboards, and simply far more photographers on the field at the same time.

At PocketWizard, we wanted to ensure that photographers would never miss a shot. We released the new E Release firmware protocol on September 19th, 2019. This new special firmware upgrade for PocketWizard Plus III radios extends the signal range drastically. It is also less susceptible to RF interference.

PocketWizard FCC radios use a frequency range of 340-354 MHz. With Legacy firmware, Standard Channels 1-16 have the same frequency of 344.04 while the frequency of QuadZone Triggering Channels 17 to 32 ranges from 346.50 to 354.00 MHz. These Channels allow the user to assign their radios to 4 different Zones as well as having more advanced coding functions and features.

The E Release can more than double the shooting distance of our Legacy firmware and now offers QuadZone Triggering on all Channels. It has E Release Channels 1-32 for flash triggering and adds new LR Channels 1-80, designed specifically for triggering remote cameras. With the new E Release firmware upgrade, each individual channel now has its own separate frequency, so no more Channels sharing the same frequencies, as 1-16 used to. This is especially helpful to increase channel and frequency separation between users.

Besides the increase in the number of additional channels, the E Release firmware enhances the frequency reliability by eliminating frequency drift and making it a more stable frequency over a longer distance.

The E Release firmware is available for the Plus III, the Plus IV, and the Nikon FlexTT5. It is not currently available for the MultiMAX radios. Any new Plus III or Plus IV radios were shipped with the firmware pre-installed and are now called Plus IIIe or Plus IVe radios. You can upgrade any existing units to the E Release by simply purchasing a license for each radio and upgrading through our Utility program. Learn more [https://pocketwizard.com/e-release-firmware/ here].

==Custom IDs and Frequency==

===The Truth about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID can be a valuable asset to a photographer at a major event, as it ensures that nobody else can trigger your Channel.

===A Misconception about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID is NOT a "private frequency"! It is a common misconception that you are getting your own frequency, you are not! A Custom ID which is an exclusive digital code that rides on top of the PocketWizard device frequencies. This exclusive digital code prevents other users from triggering your remote camera or strobes. However, this does not mean you are completely protected. It is possible that other PocketWizard users on the same frequency can block your signal to your receiver, and you can block theirs, even though you have this digital code.

===How Custom IDs Actually Work===

When a Custom ID is created for your device, you are given a 3 digit Custom ID and it is traditionally assigned to Channel 17. However, the Custom ID channel does not use Channel 17’s frequency. The actual frequency used for the ID will vary, depending on your Custom ID code. Most Custom ID’s are placed within channel 17 to 32 since channels 1-16 share the same frequency. Custom ID code information is kept securely and confidentially on file by PocketWizard. Nobody can be assigned to your code and there are no duplicates.

The reason for assigning the Custom ID to Channel 17 with Legacy firmware is due to the Reset feature within the MultiMAX, MultiMAX II, and Plus III. It is recommended every time you turn on your device, do a reset at start up so that any timing delays or other features last use are cleared out, and the device is set to factory default which is Channel 17 with all Zones active.

==Knowing your PocketWizard Frequency==

In situations where you have multiuser environments such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, you need to know your exact Custom ID frequency. This way you know if others will be triggering on your frequency, which could cause issues. If you need to change your Custom ID to another channel for channel separation from other users, you can move the ID to a different frequency if you are using MultiMAX and MultiMAX II radios. However, you can only move it within the 16-channel spread between Channels 17-32.

Switching from TxRx to LR (Long Range mode) does not change your frequency or create channel separation from other users if you have Legacy firmware! LR uses the exact same frequencies, and your receiver can still be blocked by other users. To view your Custom ID and the frequency it is on, for the MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, you can press and hold "A" on your MultiMAX and slide the power switch to one of the ON positions (Transmit or Receive) to display your Custom ID. For the Plus III there should be a label inside the battery compartment with your Custom ID and frequency information.

Let’s use the 100-meter dash at the Games as an example. There will be at least 50+ photographers covering the event, and just think how many remote cameras will be set up just for the finish line. With every photographer triggering their remotes all at the same time as the athletes cross the finish line, with all of those frequencies in the air, the potential for signal blocking is very high! Remember, every Channel between 17 to 32 has a different frequency, but there are only 16 Channels from 17 to 32, so there will be some overlap with Custom IDs. Because Channels 1-16 share the same frequency, 344.04MHz, so there is no point in having your Custom ID set to this frequency. So, with 50+ photographers and possibly 25-30 remotes set up, with only a 16-channel spread for all those Custom ID’s to be placed on, you can see why it is important to know your Custom ID frequency. You need to know what frequency will work best for you and possibly get some Channel separation from everyone else. You can look at the PocketWizard Channel sign-up sheet in the media room to see who is set up on the different channels and know if anyone is set up on the same frequency as your Custom ID.

You can find the frequencies for the different Channels on our [[Channels]] Wiki page.

==The E Release and Custom IDs==

The Plus III units with the E Release and Custom IDs work a little differently. Unlike the Legacy firmware, your Custom ID will use the frequency that the ID is assigned to. For example, when you use your Plus III with Legacy firmware, your Custom ID is assigned to Channel 17 (346.5 MHz) but it may actually trigger on Channel 23’s frequency (349.5 MHz). When you upgrade your radio to the E Release, your Custom ID will trigger on the same frequency as Channel 17, but with E Release frequencies (345.80 MHz for regular Channels or 343.20 MHz for LR Channels).

'''You can now move the Custom ID installed on your Plus IIIe radio to a different frequency and Channel. Please see the '''[[Plus III#Plus_III_CUSTOM_ID|Plus III Custom ID]]''' page for details.'''

==The Essentials of Remote Camera Triggering - Tips from Shawn==

When setting up your remote camera there is a lot to consider and think about. Obviously you want to select the best spot for composition of the image but the way your PocketWizard device is mounted is also very important. You will need to determine the best location to mount the receiver, plus consider other factors as well to ensure that receiver unit can receive the signal from the transmitter consistently and reliably. Shawn has set up literally thousands of cameras at various events, from small gyms to international stadiums, all around the world. His tips and tricks are incredibly valuable and have served him well over the years.

{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
|'''PLUS III E Release FIRMWARE UPDATES'''

Firmware 2.717 or higher: This firmware adds a new mode: Rx LR. This mode is specifically designed for remote camera triggering, when you have a camera in your hand transmitting to a remote camera. Use regular LR mode for the transmitting radio and Rx LR on the remote radio. IMPORTANT: You should also DISABLE the hot shoe on the remote camera. You can do this by taking it out of the hot shoe, turning the camera's hot shoe off, or by holding in the D button till the display changes from CH to Cd to indicate the Plus III's hot shoe is disabled.

'''Plus IIIe current firmware:'''

'''2.740''': This firmware is for most cameras. This will allow the Plus III to be connected to either a mono or stereo cable. If you are using a button trigger or footpedal with the transmitting radio, you MUST use this firmware version for the transmitter, even if you are using remote Sony camera.

'''2.840''': This firmware is for Sony cameras. The Plus III will ONLY trigger with a stereo cable. If you are using a remote Sony camera, you MUST use 2.840 on the remote Plus III. You can use 2.740 on the transmitting radio, even if you are transmitting from another camera (Sony or otherwise) or from a mono connection. You can also use 2.840 on the transmitting radio as long as you have a stereo connection.

Please contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] if you need more help.
|}

===CABLES ARE CRITICAL!===

To trigger a remote camera, you need to use a remote camera cable to connect the PocketWizard to the camera. This allows the radio to trigger the camera through the camera's remote port.

When you are using a mirrorless camera in your hand (with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe) to trigger a remote camera, you '''MUST''' use a cable on the handheld camera as well as one on the remote camera. Many settings on the camera will automatically disable the hot shoe. Using a cable connected to the remote port will ensure the transmitting radio will get a trigger signal from the handheld camera. It is always more reliable than the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. We also suggest disabling the hot shoe on Plus III radios for best results. Hold in the D Zone button for a few seconds until the display changes from CH to Cd.

'''SONY USERS:'''
*Plus III or Plus IV:
For your transmitting camera/PocketWizard with Plus III or Plus IV radios, you '''MUST''' use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your handheld camera. For the remote cameras, you can use the S-VPR1-ACC, the 13377-S, OR the 13369-S (with the USB power tail).
*PlusX:
For your transmitting camera/PocketWizard with Plus III or Plus IV radios, you '''MUST''' use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your handheld camera. For the remote cameras, you the should use the 13377-S, OR the 13369-S (with the USB power tail). If you use the S-VPR1-ACC cable for your remote camera, if the remote camera falls asleep, the radio will lock up.''

'''Choose Your Cable'''

There are 6 main cables, based on camera connections:
*N10-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 10 pin connection, like the D6 and Z8
*N-MCDC2-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 4 pin MCDC2 port, like the D750 and Z7
*CM-N3-ACC: for Canon cameras with the 3 pin port, like the 1DX Mark III and EOS R3
*CM-E3-ACC: for cameras with the 2.5 mm subminiphone port, like most Canon mirrorless as well as many Fuji or Olympus cameras
*S-VPR1-ACC: for Sony cameras with the micro USB port, like the a9 II, when using the Plus III or Plus IV radios
*13377-S: for Sony cameras with the micro USB port, like the a9 II, when using the PlusX radios
If you are not sure which cable you need, you can [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact us] at PocketWizard support.

===TxRx or LR mode===
The main options are: TxRx (Transmit or Receive), Tx Only (Transmit Only), Rx
Only (Receive Only), and LR (Long Range mode). With Plus III firmware 2.716 or higher, you will also have RxLR. For more details and other modes, please see the MultiMAX or Plus III pages. Rx LR mode increases the contact time for your remote camera, which gives you more reliable and consistent triggering, especially in continuous drive mode.

Advice from Shawn:
Personally, I always choose LR (Long Range) mode for triggering remote cameras. It is a slightly slower traveling signal, specifically designed for frequency stability. This keeps the signal true to the transmitted frequency, limiting the frequency drift to prevent it from spreading to adjacent frequencies or Channels. This frequency stability increases signal reliability and distance. The new Rx LR mode also increases contact time on the remote camera, resulting in more reliable triggering. If you have that option, you should be using LR mode on your transmitting radio and RxLR mode for the remote radios.

TxRx mode is mostly intended for use with strobes. It has smaller packets of data being transmitted which allows it to be transmitted and received at faster speeds. These signals allow you to trigger up to X-sync. LR mode has much larger packets of data which transmit at slower speeds. This holds the frequency stable but you will lose a stop or two of sync speed. TxRx mode cannot accept these larger packets with is why you cannot combine the different modes.

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR SONY SHOOTERS: If triggering from a handheld camera to a remote camera with Plus III radios: you must use firmware 2.716 or higher. Use LR mode for your transmitting radio and use RxLR for your remote radios.

===Placement of the Receiver: Hot Shoe vs Railing===

This really depends on the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, and how close the receiver might be to metal objects when placed in the hot shoe. As a general rule, you want to keep the radios away from metal. All digital products, including cameras, are known to put out small amounts of RFN noise or interference. With the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, this amount of RF Noise could definitely be a factor in the transmitted signal being blocked from the receiver. Whenever possible, mount the receiver to a metal railing for stability, using an Isolation/Mounting bar and super clamp to extend the distance away from the metal railing. I fully understand how much space and weight a Super Clamp requires, however it can mean the difference in the ability to trigger the remote camera or not. I never ever suggest putting the receiver on the ground. If the remote camera is set up on the floor, then the hot shoe would be best spot, to at least get the unit higher off the ground. Also, try to avoid placing your receiver next to any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content.

===Height of PocketWizard Device from Ground Level===
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
The height of the PocketWizard device from the ground level is an extremely significant factor to think about. The ground can definitely cut down the signal distance and quality, plus increase the frequency spread to other frequencies. You do not need to mount the receiving radio in the hot shoe of the camera. You can mount the radio in a better position for reception and put the camera where you want it. Remote camera cables are available in 1’ or 3’ lengths and a 10’ extension cable is available to help with extreme situations

===Maintain line of sight to transmitter===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
In smaller venues this may not be such a big deal, but why risk it? With so much RF noise at major events, line of sight to the transmitter should be the top priority when setting up the receiver. Always make sure you can see the transmitter from the receiver once it is mounted and keep the antennas parallel. The only exception to keeping the antennas parallel is when setting up remote cameras in higher elevated positions. I routinely place the receiver upside down so the antenna is more exposed to the rising signal at a lower level. (Note from PocketWizard: upside down is usually not recommended but in extreme situations may be the best course of action.)

===Mini phone extensions and Isolation/Mounting Bar===
I always make it a practice to carry some miniphone extension cables like the PocketWizard MMX for those situations where I need to mount the receiver in places the remote camera cable will not reach. There are also situations where you might want to place the transmitter off the camera to obtain line of sight to the receiver unit. For example, when shooting under an overhang, or dugout. I suggest having options from 10’ to 20’ mini phone extensions just to make sure you can place the receiver in the best spot possible. However, with the longer cables try to avoid running your cables near any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content. The MMX is a 10' cable.

As mentioned earlier, Isolation/Mounting bars are very useful in placing your PocketWizard device in a more optimal position for receiving or transmitting a signal. These are called MB4s and are sold in 4” lengths, however you can connect two of them together by threading one into the other to make an 8” length. And don’t forget about key rings to run your safety cables through. Never ever use the lanyards that come with the PocketWizard devices. They were not designed with intent to be used as a safety when mounting remote cameras. Make sure that the key ring is big enough to slip through the eyelet on the Plus III, and big enough to to slip the safety cable through.

===Hot Shoe Disable===
This feature that allows the photographer to disable the hot shoe contact of their radios. Hot Shoe Disable can be used on both the transmitter and receiver. There are a few reasons to use this feature.

When you’re using a handheld camera with a radio in the top shoe and triggering remote cameras, you may sometimes want to disable the hot shoe of the transmitting radio. This prevents the handheld camera from triggering your remotes with every picture taken, as the radio in the hot shoe won’t get the sync signal from the camera. Turning off the hot shoe gives the photographer the ability to use a trigger button cable (like the BT1) plugged into the transmitting radio, to trigger the remotes when you see fit, just by pressing on the trigger button.

The reason for disabling the hot shoe contact of the receiver is to prevent Auto Relay Mode from engaging. When using a Plus III in the hot shoe of a remote camera, connected by a remote cable, after triggering the camera, the Plus III will automatically transmit a relay signal one Channel higher than the signal it received. For example, if the transmitting radio and the Plus III receiver connected to the remote camera are set to Channel 1, the remote Plus III will then relay a transmitting signal on Channel 2 to trigger a third Plus III unit set to receive and set to Channel 2. This feature was designed in order to trigger strobes with the third Plus III unit. This is the way the product is designed to work.

However, if a second photographer is using Channel 2 and the first photographer is not using relay but just a remote camera, the relay signal could inadvertently trigger the second photographer’s equipment.

In a situation such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, photographers need to register the Channels they plan to use. If a photographer is only planning on triggering remote cameras on (for example) Channel 24, another photographer could be assigned Channel 25. When the photographer using Channel 24 fires his camera remotely, his connected Plus III will trigger any PocketWizard receiver set to Channel 25.

We have also found that the hot shoes of some mirrorless cameras seem to behave differently with a radio in their hot shoe and may note properly trigger the camera. We suggest disabling the hot shoes of your Plus III radios for best results, especially if you are using a mirrorless camera.

====How to Disable a Plus III Hot Shoe====

Hold down the Zone D button for three seconds until the “CH” on the display changes to “Cd”. The Plus III will not receive any signal from its hot shoe. To enable the hot shoe contacts, simply hold the Zone D button for another three seconds until “Cd” switched back to “CH” on the display or turn the radio off. When the radio is turned back on, it will return to an active hot shoe.

*Legacy Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 1.215
*E Release Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 2.505 or greater

====How to Disable a MultiMAX Hot Shoe====

Start by turning on your MultiMAX to transmit. Then press the *MENU button. Next press the “L” button for Other Functions. Now you will press “B” for Hot Shoe Off. The MultiMAX will show what function is active. For example, if it says "Hot Shoe Off", the shoe is disabled. When you press *MENU L B again, it will change to "Hot Shoe On" and the shoe will be active again.

====Other Ways to Disable a Hot Shoe====

The camera thinks the PocketWizard in its shoe is a flash, which it triggers through the center pin contact. To disable this function, you need to break the connection between the radio and camera's center pins.

The easiest solution is to take the radio out of the remote camera's hot shoe. Unless you are using Relay mode, it does not need to be the in shoe.

One simple way to disable the hot shoe is to physically block the center pin connection, using a thin piece of tape or paper.

You can also turn the hot shoe off by using the camera's flash settings. Simply set the flash setting to "off".

Some settings in your camera will automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent mode, continuous high speed drive, and with Nikons, certain Live View options in the Custom Setting menu (usually d8-"Apply Changes to Live View"). Check your camera's instruction manual for details.

===Batteries vs AC Power Supplies===

Batteries have a finite life span, 50 to 60 hours, whereas AC power supplies can provide continuous power to your PocketWizard device for the duration of your needs, as long as a power outlet is within an acceptable distance.

You can use either AA alkaline or Lithium batteries to power the MultiMAX or Plus III. The Lithium batteries will only last about 10-20% longer than Alkaline batteries. However, they will die off at a faster rate at the end of their capacity than Alkaline batteries. You will need to keep an eye out for this.

AC power supplies obviously need a power outlet to plug into to power your PocketWizard device. It is up to you, the user, to decide what is an acceptable distance to run an extension cord to the nearest power outlet. Most modern arenas, stadium, and sports venues now have power outlets within 10’-20’ of each other eliminating the need for long extension cord runs.

The type of AC power supply depends on your PocketWizard device. The original MultiMAX has three options depending on what version of the MultiMAX you have. Please see the [[AC Adapters]] Wiki page to find the correct adapter for your specific MultiMAX.

The AC power supply for the MultiMAX II, Plus IV, and Plus III is the PW-AC-USB. In all honesty, if you find yourself in a pinch to power your Plus III with AC, you could even use an iPhone charging cube and a USB Mini B cable.

In the event of a power failure or a tripped circuit breaker for the outlet the AC power supply is plugged into, the MultiMAX USB, MultiMAX II, Plus III, and Plus IV, will all still operate as long as two fresh AA batteries are installed. Unfortunately, the first generation MultiMAX using the PW-AC-MX power supply will not work even with batteries installed.

==Troubleshooting & Best Practices==

It is important to know some basic troubleshooting techniques. When you are out in the field and have an issue, you can often isolate and solve the problem by just knowing what to do first. Below are the most common solutions. For more detailed information and for other troubleshooting ideas, please download [[Media:Trouble Shooting - Remote Camera.pdf|this PDF]].

'''Sometimes we all just need a good reset.'''
A reset is ALWAYS one of the best places to start. It is easy to change something without realizing it. Here’s how to reset your radio:

MultiMAX: To reset your MultiMAX unit start with the unit turned OFF. Then press and hold in the C button and slide the power switch to Transmit. When you see the "CLEAR/RESET" message on the LCD screen, release the C button. The radio has now been reset to factory defaults and will automatically reset to channel 17 with all Zones enabled.

Plus III: To reset your Plus III unit, start by holding in the TEST button as you power the radio on. Once you see the LCD screen turn on you can release the TEST button.

*Legacy Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 17 with all Zones enabled.
*E Release Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 1 with all Zones enabled

'''Check your Firmware'''
It is always best to have the most recent firmware version running. To update all PocketWizard device’s that have a USB port you can use the PocketWizard Utility. You can learn more about it here.
To download the PocketWizard Utility click here

Here are the most up to date firmware available for PocketWizard devices
*MultiMAX with USB 7.53
*MultiMax II 8.117
*Plus III Legacy 1.215
*Plus IIIe (E Release) 2.740 / 2.840

'''Check or change your batteries and check your battery contacts'''
Fresh batteries are always a good idea. Also, check your internal battery contacts for signs of corrosion (usually blue or green) or rust. If the contacts are damaged, you can try cleaning them with a pencil eraser, rubbing them with aluminum foil, adding a drop or two of lemon juice or alcohol if needed. Be careful about getting any liquid onto the main board. If the damage is bad, you can usually replace the contacts or back cover.

'''Watch the Lights'''
The LED on your radio should go red briefly any time it sends or receives a signal.
-If your transmitter is not going red, check to see if you disabled the hot shoe on your radio or on your camera. (hint: Silent Shooting mode usually disables the shoe!). You can also use a pencil eraser to clean the hot shoe contacts on your camera and radio. Seems basic but has “fixed” a lot of “broken” equipment over the years.
-If your receiver is not going red, check to see if the radios are on the same Channels, Zones, and/or modes.
-If everything is going red but your remotes are not firing, check your cable. Press test on the radio connected to the camera or flash. If it doesn’t fire, there is an issue with the radio, the cable, or the sync port on the remote equipment.

'''Label Your Radios!'''
If you have 10 Plus III radios and have a problem with one unit, you’ll probably just swap it out for an immediate fix if you’re in a tight spot. But if you don’t know which radio you swapped out and that unit has a problem, how will you know that for next time? When testing equipment, it’s a good idea to label everything-your cameras, flashes, radios, and cables. Then you can swap things around and know what did or didn’t work and can narrow down the issue.

We hope these tips will help ensure a troublefree and successful photo shoot. Please do not hesitate to reach out to PocketWizard tech support for assistance if you are stuck. When contacting us, keep in mind we are typically available from about 10 am – 4 pm EST, Monday through Friday. We do work remotely sometimes and are not always in the office. If you have an urgent matter, please email us at [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] with the word URGENT in the subject line, so we can better see it. We will try to respond as soon as possible. We do check email on the weekends sometimes and will do our best to contact you as soon as possible.

Remote Camera Triggering

2025-08-04T02:07:27Z

Heathers: /* Triggering a Remote Camera from a Handheld Camera */ mentioned 2 cables earlier

__FORCETOC__
[[File:PlusIIIE RemoteCamera.jpg|350px|thumb|right|Sony a9, Plus IIIe, and S-VPR1-ACC cable]]
All PocketWizard radios can be used to remotely trigger a remote camera. You will need at least 2 PocketWizard radios and the correct PocketWizard remote camera cable. Different camera bodies have different remote camera connectors and require different cables. To find the right cable for your particular camera, you can use the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder].

==Basic Remote Camera Setup==
# Set the transmitting radio and the receiving radio on your camera to the same [[Channels|Channel]] and Zone (if applicable).
# Attach the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ remote camera cable] to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the camera's receiving radio.
# Turn on your equipment top to bottom (radio, then camera)
# Press TEST on the transmitting radio in your hand to trigger the remote camera.

===Best Practices===
*Be sure to press the TEST button deliberately, do not "jab" it. If you press too fast, the remote camera may not have time to wake up and confirm focus and exposure. If you are using a Plus III/IIIe as the transmitter with a Plus III or Plus IV as a receiver, you can half press the TEST button to pre trigger the camera. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)
*Remote cameras are often set up in places where photographers cannot go. This means that the remote camera could be positioned in situations that are less than ideal for good reception, like on the ground behind a soccer goal, in a tree hidden from view, or on a stanchion behind a basketball goal. The receiving PocketWizard does not need to be in the hot shoe to trigger the camera. Cables are available in either 1' or 3' lengths and we have a 10' extension cable (the MMX) so you can put the camera where you want but put the radio in a position where it will be able to have the best reception.
*The type of cable does make a difference. PocketWizard remote camera cables are designed to be durable and last. They are also wired to be used with PocketWizard radios that can pre trigger the camera. Aftermarket cables may or may not be wired the correct way to work properly with the radios.
*Some radios have special modes such as LR (Long Range) and RP (Repeater) that can help with tricky setups. Be sure to check your radio's quick guide or the PocketWizard Wiki for details.

===Important Notes===
*When using a MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 remote camera setup using default radio settings, a remote camera can only be triggered in single shot mode and there will be a delay between shots. When the camera's meter is "awake" and the internal LED is active, the receiving radio cannot listen for an incoming signal. For Canon cameras, the delay is typically 2-3 seconds before the meter sleeps. For Nikon cameras, you can adjust the length of the delay by going into the custom menu settings and changing the setting. It's called Auto Meter Off or Standby and the shortest delay is 4 seconds.

Continuous triggering with ControlTL radios is possible if the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 attached to the camera has either Disable Shoe Communications or [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] set via the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. Basic Trigger mode is the recommended setup for remote camera triggering with ControlTL radios. With this setting, the radios only need to send a simple "fire now!" signal, instead of having to send information about power levels and sync speed, which you don't need with a remote camera.

==Triggering a Remote Camera from a Handheld Camera==
The setup is very similar to the Basic Remote Camera setup but there are a couple important differences. When you are triggering from a handheld PocketWizard to a remote camera, the radio will send hundreds of packets of triggers through the air. When you have a PocketWizard in the hot shoe of your handheld camera, the camera thinks the radio is a flash. That means it won't send a signal until the handheld camera's shutter is tripped. It then sends a very quick pop (because the camera thinks it only needs to pop a flash) to the radio in its hot shoe. Because the radio is getting a very short signal, it only has enough time to send out one or two trigger packets. If the remote camera is not completely ready when its radio gets the trigger, it may not fire because it is still checking the settings and will miss the packet. Adding a remote camera cable to your transmitting radio and handheld camera usually solves this issue. This is just a quick overview but there are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

# Set the transmitting radio and the receiving radio on your camera to the same [[Channels|Channel]] and Zone (if applicable).
# Attach the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ remote camera cable] to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the camera's receiving radio.
# Attach the transmitting radio to your camera's hot shoe. The hot shoe must be active for this setup. For best results, connect a remote camera cable to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the transmitting radio.
# Turn on your equipment top to bottom (radio, then camera)
# Take a photo with the camera in your hand to trigger the remote camera at the same time.

===Best Practices===
*Always make sure you have the most recent firmware in your radio.
*Use the PTMM adapter. This adapter connects to your remote camera cable and has a switch on it. When you turn the switch "on", it will pre trigger your remote camera and keep it in a pre triggered state, as though you were constantly half pressing the shutter button. Note: It will use more battery power than usual, as your camera is kept constantly awake.
*Use a cable on BOTH the handheld and remote camera. This is the best way to get a consistent trigger and in some cases, you must use this as the hot shoe on the handheld camera may be disabled.
With this setup, if you are using Plus III radios, when you half press the shutter button of the camera in your hand, it will send a half press signal to the remote camera at the same time. This will pre trigger the camera so it responds faster when you take the photo. With any other radio, it will ensure that a signal is sent out to the remote radio. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)

===Important Notes===
*With most mirrorless cameras, when you set the camera to continuous high speed shooting, the hot shoe will be disabled. For that setup, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera as well as the remote camera because the handheld camera won't send a signal to the transmitting radio through the hot shoe. (note: continuous high speed shooting and silent shooting modes also usually disable the hot shoe)
*When you are shooting from a handheld camera to a remote camera, there will be a delay between shots. This is because the transmitting camera will not send the signal to the hot shoe until AFTER the shutter moves. Using a PTMM or cables on both cameras will help lessen (though not completely eliminate) this time difference because the remote camera will be at half press and ready to receive a signal.
*There are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

==Relay Mode==
Sometimes you want to use a flash with your remote camera, for situations like self portraits or maybe taking a photo of a bear at night in the wild. Relay mode allows you to trigger a remote camera and to have that remote camera trigger a remote flash.

For Relay, you need at least 3 PocketWizards. One to send the signal, one on the camera, then one attached to the flash. You will also need the appropriate remote camera cable. It seems logical to set the radios all to the same Channel but if you do that, you will find they will not sync properly. A flash only needs a quick "fire now!" signal to fire while a camera has to verify that the exposure is correct and that the focus is confirmed before it will shoot, even if both of those are set to manual. When you set everything to the same Channel, the flash will fire before the camera, resulting in a dark exposure.

When you use our Relay mode, you use 2 different Channels. Here's how Relay works:
#The PocketWizard in your hand sends out a signal on a specific Channel.
#The PocketWizard for the camera will receive that incoming signal and trigger the camera. The camera then sends a sync pulse through the hot shoe. (note: the PocketWizard MUST be in the camera's hot shoe)
#The PocketWizard on the camera senses the trigger from the camera's hot shoe and automatically sends out a new signal on a different Channel.
#The PocketWizard connected to the flash receives the signal on the secondary Channel and fires the flash.

For example, the transmitting radio will be set to Channel 1. The radio on the camera will be set to TxRx Channel 1 and receives on Channel 1. When it gets the trigger from the camera's hot shoe, it will automatically send out a new trigger on Channel 2. The radio connected to the flash should be set to Channel 2 to receive the signal.

Any PocketWizard Auto Sensing Transceiver will automatically send out a signal one Channel higher.
*A FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 will automatically send the signal one Channel higher but you can program the radios in the PocketWizard Utility to send out the Relayed signal on a different Channel if you wish to.
*With the MultiMAX, you can choose which Channel you use for the Relayed signal.

For more information, please see our [[Relay Mode]] page.

'''Note:''' If you are using a FlexTT5 or FlexTT6, you can use a flash in the receiving camera's hot shoe, simply set it to Master, just as you would if you were firing directly from the camera.

==Auto Focus vs Manual Focus==
We strongly suggest using Manual focus for remote cameras. A remote camera that is using AutoFocus but has not been pre-released (with a pre-trigger cable or a half-press from a Plus III) will still attempt to focus a remote camera before firing an exposure. Depending on the AF setting that you have chosen for your remote camera, the auto focus behavior will look a little different:

* When the camera is set to AF-S (Single), the camera will not release the shutter button until it can confirm the focus. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will attempt to autofocus before releasing the shutter button.
* When the camera is set to AF-C (Continuous), the focus is continuous up until the point of the full shutter release. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will first attempt to focus and will then fire regardless of focus confirmation.

In AF-S there is the possibility of missing shots, if focus cannot be confirmed, and in AF-C there is the possibility of getting an out-of-focus shot. These limitations are tied to the camera’s auto-focus system – you will see the same behavior with or without PocketWizard radios.

==Remote Camera Cables==

To trigger a remote camera, you will need at least one remote camera cable for your camera. A remote camera cable has a stereo 3.5mm (1/8") connection for the PocketWizard and the other end is specific to the camera's remote port connection.

The most common cables are:
*'''Canon CM-E3-ACC:''' this cable has a 2.5mm connection. It fits Canon cameras with the E3 connection. It also usually works with most other cameras that have a 2.5mm connection, such as Fuji or Olympus, or with any flashes with a 2.5mm sync port. (Note: the Panasonic cameras will not work with this cable. You would need to use the PAN-ACC cable.)
*'''Canon CM-N3-ACC:''' this cable has a 3 prong connection. It fits Canon cameras with the N3 connection.
*'''Nikon N-MCDC2-ACC:''' this cable has a rectangular 4 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MCDC2 connection.
*'''Nikon N10-ACC:''' this cable has the Nikon 10 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MC30/10 pin connection.
*'''S-VPR1-ACC:''' this cable has the Sony micro connection. It fits Sony cameras with the VPR1 / micro USB connection. Use with Plus III, Plus IV, and through the bottom -ACC port of MultiMAX radios. See IMPORTANT NOTES section below if you plan to trigger a remote camera from a handheld camera.
*'''13377-S:''' this cable is the same as the S-VPR1-ACC but wired differently inside. Use this cable with a remote PlusX radios or through the top port of MultiMAX radios. See IMPORTANT NOTES section below if you plan to trigger a remote camera from a handheld camera.

These cables are all stereo cables and are capable of pre triggering the camera from the test button if you are using a Plus IIIe radios, or by enabling or disabling a Zone if you are using MultiMAX radios. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware) MultiMAX radios with -ACC ports are also capable of pre triggering by activating Zones.

You can add the PTMM adapter to any of these cables to have pre-trigger constantly on, regardless of the PocketWizard radios you are using. By pre-triggering the radio, the remote camera will be kept in a state of half press so it will respond to the trigger faster. The PTMM has a switch built in and when the switch is engaged, the connected camera behaves as if its shutter button is held down half way. This lets the camera respond more quickly and consistently, but at the expense of battery life. Pre-release cables can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode.

'''IMPORTANT NOTES:'''
*As noted above, if you are triggering a remote camera while shooting from a handheld camera with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe, we suggest using cables on both cameras for best results. For most mirrorless cameras, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera and transmitting radio, as the camera's hot shoe might be disabled.
*SONY USERS: If you are triggering from a handheld camera with a PlusX radio to a remote camera, you MUST use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your transmitting PlusX. You should use the 13377-S with a remote PlusX for best results. If you use the S-VPR1-ACC cable with a remote PlusX and the camera goes to sleep, it will lock up the radio. You would need to do a power cycle on the camera or remote PlusX or remove the cable to reset it. If you can disable the sleep timer in your camera, you should be able to use the S-VPR1-ACC cable.
*If you have older radios, like the Plus II, Plus Receiver, or use the MultiMAX top port, that requires a mono connection. Add the PTMM or an MSMM adapter. The Plus IIIe, Plus IVe, and PlusX radios can all use either stereo or mono cables.
*If you are using MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and/or FlexTT6 radios for remote camera triggering, we strongly suggest using Basic Trigger mode for best results.

PlusX

2025-08-03T02:59:10Z

Heathers: /* Battery Indicator */ added note about red on TxRx

[[File:PlusX SHP w-Glow 300dpi.jpg|right|250px|The PlusX Tranceiver]]
The PlusX is a radio transceiver, capable of acting as a transmitter or receiver for triggering remote flashes and cameras. To use the PlusX, at least one other PocketWizard radio is required. With the proper [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ cable], it can be connected to virtually any remote flash or camera.

Much like its predecessors, the Plus II and Plus III, the PlusX is a manual flash trigger and is compatible with all PocketWizard radios on the same frequency. It can trigger a remote flash up to the camera's X-sync but is not capable of TTL metering, power control, or High Speed Sync. The PlusX uses Legacy firmware while the new PlusXe uses either E Release or Legacy firmware.

==Introducing the PlusXe!==
{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
| '''BREAKING NEWS!''' As of September 2024, the PlusXe joined our line of E Release firmware products!
|}

The PlusXe works exactly the same as the PlusX EXCEPT that it uses our E Release firmware protocol. That means you can use it with any other PocketWizards that use the E Release, like a Plus IIIe or PowerMC2e, as well as the Raven from Fusion TLC.

If you would like to use the Legacy firmware instead, to work with your existing PocketWizard radios, you can easily change the firmware protocol. And then switch back to the E Release any time you want.

To change firmware protocol:
#Turn on the PlusXe
#Set the dial to Channel 4 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 3 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 2 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 1 and press Test
#Turn the PlusXe off then on again and the firmware will be set.

Do you already have PlusX radios but would love to upgrade to the E Release? You can send your radios in and we can upgrade them for you! [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ Send us an email] and we can walk you through the steps to purchase the licenses for upgrades and send in the radios.

All of the following information in this Wiki page as well as the PlusX quick guide applies to both the PlusXe and PlusX radios.

==PlusX Basics==
===Connecting===
[[File:PlusX Connecting Hot Shoe.jpg|right|300px]]
[[File:PlusX Connecting Sync Cable.jpg|right|300px]]
The PlusX can be connected to your camera in two different ways, either through the top shoe of the camera or with a sync cable.

'''Top Shoe:''' Slide the PlusX into the top shoe of the camera and secure it using the locking ring. Make sure to orient the antenna to the back of the camera while placing the radio into the hot shoe. Also be sure your hot shoe is active. There are some [[The FAQ#My PocketWizards aren't working on my new camera!|settings]] that automatically disable the hot shoe with mirrorless cameras.

'''Sync Cable:''' If you are using a camera with no hot shoe, the hot shoe cannot be used, or you are remotely triggering your camera, connect the transmitting PlusX’s Flash/Camera Port to the camera’s sync terminal.

'''Flash Sync Connection:''' The PlusX can also be connected to almost any flash using the appropriate sync cable. Visit the PocketWizard [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] to find the correct cable for your camera or flash.

===Powering On/Off===
Locate the switch on the left hand side of the radio (with the channel selector facing you). When the switch is down the unit is off and when in the up position it is on.

*If the radio is using Legacy firmware, you will see one bold '''green''' blink on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

*If the radio is using the E Release firmware, you will see a '''red''' '''green''' '''red''' '''green''' blink pattern on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

===Channels===
To change the channel on your radio simply turn the Channel Selector to find your desired channel. Turning the Channel Selector clockwise will change the channel in ascending order, turning it counter-clockwise will change the channel in descending order. When selecting your channel, make sure that the dial fully clicks into place otherwise you may not be transmitting/receiving on the correct channel.

Note: All radios MUST be on the same channel to properly trigger remote flashes or cameras (except when using [[#Auto-Relay|Auto-Relay]]). They must also be using all the same firmware (either E Release or Legacy) and the same frequency (either FCC or CE).

===Battery Indicator & LED Status Indicator===
The LED on the top of the PlusX will blink three different colors ('''green''', '''amber''', and '''red''') at different intervals to indicate the remaining battery power.

*One '''green''' blink indicates between 100% to 50% remaining battery life.
*Two '''amber''' blinks indicates between 50% to 25% remaining battery life.
*Three '''red''' blinks indicates less than 25% remaining battery life.

The LED also will turn red whenever the radio is transmits or receives a signal.

===PlusX FAQ===

Having trouble with your PlusX? Check out our [[PlusX FAQ]] page!

==Remote Flash Triggering==
[[File:PlusX Remote Flash Triggering.jpg|right|300px|]]
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Attach a PlusX to your camera’s hot shoe. You may also connect the PlusX radio to your camera’s PC sync port using the appropriate cable.
# Connect a PlusX to your remote flash via the appropriate sync cable.
# Select a Channel. Set any other PocketWizard radios to matching the previously set Channel.
# Take pictures normally at or below your camera’s X-sync speed.

'''Momentarily pressing the TEST button will test trigger the flash.'''

==Remote Camera Triggering==
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Connect PlusX to your remote camera via the appropriate remote camera cable.
# Select a Channel.
# Press the TEST button on the transmitting PocketWizard radio or fire the camera in your hands. The remote camera will trigger.

NOTE: If you are using a handheld camera with a transmitting radio to trigger a remote camera at the same time, we suggest using a cable on BOTH cameras for best results. Some camera settings automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent shooting, or the fastest FPS setting. In these cases, you will need to use a cable on the handheld camera as the camera will not send a signal through the hot shoe. Please see our [[Remote Camera Triggering]] page for more details.

==Features==
===Transmit Only Mode===
Transmit Only mode allows you to disable the receiver function of the PlusX. Use this mode when sharing remote flashes with other photographers. This mode will prevent other photographers from triggering the PlusX on your camera.

To put the PlusX into Transmit Only Mode:

#Start with the radio powered off.
#Press and hold the TEST button.
#Turn on the radio and then release the TEST button

If performed correctly the selected Channel and LED should blink every couple seconds. In this mode, the PlusX will not be able to receive a signal, it will only transmit signals. Do not select this if you are connecting a PlusX to a receiving flash. To disable this mode simply turn the radio off and then back on again.

===Auto-Relay===
[[File:PlusX auto relay.jpg|right|320px]]
Auto-Relay allows you to trigger remote flashes in sync with a remote camera and requires only three PocketWizard radios. Using Auto-Relay is the only situation where not all PocketWizard radios are set to the same channel since the relaying radio triggers them one channel higher than it received on.

To preform Auto-Relay:

#Set your transmitting PocketWizard radio to your desired channel.
#Set the relaying PocketWizard radio for your remote camera to the same channel as the radio in your hands.
#Connect the relaying PocketWizard radio’s Flash/Camera Port to the remote camera triggering post of the camera via a remote camera cable.
#Slide the relaying PlusX into the remote camera’s hot shoe.
#Connect your remote flash to a PocketWizard receiving radio via the appropriate sync cable and set it to one channel higher than the transmitting PocketWizard radio in your hands.
# Press and release TEST on the PocketWizard transmitter in your hands to fire both the remote camera and remote flash in sync.

==Sustaining High Performance==
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
Your PocketWizard radios use the environment as a medium for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The performance of your radios depends on their placement in the environment, nearby radio interference, and the radios’ orientation and position relative to each other.

===Wireless Basics===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
Whenever possible, maintain a line of sight between radios and keep antennas parallel. Make sure radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure radios are not blocked by these objects or by hills.

The PlusX Transceiver’s antenna is fairly omnidirectional and its orientation should not significantly impact performance in most shooting scenarios, but optimizing for radio reception will always improve the maximum range.

Maintain at least a 12” distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

==Technical Information==
{|
|'''Frequency'''
|FCC/IC model: 344.04MHz
CE model: 433.62 MHz
|-
|'''Channels'''
|PlusX: 10 Standard Channels with Legacy firmware
PlusXe: 10 E Release Channels
|-
|'''Zones'''
|Single zone
|-
|'''Antenna'''
| Precision tuned internal coil
|-
|'''Channel Setting'''
|Backlit rotating dial
|-
|'''Range'''
| Up to 1,600 feet (500 meters)

(Actual range is dependent on multiple factors including equipment, mode, environment, positioning, orientation and interference)
|-
|'''Sync Speed'''
| Up to 1/250 for focal plane shutters
|-
|'''Triggering Speed'''
| Up to 14.5 FPS
|-
|'''Contact Time'''
|62 milliseconds in normal operation
|-
|'''Status Indicator'''
| LED: Green, Amber, Red status indications

Solid Red: Triggering signal sending or receiving

Single Green Blink: Status OK, > 50% battery life

Double Amber Blink: Battery life < 50% but > 25%

Triple Red Blink: Battery life < 25%, change batteries
|-
|'''Transmit Output Power'''
| Less than 1 milliwatt (0.001 watt)
|-
|'''Power'''
| Two (2), AA (LR6), 1.5v alkaline recommended

NiMH, NiCAD, NiZn, Lithium acceptable (these chemistries may not report battery life accurately)

DO NOT USE 3.6V Li-Ion AA cells!
|-
|'''Battery Life'''
| Up to 100 hours (with alkaline batteries)

PlusX

2025-08-03T02:50:07Z

Heathers:

[[File:PlusX SHP w-Glow 300dpi.jpg|right|250px|The PlusX Tranceiver]]
The PlusX is a radio transceiver, capable of acting as a transmitter or receiver for triggering remote flashes and cameras. To use the PlusX, at least one other PocketWizard radio is required. With the proper [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ cable], it can be connected to virtually any remote flash or camera.

Much like its predecessors, the Plus II and Plus III, the PlusX is a manual flash trigger and is compatible with all PocketWizard radios on the same frequency. It can trigger a remote flash up to the camera's X-sync but is not capable of TTL metering, power control, or High Speed Sync. The PlusX uses Legacy firmware while the new PlusXe uses either E Release or Legacy firmware.

==Introducing the PlusXe!==
{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
| '''BREAKING NEWS!''' As of September 2024, the PlusXe joined our line of E Release firmware products!
|}

The PlusXe works exactly the same as the PlusX EXCEPT that it uses our E Release firmware protocol. That means you can use it with any other PocketWizards that use the E Release, like a Plus IIIe or PowerMC2e, as well as the Raven from Fusion TLC.

If you would like to use the Legacy firmware instead, to work with your existing PocketWizard radios, you can easily change the firmware protocol. And then switch back to the E Release any time you want.

To change firmware protocol:
#Turn on the PlusXe
#Set the dial to Channel 4 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 3 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 2 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 1 and press Test
#Turn the PlusXe off then on again and the firmware will be set.

Do you already have PlusX radios but would love to upgrade to the E Release? You can send your radios in and we can upgrade them for you! [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ Send us an email] and we can walk you through the steps to purchase the licenses for upgrades and send in the radios.

All of the following information in this Wiki page as well as the PlusX quick guide applies to both the PlusXe and PlusX radios.

==PlusX Basics==
===Connecting===
[[File:PlusX Connecting Hot Shoe.jpg|right|300px]]
[[File:PlusX Connecting Sync Cable.jpg|right|300px]]
The PlusX can be connected to your camera in two different ways, either through the top shoe of the camera or with a sync cable.

'''Top Shoe:''' Slide the PlusX into the top shoe of the camera and secure it using the locking ring. Make sure to orient the antenna to the back of the camera while placing the radio into the hot shoe. Also be sure your hot shoe is active. There are some [[The FAQ#My PocketWizards aren't working on my new camera!|settings]] that automatically disable the hot shoe with mirrorless cameras.

'''Sync Cable:''' If you are using a camera with no hot shoe, the hot shoe cannot be used, or you are remotely triggering your camera, connect the transmitting PlusX’s Flash/Camera Port to the camera’s sync terminal.

'''Flash Sync Connection:''' The PlusX can also be connected to almost any flash using the appropriate sync cable. Visit the PocketWizard [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] to find the correct cable for your camera or flash.

===Powering On/Off===
Locate the switch on the left hand side of the radio (with the channel selector facing you). When the switch is down the unit is off and when in the up position it is on.

*If the radio is using Legacy firmware, you will see one bold '''green''' blink on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

*If the radio is using the E Release firmware, you will see a '''red''' '''green''' '''red''' '''green''' blink pattern on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

===Channels===
To change the channel on your radio simply turn the Channel Selector to find your desired channel. Turning the Channel Selector clockwise will change the channel in ascending order, turning it counter-clockwise will change the channel in descending order. When selecting your channel, make sure that the dial fully clicks into place otherwise you may not be transmitting/receiving on the correct channel.

Note: All radios MUST be on the same channel to properly trigger remote flashes or cameras (except when using [[#Auto-Relay|Auto-Relay]]). They must also be using all the same firmware (either E Release or Legacy) and the same frequency (either FCC or CE).

===Battery Indicator===
The LED on the top of the PlusX will blink three different colors ('''green''', '''amber''', and '''red''') at different intervals to indicate the remaining battery power.

*One '''green''' blink indicates between 100% to 50% remaining battery life.
*Two '''amber''' blinks indicates between 50% to 25% remaining battery life.
*Three '''red''' blinks indicates less than 25% remaining battery life.

===PlusX FAQ===

Having trouble with your PlusX? Check out our [[PlusX FAQ]] page!

==Remote Flash Triggering==
[[File:PlusX Remote Flash Triggering.jpg|right|300px|]]
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Attach a PlusX to your camera’s hot shoe. You may also connect the PlusX radio to your camera’s PC sync port using the appropriate cable.
# Connect a PlusX to your remote flash via the appropriate sync cable.
# Select a Channel. Set any other PocketWizard radios to matching the previously set Channel.
# Take pictures normally at or below your camera’s X-sync speed.

'''Momentarily pressing the TEST button will test trigger the flash.'''

==Remote Camera Triggering==
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Connect PlusX to your remote camera via the appropriate remote camera cable.
# Select a Channel.
# Press the TEST button on the transmitting PocketWizard radio or fire the camera in your hands. The remote camera will trigger.

NOTE: If you are using a handheld camera with a transmitting radio to trigger a remote camera at the same time, we suggest using a cable on BOTH cameras for best results. Some camera settings automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent shooting, or the fastest FPS setting. In these cases, you will need to use a cable on the handheld camera as the camera will not send a signal through the hot shoe. Please see our [[Remote Camera Triggering]] page for more details.

==Features==
===Transmit Only Mode===
Transmit Only mode allows you to disable the receiver function of the PlusX. Use this mode when sharing remote flashes with other photographers. This mode will prevent other photographers from triggering the PlusX on your camera.

To put the PlusX into Transmit Only Mode:

#Start with the radio powered off.
#Press and hold the TEST button.
#Turn on the radio and then release the TEST button

If performed correctly the selected Channel and LED should blink every couple seconds. In this mode, the PlusX will not be able to receive a signal, it will only transmit signals. Do not select this if you are connecting a PlusX to a receiving flash. To disable this mode simply turn the radio off and then back on again.

===Auto-Relay===
[[File:PlusX auto relay.jpg|right|320px]]
Auto-Relay allows you to trigger remote flashes in sync with a remote camera and requires only three PocketWizard radios. Using Auto-Relay is the only situation where not all PocketWizard radios are set to the same channel since the relaying radio triggers them one channel higher than it received on.

To preform Auto-Relay:

#Set your transmitting PocketWizard radio to your desired channel.
#Set the relaying PocketWizard radio for your remote camera to the same channel as the radio in your hands.
#Connect the relaying PocketWizard radio’s Flash/Camera Port to the remote camera triggering post of the camera via a remote camera cable.
#Slide the relaying PlusX into the remote camera’s hot shoe.
#Connect your remote flash to a PocketWizard receiving radio via the appropriate sync cable and set it to one channel higher than the transmitting PocketWizard radio in your hands.
# Press and release TEST on the PocketWizard transmitter in your hands to fire both the remote camera and remote flash in sync.

==Sustaining High Performance==
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
Your PocketWizard radios use the environment as a medium for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The performance of your radios depends on their placement in the environment, nearby radio interference, and the radios’ orientation and position relative to each other.

===Wireless Basics===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
Whenever possible, maintain a line of sight between radios and keep antennas parallel. Make sure radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure radios are not blocked by these objects or by hills.

The PlusX Transceiver’s antenna is fairly omnidirectional and its orientation should not significantly impact performance in most shooting scenarios, but optimizing for radio reception will always improve the maximum range.

Maintain at least a 12” distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

==Technical Information==
{|
|'''Frequency'''
|FCC/IC model: 344.04MHz
CE model: 433.62 MHz
|-
|'''Channels'''
|PlusX: 10 Standard Channels with Legacy firmware
PlusXe: 10 E Release Channels
|-
|'''Zones'''
|Single zone
|-
|'''Antenna'''
| Precision tuned internal coil
|-
|'''Channel Setting'''
|Backlit rotating dial
|-
|'''Range'''
| Up to 1,600 feet (500 meters)

(Actual range is dependent on multiple factors including equipment, mode, environment, positioning, orientation and interference)
|-
|'''Sync Speed'''
| Up to 1/250 for focal plane shutters
|-
|'''Triggering Speed'''
| Up to 14.5 FPS
|-
|'''Contact Time'''
|62 milliseconds in normal operation
|-
|'''Status Indicator'''
| LED: Green, Amber, Red status indications

Solid Red: Triggering signal sending or receiving

Single Green Blink: Status OK, > 50% battery life

Double Amber Blink: Battery life < 50% but > 25%

Triple Red Blink: Battery life < 25%, change batteries
|-
|'''Transmit Output Power'''
| Less than 1 milliwatt (0.001 watt)
|-
|'''Power'''
| Two (2), AA (LR6), 1.5v alkaline recommended

NiMH, NiCAD, NiZn, Lithium acceptable (these chemistries may not report battery life accurately)

DO NOT USE 3.6V Li-Ion AA cells!
|-
|'''Battery Life'''
| Up to 100 hours (with alkaline batteries)

PocketWizard Utility FAQ

2025-07-23T21:49:27Z

Heathers: /* How do I reset everything back to defaults? */

Do you have questions about the [[PocketWizard Utility]]? Check out these Frequently Asked Questions, compiled by [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support].

If any of the methods below resolves your issue, '''please''' report which one worked for you [mailto:info@pocketwizard.com?subject=Utility%20Report here]! Thank you!

===How do I reset everything back to defaults?===

Your PocketWizard radios can be reset using the [[PocketWizard Utility]] or by doing a full manual reset, which is the recommended method. To reset via the PocketWizard Utility, click the Update tab then click on Factory Reset. Say Yes to reset the unit.

For full manual resets:
*Plus III or Plus IV: Hold in the test button as you turn the radio on. When all of the segments light up, you can release the test button. The radios should default to TxRx, ABCD, and either CH17 (for Legacy firmware) or CH01 (for E Release) firmware.
*MultiMAX: Hit *MENU B D C or hold in the C button as you turn it on.
*MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6: Hold in the test button as you turn it on, for about 15 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks. You will see 1 blink, pause, 2 blinks, longer pause, then the last 4 blinks.
*PowerST4 or PowerMC2: these can only be reset via the PocketWizard Utility.

Check out our [[Factory Reset]] page for details.

===If the PocketWizard Utility won't recognize your radios or can't update them, try these suggestions: ===

When you connect the PocketWizard to the PocketWizard Utility, you should see an image of the radio and it will show you the serial number, firmware version, loader version, and hardware version. If you are not seeing the radio in the PocketWizard Utility window or if you get an error message when updating, there are several ways to try to fix the issue. Here are some things you can try:

* Make sure you have the latest version of the Utility, available for download on our [[Getting Started]] page
* Try performing a "hard" [[Factory Reset]] or "Reset B" on your radio. This can sometimes be effective where clicking the Factory Reset button in the Utility is not
* Try a different USB cable. You may have a bad cable or you may have a cable that is only a power cable. You will need a mini B to USB data cable to make changes with the PocketWizard Utility.
* If you are using a USB hub, like in your monitor, try a USB port directly on the computer
* If you are using a USB port directly on the computer, try going through a hub
* If you are using a Port Expander, try connecting directly to the computer
* If you are using a USB 3.0 port, try a USB2.0 port, or vice versa
* Try closing the Utility program, connecting the radio, then reopen the Utility program
* Make sure your computer's motherboard and operating system drivers are up to date
* If the radio has batteries in it, try connecting without batteries installed or with brand new batteries
* If the radio switch is in the OFF position when connecting it to USB, try it in the ON position, or vice versa
* Try connecting your radio to the computer's USB port before running the PocketWizard Utility
* Be patient. When disconnecting one radio, wait 15 seconds (or more!) before connecting another one, and then wait up to 2 minutes to see if it eventually connects (it can take a Windows computer up to 2 minutes to recognize a radio for the first time)
* Wait for any messages in the bottom of the Utility to disappear before connecting another radio, especially "Lost communication..."
* Temporarily disable any software that is specifically looking for other USB devices, like a voice recorder, camcorder, tablet, gaming controllers, etc.
* Temporarily disable any anti-virus or anti-malware software that may be trying to "manage" your USB ports for you
* Disconnect any and all other USB devices that may be interfering
* Try using a different user account
* Try using your computer’s Safe Mode
* Try another computer
* If you’re still having trouble, contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for help

===I'm getting this error: "Archive Extraction Error" or "Error extracting files from archive. #17"===

There are several workarounds for this issue. Please try one of the methods below and '''please''' report which one worked for you [mailto:info@pocketwizard.com?subject=Utility%20Report here]

Try the steps in the "Why won’t the Utility recognize or update my radios?" section above. Sometimes this issue is USB related.

====Try a complete uninstall and re-install of the Utility====

*Mac OS X
:#In the Finder sidebar, click Applications then drag "PocketWizard Utility" from the Applications folder to the Trash (located at the end of the Dock), then choose Finder > Empty Trash. Do this for all PocketWizard applications and downloads
:#Install the PocketWizard Utility from here: [[Getting Started]]

*Windows
:#Start | Programs | PocketWizard Utility | Uninstall
:#Go to C:\Users\<YOUR USERNAME>\AppData\Roaming\ and delete everything PocketWizard
:#Install the PocketWizard Utility from here: [[Getting Started]]

====Try drag and drop of individual firmware files====

Contact PocketWizard Technical Support via [mailto:info@pocketwizard.com?subject=Firmware%20file%20request email] to obtain the appropriate firmware files for your devices. You will need to attach a photo of each unit's serial number to obtain the correct firmware files. Technical support will determine if they can send you the appropriate files.

WARNING: Attempting to install the wrong firmware file into your radio could render it unusable/bricked! Only use the drag and drop method after you have discussed it with tech support and they have verified your exact radio.

#Save the appropriate files to your computer. Don't open, expand, extract, or perform any other operations with the files - just save them to your desktop or a folder where you can find them
#Connect your radio to the computer and run the Utility
#Drag the correct file onto the Utility with the radio connected, then drop it onto the picture of the radio. Don't open, expand, extract, or perform any other operations with the file - just drag and drop it

====Try using the older version of the Utility====

You will not be able to use a Panasonic FlexTT5 or a Plus IV radio with Utility versions 1.54 through 1.63, nor will you have the latest security certificates or bug fixes available in 1.70.

*Windows
:#Start | Programs | PocketWizard Utility | Uninstall
:#Go to C:\Users\<YOUR USERNAME>\AppData\Roaming\ and delete everything PocketWizard
:#Download version 1.63 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%201.63.exe here], version 1.58 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%201.58.exe here], or version 1.70 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup%201.70.exe here] and install it

*Mac OS X
:#In the Finder sidebar, click Applications then drag "PocketWizard Utility" from the Applications folder to the Trash (located at the end of the Dock), then choose Finder > Empty Trash. Do this for all PocketWizard applications and downloads
:#For Mac OS X version 10.6 (Snow Leopard) through 10.12 (Sierra), download version 1.63 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%201.63.dmg here]
:#For Mac OS X version 10.13 (High Sierra) through 10.14 (Mojave), download version 1.70 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%201.70.dmg here]
:#For PowerPC Mac (older Macs - 2006 or earlier) or Mac OS X version 10.5 (Leopard) and earlier download version 1.58 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.54.dmg here]

====Try another computer====

Sometimes this issue is simply not correctable any other way.

===Can I leave my radio connected to the USB port to test changes quickly?===

No, you should disconnect the radio and power cycle it (if it was turned on) after any changes. Being connected to the PocketWizard Utility his will affect sync timing and give you inaccurate results.

===Why won’t the Utility let me download the latest firmware version?===

-Make sure you’re running the latest version of the [[PocketWizard Utility]], which is available for download on our [[Getting Started]] page.

-Are you looking for [[Beta Firmware]]? Make sure you've enabled that in the PocketWizard Utility. Follow the steps [[Beta Firmware|here]].

-Look in Device Inventory and find the radio. Delete it from the inventory, then try to update the unit again.

-The Utility uses a standard protocol to download firmware files. You can test HTTPS by entering the following URL into your browser:

:: [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/ https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/]

*If the link above opens a new tab or window with an indexed list of files, then your computer has access to our servers. Close that tab or window; it just tests if your computer has general access to our servers, but this tab or window is not used by the Utility.

*If you get the list of files, but the Utility still will not download firmware files, then check any firewall, anti-malware or anti-virus software you may be running. Temporarily disable it to test the PocketWizard Utility behavior, but re-enable the firewall after testing.

*If you do not see the list of files, then something is blocking your computer's access to the servers. Try this:
**Check your internet connection and verify it is working
**Check any firewall, anti-malware or anti-virus software you may be running. Temporarily disable it test with the PocketWizard Utility behavior
**Check with your network administrator to see if it is being blocked on your network

-If you’re still having trouble, contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for help.

===Is the Utility compatible with my operating system?===

The latest version of the [[PocketWizard Utility]] works well with all recent versions of Windows (7, 8.1, 10) and the latest Mac OS, Catalina (10.15.3). In the Read Me file, Windows 8.1 and 10 are not listed as compatible.

===Why are all the fields in the Utility screen grayed-out?===

The Utility is trying to contact our servers and can't. Start by opening a new browser window and entering [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/ https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/]. If you are presented with an index list of files, that’s good – it means the [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] can access the necessary servers. If you are not presented with a list of files, check your firewall and security settings to be sure the [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] has been allowed the necessary permissions.

If you still have trouble, contact [http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ PocketWizard tech support].

===Where are all the options for advanced settings?===

Click the check-box in the bottom-left corner of the [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] window (next to a picture of a small blue gear) to enable Advanced Mode and reveal additional settings.

===What is the latest firmware version for my radio? Where can I find release notes?===

You can find the latest firmware versions for your radios and read release notes on our [[Getting Started]] page.

===What do all of these Utility selections mean, anyway?===

The [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] can be used to optimize ControlTL radios for a particular desired performance. Most photographers will be able to use radios in their default settings. To read more about each Utility setting, visit our [[PocketWizard Utility]] wiki page.

Channel Tab

2025-07-02T21:10:57Z

Heathers: /* Channel Input Boxes */

{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}

PocketWizard radios transmit and send signals through Channels. Channels enable you to work with other photographers and to keep your triggering exclusive, as each photographer can each use a different Channel. Each Channel has a different frequency and/or coding system and all PocketWizard radio slaves set to the same Channel work together. PocketWizard radios have 3 different types of Channels. Our Legacy firmware uses both ControlTL and Standard Channels. The E Release firmware uses E Release Channels. Please see the [[Channels]] page for more details.

'''Legacy Firmware'''
The MiniTT1™ Transmitter and FlexTT5™/FlexTT6 Transceivers can trigger all existing PocketWizard radios using Legacy firmware. The FlexTT5 and FlexTT6 radios can operate as a receiver for any PocketWizard transmitter using Legacy firmware.

When a MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 is used as a transmitter, it always sends out two triggers. One is sent on a ControlTL Channel, which will trigger a ControlTL receiver, like a FlexTT5, FlexTT6, PowerMC2, or PowerST4. The ControlTL Channels can send more advanced information like power control and TTL metering, as well as special timings for HyperSync and High Speed Sync.

The radios also send a Standard Channel at the same time. This will trigger PocketWizards using Standard Channel receivers like the Plus series, MultiMAX, or products with integrated PocketWizard receivers such as Dynalite and Profoto packs.

This enables you to use TTL or power-controlled flashes alongside other manual flashes. A transmitting ControlTL radio synchronizes both triggers precisely.

'''E Release Firmware'''
FlexTT5 and/or FlexTT6 radios that have been upgraded to the E Release firmware are transceivers that will work as either transmitters or receivers. They will only send out or receive one type of signal - an E Release Channel. An upgraded FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 will trigger any remote PocketWizard that has been upgraded to the E Release.

'''NOTE:''' E Release firmware is not available for the MiniTT1. If you have upgraded your other radios to the E Release firmware, they will not communicate with your MiniTT1.

__TOC__

[[File:Channels.jpg|500px|center|Channels Tab]]

''Note: When the MiniTT1 is plugged in it only shows the Transmit drop downs - ControlTL Tx and Standard Tx - because it is a Transmitter. The FlexTT5, a Transceiver, will show both Transmit and Receive options, because it perform both operations.''

====Channel Input Boxes====

The ControlTL radios have 2 Configuration settings. The default Channels for Configuration C1 are Channel 1 and Channel 2 for Configuration 2. You can change the Channels by connecting the radio to the PocketWizard Utility and selecting a different Channel. Be sure to adjust the Channels on all of your PocketWizard radios so they will match.

'''E Release Firmware'''
You will notice the only option is to choose the Channel you wish to use.

'''Legacy firmware only:'''
Transmit section: The Legacy firmware will give you the option to choose both a ControlTL Channel and a Standard Channel. The radio will send out both types of signals at the same time.

Receive section: You will see both ControlTL Channel and Standard Channel options but the Standard Channel will be grayed out. This is because while the ControlTL radios can transmit both types of signals at the same time, they can only receive on one type at a time. The default is to receive on a ControlTL Channel. If you plan to use a Standard Channel radio (such as a MultiMAX or Plus II) as the transmitter with a FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 as the receiver, we strongly suggest using [[Misc Tab#Basic Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]].

====ControlTL Transmit Priority at X-Sync (Nikon Only):====
{{nikononly}}

Uncheck this box to have the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 send the Standard PocketWizard Channel trigger first at your camera's x-sync speed, rather than ControlTL Channel. If you're using a PocketWizard that receives on Standard Channels as remote, like a PlusX, Plus III, Plus II, MultiMAX, or embedded PocketWizard receiver, unchecking this box max slightly increase the maximum sync speed.

This setting is checked by default, and only affects operation at your camera's x-sync speed. Un-checking this box may result in banding with a ControlTL Channel receiver at your camera's x-sync speed.

====Use ControlTL for Rx Channel Check Box (FlexTT5 Only)====

----
----
''This control is generally only used for performing a TTL relay from a remote camera, while triggering the camera via a Standard Channel. For most applications where a FlexTT5 needs to receive on a Standard Channel, we highly recommend using [[Misc Tab#Basic Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] instead.''
----
----

Check this box (default) to have the FlexTT5 radio listen on a ControlTL channel (set below with ControlTL Rx Channel).

Uncheck this box to listen on a Standard channel (set below with Standard Rx Channel). ControlTL commands will not be received.

Receiving radios can only listen on one channel at a time; either ControlTL or Standard. If your transmitter is a MiniTT1 radio and you are triggering a remote radio that is expected to respond to E-TTL II commands, then you must use a ControlTL channel.

If your transmitter is a [[PlusX]], [[Plus II]], [[Plus III]], or [[MultiMAX]] radio, then use a Standard channel.

[[Learn Mode]] is '''not''' suggested for normal operation.

Channel Tab

2025-07-02T21:10:09Z

Heathers: complete rework including E Release info

{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}

PocketWizard radios transmit and send signals through Channels. Channels enable you to work with other photographers and to keep your triggering exclusive, as each photographer can each use a different Channel. Each Channel has a different frequency and/or coding system and all PocketWizard radio slaves set to the same Channel work together. PocketWizard radios have 3 different types of Channels. Our Legacy firmware uses both ControlTL and Standard Channels. The E Release firmware uses E Release Channels. Please see the [[Channels]] page for more details.

'''Legacy Firmware'''
The MiniTT1™ Transmitter and FlexTT5™/FlexTT6 Transceivers can trigger all existing PocketWizard radios using Legacy firmware. The FlexTT5 and FlexTT6 radios can operate as a receiver for any PocketWizard transmitter using Legacy firmware.

When a MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 is used as a transmitter, it always sends out two triggers. One is sent on a ControlTL Channel, which will trigger a ControlTL receiver, like a FlexTT5, FlexTT6, PowerMC2, or PowerST4. The ControlTL Channels can send more advanced information like power control and TTL metering, as well as special timings for HyperSync and High Speed Sync.

The radios also send a Standard Channel at the same time. This will trigger PocketWizards using Standard Channel receivers like the Plus series, MultiMAX, or products with integrated PocketWizard receivers such as Dynalite and Profoto packs.

This enables you to use TTL or power-controlled flashes alongside other manual flashes. A transmitting ControlTL radio synchronizes both triggers precisely.

'''E Release Firmware'''
FlexTT5 and/or FlexTT6 radios that have been upgraded to the E Release firmware are transceivers that will work as either transmitters or receivers. They will only send out or receive one type of signal - an E Release Channel. An upgraded FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 will trigger any remote PocketWizard that has been upgraded to the E Release.

'''NOTE:''' E Release firmware is not available for the MiniTT1. If you have upgraded your other radios to the E Release firmware, they will not communicate with your MiniTT1.

__TOC__

[[File:Channels.jpg|500px|center|Channels Tab]]

''Note: When the MiniTT1 is plugged in it only shows the Transmit drop downs - ControlTL Tx and Standard Tx - because it is a Transmitter. The FlexTT5, a Transceiver, will show both Transmit and Receive options, because it perform both operations.''

====Channel Input Boxes====

The ControlTL radios have 2 Configuration settings. The default Channels for Configuration C1 are Channel 1 and Channel 2 for Configuration 2. You can change the Channels by connecting the radio to the PocketWizard Utility and selecting a different Channel. Be sure to adjust the Channels on all of your PocketWizard radios so they will match.

'''E Release Firmware'''
You will notice the only option is to choose the Channel you wish to use.

'''Legacy firmware only:'''
Transmit section: The Legacy firmware will give you the option to choose both a ControlTL Channel and a Standard Channel. The radio will send out both types of signals at the same time.

Receive section: You will see both ControlTL Channel and Standard Channel options but the Standard Channel will be grayed out. This is because while the ControlTL radios can transmit both types of signals at the same time, they can only receive on one type at a time. The default is to receive on a ControlTL Channel. If you plan to use a Standard Channel radio (such as a MultiMAX or Plus II) as the transmitter, we strongly suggest using [[Misc Tab#Basic Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]].

====ControlTL Transmit Priority at X-Sync (Nikon Only):====
{{nikononly}}

Uncheck this box to have the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 send the Standard PocketWizard Channel trigger first at your camera's x-sync speed, rather than ControlTL Channel. If you're using a PocketWizard that receives on Standard Channels as remote, like a PlusX, Plus III, Plus II, MultiMAX, or embedded PocketWizard receiver, unchecking this box max slightly increase the maximum sync speed.

This setting is checked by default, and only affects operation at your camera's x-sync speed. Un-checking this box may result in banding with a ControlTL Channel receiver at your camera's x-sync speed.

====Use ControlTL for Rx Channel Check Box (FlexTT5 Only)====

----
----
''This control is generally only used for performing a TTL relay from a remote camera, while triggering the camera via a Standard Channel. For most applications where a FlexTT5 needs to receive on a Standard Channel, we highly recommend using [[Misc Tab#Basic Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] instead.''
----
----

Check this box (default) to have the FlexTT5 radio listen on a ControlTL channel (set below with ControlTL Rx Channel).

Uncheck this box to listen on a Standard channel (set below with Standard Rx Channel). ControlTL commands will not be received.

Receiving radios can only listen on one channel at a time; either ControlTL or Standard. If your transmitter is a MiniTT1 radio and you are triggering a remote radio that is expected to respond to E-TTL II commands, then you must use a ControlTL channel.

If your transmitter is a [[PlusX]], [[Plus II]], [[Plus III]], or [[MultiMAX]] radio, then use a Standard channel.

[[Learn Mode]] is '''not''' suggested for normal operation.

Remote Camera Triggering

2025-06-05T02:57:47Z

Heathers: /* Basic Remote Camera Setup */

__FORCETOC__
[[File:PlusIIIE RemoteCamera.jpg|350px|thumb|right|Sony a9, Plus IIIe, and S-VPR1-ACC cable]]
All PocketWizard radios can be used to remotely trigger a remote camera. You will need at least 2 PocketWizard radios and the correct PocketWizard remote camera cable. Different camera bodies have different remote camera connectors and require different cables. To find the right cable for your particular camera, you can use the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder].

==Basic Remote Camera Setup==
# Set the transmitting radio and the receiving radio on your camera to the same [[Channels|Channel]] and Zone (if applicable).
# Attach the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ remote camera cable] to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the camera's receiving radio.
# Turn on your equipment top to bottom (radio, then camera)
# Press TEST on the transmitting radio in your hand to trigger the remote camera.

===Best Practices===
*Be sure to press the TEST button deliberately, do not "jab" it. If you press too fast, the remote camera may not have time to wake up and confirm focus and exposure. If you are using a Plus III/IIIe as the transmitter with a Plus III or Plus IV as a receiver, you can half press the TEST button to pre trigger the camera. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)
*Remote cameras are often set up in places where photographers cannot go. This means that the remote camera could be positioned in situations that are less than ideal for good reception, like on the ground behind a soccer goal, in a tree hidden from view, or on a stanchion behind a basketball goal. The receiving PocketWizard does not need to be in the hot shoe to trigger the camera. Cables are available in either 1' or 3' lengths and we have a 10' extension cable (the MMX) so you can put the camera where you want but put the radio in a position where it will be able to have the best reception.
*The type of cable does make a difference. PocketWizard remote camera cables are designed to be durable and last. They are also wired to be used with PocketWizard radios that can pre trigger the camera. Aftermarket cables may or may not be wired the correct way to work properly with the radios.
*Some radios have special modes such as LR (Long Range) and RP (Repeater) that can help with tricky setups. Be sure to check your radio's quick guide or the PocketWizard Wiki for details.

===Important Notes===
*When using a MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 remote camera setup using default radio settings, a remote camera can only be triggered in single shot mode and there will be a delay between shots. When the camera's meter is "awake" and the internal LED is active, the receiving radio cannot listen for an incoming signal. For Canon cameras, the delay is typically 2-3 seconds before the meter sleeps. For Nikon cameras, you can adjust the length of the delay by going into the custom menu settings and changing the setting. It's called Auto Meter Off or Standby and the shortest delay is 4 seconds.

Continuous triggering with ControlTL radios is possible if the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 attached to the camera has either Disable Shoe Communications or [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] set via the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. Basic Trigger mode is the recommended setup for remote camera triggering with ControlTL radios. With this setting, the radios only need to send a simple "fire now!" signal, instead of having to send information about power levels and sync speed, which you don't need with a remote camera.

==Triggering a Remote Camera from a Handheld Camera==
The setup is very similar to the Basic Remote Camera setup but there are a couple important differences. When you are triggering from a handheld PocketWizard to a remote camera, the radio will send hundreds of packets of triggers through the air. When you have a PocketWizard in the hot shoe of your handheld camera, the camera thinks the radio is a flash. That means it won't send a signal until the handheld camera's shutter is tripped. It then sends a very quick pop (because the camera thinks it only needs to pop a flash) to the radio in its hot shoe. Because the radio is getting a very short signal, it only has enough time to send out one or two trigger packets. If the remote camera is not completely ready when its radio gets the trigger, it may not fire because it is still checking the settings and will miss the packet. Adding a remote camera cable to your transmitting radio and handheld camera usually solves this issue. This is just a quick overview but there are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

# Set the transmitting radio and the receiving radio on your camera to the same [[Channels|Channel]] and Zone (if applicable).
# Attach the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ remote camera cable] to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the camera's receiving radio.
# Attach the transmitting radio to your camera's hot shoe. For best results, connect a remote camera cable to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the transmitting radio.
# Turn on your equipment top to bottom (radio, then camera)
# Take a photo with the camera in your hand to trigger the remote camera at the same time.

===Best Practices===
*Always make sure you have the most recent firmware in your radio.
*Use the PTMM adapter. This adapter connects to your remote camera cable and has a switch on it. When you turn the switch "on", it will pre trigger your remote camera and keep it in a pre triggered state, as though you were constantly half pressing the shutter button. Note: It will use more battery power than usual, as your camera is kept constantly awake.
*Use a cable on BOTH the handheld and remote camera. With this setup, if you are using Plus III radios, when you half press the shutter button of the camera in your hand, it will send a half press signal to the remote camera at the same time. This will pre trigger the camera so it responds faster when you take the photo. With any other radio, it will ensure that a signal is sent out to the remote radio. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)

===Important Notes===
*With most mirrorless cameras, when you set the camera to continuous high speed shooting, the hot shoe will be disabled. For that setup, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera as well as the remote camera because the handheld camera won't send a signal to the transmitting radio through the hot shoe. (note: continuous high speed shooting and silent shooting modes also usually disable the hot shoe)
*When you are shooting from a handheld camera to a remote camera, there will be a delay between shots. This is because the transmitting camera will not send the signal to the hot shoe until AFTER the shutter moves. Using a PTMM or cables on both cameras will help lessen (though not completely eliminate) this time difference because the remote camera will be at half press and ready to receive a signal.
*There are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

==Relay Mode==
Sometimes you want to use a flash with your remote camera, for situations like self portraits or maybe taking a photo of a bear at night in the wild. Relay mode allows you to trigger a remote camera and to have that remote camera trigger a remote flash.

For Relay, you need at least 3 PocketWizards. One to send the signal, one on the camera, then one attached to the flash. You will also need the appropriate remote camera cable. It seems logical to set the radios all to the same Channel but if you do that, you will find they will not sync properly. A flash only needs a quick "fire now!" signal to fire while a camera has to verify that the exposure is correct and that the focus is confirmed before it will shoot, even if both of those are set to manual. When you set everything to the same Channel, the flash will fire before the camera, resulting in a dark exposure.

When you use our Relay mode, you use 2 different Channels. Here's how Relay works:
#The PocketWizard in your hand sends out a signal on a specific Channel.
#The PocketWizard for the camera will receive that incoming signal and trigger the camera. The camera then sends a sync pulse through the hot shoe. (note: the PocketWizard MUST be in the camera's hot shoe)
#The PocketWizard on the camera senses the trigger from the camera's hot shoe and automatically sends out a new signal on a different Channel.
#The PocketWizard connected to the flash receives the signal on the secondary Channel and fires the flash.

For example, the transmitting radio will be set to Channel 1. The radio on the camera will be set to TxRx Channel 1 and receives on Channel 1. When it gets the trigger from the camera's hot shoe, it will automatically send out a new trigger on Channel 2. The radio connected to the flash should be set to Channel 2 to receive the signal.

Any PocketWizard Auto Sensing Transceiver will automatically send out a signal one Channel higher.
*A FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 will automatically send the signal one Channel higher but you can program the radios in the PocketWizard Utility to send out the Relayed signal on a different Channel if you wish to.
*With the MultiMAX, you can choose which Channel you use for the Relayed signal.

For more information, please see our [[Relay Mode]] page.

'''Note:''' If you are using a FlexTT5 or FlexTT6, you can use a flash in the receiving camera's hot shoe, simply set it to Master, just as you would if you were firing directly from the camera.

==Auto Focus vs Manual Focus==
We strongly suggest using Manual focus for remote cameras. A remote camera that is using AutoFocus but has not been pre-released (with a pre-trigger cable or a half-press from a Plus III) will still attempt to focus a remote camera before firing an exposure. Depending on the AF setting that you have chosen for your remote camera, the auto focus behavior will look a little different:

* When the camera is set to AF-S (Single), the camera will not release the shutter button until it can confirm the focus. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will attempt to autofocus before releasing the shutter button.
* When the camera is set to AF-C (Continuous), the focus is continuous up until the point of the full shutter release. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will first attempt to focus and will then fire regardless of focus confirmation.

In AF-S there is the possibility of missing shots, if focus cannot be confirmed, and in AF-C there is the possibility of getting an out-of-focus shot. These limitations are tied to the camera’s auto-focus system – you will see the same behavior with or without PocketWizard radios.

==Remote Camera Cables==

To trigger a remote camera, you will need at least one remote camera cable for your camera. A remote camera cable has a stereo 3.5mm (1/8") connection for the PocketWizard and the other end is specific to the camera's remote port connection.

The most common cables are:
*'''Canon CM-E3-ACC:''' this cable has a 2.5mm connection. It fits Canon cameras with the E3 connection. It also usually works with most other cameras that have a 2.5mm connection, such as Fuji or Olympus, or with any flashes with a 2.5mm sync port. (Note: the Panasonic cameras will not work with this cable. You would need to use the PAN-ACC cable.)
*'''Canon CM-N3-ACC:''' this cable has a 3 prong connection. It fits Canon cameras with the N3 connection.
*'''Nikon N-MCDC2-ACC:''' this cable has a rectangular 4 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MCDC2 connection.
*'''Nikon N10-ACC:''' this cable has the Nikon 10 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MC30/10 pin connection.
*'''S-VPR1-ACC:''' this cable has the Sony micro connection. It fits Sony cameras with the VPR1 / micro USB connection. Use with Plus III, Plus IV, and through the bottom -ACC port of MultiMAX radios. See IMPORTANT NOTES section below if you plan to trigger a remote camera from a handheld camera.
*'''13377-S:''' this cable is the same as the S-VPR1-ACC but wired differently inside. Use this cable with a remote PlusX radios or through the top port of MultiMAX radios. See IMPORTANT NOTES section below if you plan to trigger a remote camera from a handheld camera.

These cables are all stereo cables and are capable of pre triggering the camera from the test button if you are using a Plus IIIe radios, or by enabling or disabling a Zone if you are using MultiMAX radios. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware) MultiMAX radios with -ACC ports are also capable of pre triggering by activating Zones.

You can add the PTMM adapter to any of these cables to have pre-trigger constantly on, regardless of the PocketWizard radios you are using. By pre-triggering the radio, the remote camera will be kept in a state of half press so it will respond to the trigger faster. The PTMM has a switch built in and when the switch is engaged, the connected camera behaves as if its shutter button is held down half way. This lets the camera respond more quickly and consistently, but at the expense of battery life. Pre-release cables can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode.

'''IMPORTANT NOTES:'''
*As noted above, if you are triggering a remote camera while shooting from a handheld camera with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe, we suggest using cables on both cameras for best results. For most mirrorless cameras, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera and transmitting radio, as the camera's hot shoe might be disabled.
*SONY USERS: If you are triggering from a handheld camera with a PlusX radio to a remote camera, you MUST use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your transmitting PlusX. You should use the 13377-S with a remote PlusX for best results. If you use the S-VPR1-ACC cable with a remote PlusX and the camera goes to sleep, it will lock up the radio. You would need to do a power cycle on the camera or remote PlusX or remove the cable to reset it. If you can disable the sleep timer in your camera, you should be able to use the S-VPR1-ACC cable.
*If you have older radios, like the Plus II, Plus Receiver, or use the MultiMAX top port, that requires a mono connection. Add the PTMM or an MSMM adapter. The Plus IIIe, Plus IVe, and PlusX radios can all use either stereo or mono cables.
*If you are using MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and/or FlexTT6 radios for remote camera triggering, we strongly suggest using Basic Trigger mode for best results.

Remote Camera Triggering

2025-06-05T02:57:04Z

Heathers: /* Triggering a Remote Camera from a Handheld Camera */ added step by step

__FORCETOC__
[[File:PlusIIIE RemoteCamera.jpg|350px|thumb|right|Sony a9, Plus IIIe, and S-VPR1-ACC cable]]
All PocketWizard radios can be used to remotely trigger a remote camera. You will need at least 2 PocketWizard radios and the correct PocketWizard remote camera cable. Different camera bodies have different remote camera connectors and require different cables. To find the right cable for your particular camera, you can use the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder].

==Basic Remote Camera Setup==
# Set the transmitting radios and the receiving radio on your camera to the same [[Channels|Channel]] and Zone (if applicable).
# Attach the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ remote camera cable] to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the camera's receiving radio.
# Turn on your equipment top to bottom (radio, then camera)
# Press TEST on the transmitting radio in your hand to trigger the remote camera.

===Best Practices===
*Be sure to press the TEST button deliberately, do not "jab" it. If you press too fast, the remote camera may not have time to wake up and confirm focus and exposure. If you are using a Plus III/IIIe as the transmitter with a Plus III or Plus IV as a receiver, you can half press the TEST button to pre trigger the camera. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)
*Remote cameras are often set up in places where photographers cannot go. This means that the remote camera could be positioned in situations that are less than ideal for good reception, like on the ground behind a soccer goal, in a tree hidden from view, or on a stanchion behind a basketball goal. The receiving PocketWizard does not need to be in the hot shoe to trigger the camera. Cables are available in either 1' or 3' lengths and we have a 10' extension cable (the MMX) so you can put the camera where you want but put the radio in a position where it will be able to have the best reception.
*The type of cable does make a difference. PocketWizard remote camera cables are designed to be durable and last. They are also wired to be used with PocketWizard radios that can pre trigger the camera. Aftermarket cables may or may not be wired the correct way to work properly with the radios.
*Some radios have special modes such as LR (Long Range) and RP (Repeater) that can help with tricky setups. Be sure to check your radio's quick guide or the PocketWizard Wiki for details.

===Important Notes===
*When using a MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 remote camera setup using default radio settings, a remote camera can only be triggered in single shot mode and there will be a delay between shots. When the camera's meter is "awake" and the internal LED is active, the receiving radio cannot listen for an incoming signal. For Canon cameras, the delay is typically 2-3 seconds before the meter sleeps. For Nikon cameras, you can adjust the length of the delay by going into the custom menu settings and changing the setting. It's called Auto Meter Off or Standby and the shortest delay is 4 seconds.

Continuous triggering with ControlTL radios is possible if the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 attached to the camera has either Disable Shoe Communications or [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] set via the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. Basic Trigger mode is the recommended setup for remote camera triggering with ControlTL radios. With this setting, the radios only need to send a simple "fire now!" signal, instead of having to send information about power levels and sync speed, which you don't need with a remote camera.

==Triggering a Remote Camera from a Handheld Camera==
The setup is very similar to the Basic Remote Camera setup but there are a couple important differences. When you are triggering from a handheld PocketWizard to a remote camera, the radio will send hundreds of packets of triggers through the air. When you have a PocketWizard in the hot shoe of your handheld camera, the camera thinks the radio is a flash. That means it won't send a signal until the handheld camera's shutter is tripped. It then sends a very quick pop (because the camera thinks it only needs to pop a flash) to the radio in its hot shoe. Because the radio is getting a very short signal, it only has enough time to send out one or two trigger packets. If the remote camera is not completely ready when its radio gets the trigger, it may not fire because it is still checking the settings and will miss the packet. Adding a remote camera cable to your transmitting radio and handheld camera usually solves this issue. This is just a quick overview but there are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

# Set the transmitting radio and the receiving radio on your camera to the same [[Channels|Channel]] and Zone (if applicable).
# Attach the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ remote camera cable] to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the camera's receiving radio.
# Attach the transmitting radio to your camera's hot shoe. For best results, connect a remote camera cable to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the transmitting radio.
# Turn on your equipment top to bottom (radio, then camera)
# Take a photo with the camera in your hand to trigger the remote camera at the same time.

===Best Practices===
*Always make sure you have the most recent firmware in your radio.
*Use the PTMM adapter. This adapter connects to your remote camera cable and has a switch on it. When you turn the switch "on", it will pre trigger your remote camera and keep it in a pre triggered state, as though you were constantly half pressing the shutter button. Note: It will use more battery power than usual, as your camera is kept constantly awake.
*Use a cable on BOTH the handheld and remote camera. With this setup, if you are using Plus III radios, when you half press the shutter button of the camera in your hand, it will send a half press signal to the remote camera at the same time. This will pre trigger the camera so it responds faster when you take the photo. With any other radio, it will ensure that a signal is sent out to the remote radio. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)

===Important Notes===
*With most mirrorless cameras, when you set the camera to continuous high speed shooting, the hot shoe will be disabled. For that setup, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera as well as the remote camera because the handheld camera won't send a signal to the transmitting radio through the hot shoe. (note: continuous high speed shooting and silent shooting modes also usually disable the hot shoe)
*When you are shooting from a handheld camera to a remote camera, there will be a delay between shots. This is because the transmitting camera will not send the signal to the hot shoe until AFTER the shutter moves. Using a PTMM or cables on both cameras will help lessen (though not completely eliminate) this time difference because the remote camera will be at half press and ready to receive a signal.
*There are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

==Relay Mode==
Sometimes you want to use a flash with your remote camera, for situations like self portraits or maybe taking a photo of a bear at night in the wild. Relay mode allows you to trigger a remote camera and to have that remote camera trigger a remote flash.

For Relay, you need at least 3 PocketWizards. One to send the signal, one on the camera, then one attached to the flash. You will also need the appropriate remote camera cable. It seems logical to set the radios all to the same Channel but if you do that, you will find they will not sync properly. A flash only needs a quick "fire now!" signal to fire while a camera has to verify that the exposure is correct and that the focus is confirmed before it will shoot, even if both of those are set to manual. When you set everything to the same Channel, the flash will fire before the camera, resulting in a dark exposure.

When you use our Relay mode, you use 2 different Channels. Here's how Relay works:
#The PocketWizard in your hand sends out a signal on a specific Channel.
#The PocketWizard for the camera will receive that incoming signal and trigger the camera. The camera then sends a sync pulse through the hot shoe. (note: the PocketWizard MUST be in the camera's hot shoe)
#The PocketWizard on the camera senses the trigger from the camera's hot shoe and automatically sends out a new signal on a different Channel.
#The PocketWizard connected to the flash receives the signal on the secondary Channel and fires the flash.

For example, the transmitting radio will be set to Channel 1. The radio on the camera will be set to TxRx Channel 1 and receives on Channel 1. When it gets the trigger from the camera's hot shoe, it will automatically send out a new trigger on Channel 2. The radio connected to the flash should be set to Channel 2 to receive the signal.

Any PocketWizard Auto Sensing Transceiver will automatically send out a signal one Channel higher.
*A FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 will automatically send the signal one Channel higher but you can program the radios in the PocketWizard Utility to send out the Relayed signal on a different Channel if you wish to.
*With the MultiMAX, you can choose which Channel you use for the Relayed signal.

For more information, please see our [[Relay Mode]] page.

'''Note:''' If you are using a FlexTT5 or FlexTT6, you can use a flash in the receiving camera's hot shoe, simply set it to Master, just as you would if you were firing directly from the camera.

==Auto Focus vs Manual Focus==
We strongly suggest using Manual focus for remote cameras. A remote camera that is using AutoFocus but has not been pre-released (with a pre-trigger cable or a half-press from a Plus III) will still attempt to focus a remote camera before firing an exposure. Depending on the AF setting that you have chosen for your remote camera, the auto focus behavior will look a little different:

* When the camera is set to AF-S (Single), the camera will not release the shutter button until it can confirm the focus. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will attempt to autofocus before releasing the shutter button.
* When the camera is set to AF-C (Continuous), the focus is continuous up until the point of the full shutter release. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will first attempt to focus and will then fire regardless of focus confirmation.

In AF-S there is the possibility of missing shots, if focus cannot be confirmed, and in AF-C there is the possibility of getting an out-of-focus shot. These limitations are tied to the camera’s auto-focus system – you will see the same behavior with or without PocketWizard radios.

==Remote Camera Cables==

To trigger a remote camera, you will need at least one remote camera cable for your camera. A remote camera cable has a stereo 3.5mm (1/8") connection for the PocketWizard and the other end is specific to the camera's remote port connection.

The most common cables are:
*'''Canon CM-E3-ACC:''' this cable has a 2.5mm connection. It fits Canon cameras with the E3 connection. It also usually works with most other cameras that have a 2.5mm connection, such as Fuji or Olympus, or with any flashes with a 2.5mm sync port. (Note: the Panasonic cameras will not work with this cable. You would need to use the PAN-ACC cable.)
*'''Canon CM-N3-ACC:''' this cable has a 3 prong connection. It fits Canon cameras with the N3 connection.
*'''Nikon N-MCDC2-ACC:''' this cable has a rectangular 4 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MCDC2 connection.
*'''Nikon N10-ACC:''' this cable has the Nikon 10 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MC30/10 pin connection.
*'''S-VPR1-ACC:''' this cable has the Sony micro connection. It fits Sony cameras with the VPR1 / micro USB connection. Use with Plus III, Plus IV, and through the bottom -ACC port of MultiMAX radios. See IMPORTANT NOTES section below if you plan to trigger a remote camera from a handheld camera.
*'''13377-S:''' this cable is the same as the S-VPR1-ACC but wired differently inside. Use this cable with a remote PlusX radios or through the top port of MultiMAX radios. See IMPORTANT NOTES section below if you plan to trigger a remote camera from a handheld camera.

These cables are all stereo cables and are capable of pre triggering the camera from the test button if you are using a Plus IIIe radios, or by enabling or disabling a Zone if you are using MultiMAX radios. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware) MultiMAX radios with -ACC ports are also capable of pre triggering by activating Zones.

You can add the PTMM adapter to any of these cables to have pre-trigger constantly on, regardless of the PocketWizard radios you are using. By pre-triggering the radio, the remote camera will be kept in a state of half press so it will respond to the trigger faster. The PTMM has a switch built in and when the switch is engaged, the connected camera behaves as if its shutter button is held down half way. This lets the camera respond more quickly and consistently, but at the expense of battery life. Pre-release cables can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode.

'''IMPORTANT NOTES:'''
*As noted above, if you are triggering a remote camera while shooting from a handheld camera with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe, we suggest using cables on both cameras for best results. For most mirrorless cameras, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera and transmitting radio, as the camera's hot shoe might be disabled.
*SONY USERS: If you are triggering from a handheld camera with a PlusX radio to a remote camera, you MUST use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your transmitting PlusX. You should use the 13377-S with a remote PlusX for best results. If you use the S-VPR1-ACC cable with a remote PlusX and the camera goes to sleep, it will lock up the radio. You would need to do a power cycle on the camera or remote PlusX or remove the cable to reset it. If you can disable the sleep timer in your camera, you should be able to use the S-VPR1-ACC cable.
*If you have older radios, like the Plus II, Plus Receiver, or use the MultiMAX top port, that requires a mono connection. Add the PTMM or an MSMM adapter. The Plus IIIe, Plus IVe, and PlusX radios can all use either stereo or mono cables.
*If you are using MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and/or FlexTT6 radios for remote camera triggering, we strongly suggest using Basic Trigger mode for best results.

The FAQ

2025-04-29T19:16:07Z

Heathers: added section about old and new PWs working together

Do you have questions about PocketWizard radios in general? Check out these Frequently Asked Questions, compiled by [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support].

====Nothing is working! What should I do?====

Try the following steps:
* If you have a radio with TTL communication, make sure your cameras and flashes are compatible. Please check the [[Canon Compatibility]] and [[Nikon Compatibility]] Wiki pages for details.
* Check your [[batteries]] - sometimes low batteries can affect radio performance.
* Check your camera's flash settings and make sure you did not turn the camera's flash off in the menu, as that disables the hot shoe.
* Make sure all of your radios have been updated to the latest firmware and are using the same version. Connect your radio to the [[PocketWizard Utility]] and navigate to the "[[Update Tab]]." Click the “[[Update Tab#Check for Updates Button|Check for Updates Button]].”
* Make sure your camera and flashes are using the latest firmware, too!
* Perform a [[Factory Reset]] on all of your radios.
* Be sure to power on your equipment top down: flashes first, then radios, then cameras. This is more important for ControlTL radios.
* Take your first shot at 1/160th or 1/200th so the system can properly calibrate timing.
* Take a look at the [https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=wHu4IF3BIHo troubleshooting video] on YouTube. The video is designed for Plus radios but there is helpful information about all PocketWizard radios.
* Check the [[The FAQ#Questions about your specific radio|FAQ pages]] for your specific PocketWizard radios for detailed troubleshooting.
* Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for troubleshooting help.

===My new PocketWizards aren't working with my old PocketWizards!===

PocketWizards are backwards compatible BUT they need to be using the same frequency and same firmware protocol. Here's what you can check:
* What firmware protocol are your radios using? If you just bought a new PlusXe and are trying to trigger your Plus IIs, they can't talk to each other. You can downgrade and upgrade as needed to make them work. Here's a link for info about how to check that and what to do: [[PocketWizard Firmware]]
* Check the label for your frequency. Radios for North and South America use FCC frequencies (344-354 MHz) while CE radios (for most of the rest of the world) use 433 MHz. If one sticker says CE and the other says FCC, they will never talk to each other. The 2 frequencies use different boards and different antennas.
* If you have ControlTL radios like the MiniTT1 or FlexTT5s and now you are adding in Plus or MultiMAX radios, you need to understand how the Channels work. The [[Channels]] page can help explain that.

====My PocketWizards aren't working on my new camera!====

A transmitting PocketWizard radio needs the sync pulse trigger through the hot shoe so it knows to send a signal to your remote PocketWizard. Camera manufacturers are always trying to improve options for photographers but especially with mirrorless cameras, some of these "new improved" features will automatically disable the hot shoe. If your hot shoe is turned off, your transmitting radio won't get a signal to fire the remote. Any time you take a photo, the LED on the transmitting PocketWizard should go red. If it's not doing that, there's a communication error between the radio and camera, most likely that your hot shoe is disabled. Here are some things to check:
*Check to see if the camera is set to Silent Shooting mode. For most cameras, this disables the hot shoe.
*Check to see if the flash is turned off. This disables the hot shoe.
*Check your drive speed. With some cameras, when you put it in the highest FPS setting (like 20 FPS), it disables the hot shoe.
*If your camera is set to electronic shutter, try switching to mechanical shutter. For some cameras, electronic shutter disables the hot shoe.
*Nikon users: check your custom setting for "Apply Changes to Live View" (usually setting d8 or d9). This mode needs to be turned off.
*If you have radios with TTL, like the MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and/or FlexTT6, please make sure your new camera is TTL compatible with your existing equipment. If you do not see your camera listed on either the [[Nikon Compatibility | Nikon]] or [[Canon Compatibility | Canon]] compatibility page, it may not be able to communicate with the radios in TTL mode. You should be able to always use them in [[Misc Tab | Basic Trigger]] mode, for manual triggering up to X-sync if TTL is not yet available for your new camera.

====I just upgraded my firmware and it doesn't work! What do I do?====

After updating your firmware, always perform a factory reset with the radio: See RESET B [[Factory Reset#Reset B - Factory_Defaults|here]], or simply hold TEST before you power on your radio and continue to hold TEST for 15 seconds until you see 4 green blinks. While the PocketWizard Utility performs a factory reset automatically when you upgrade the firmware, and has a Factory Reset button on the Update tab, Reset B remains the recommended method after a firmware upgrade.

====What cable do I need?====

You can use the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] at [http://www.pocketwizard.com/ PocketWizard.com] to find the right cable for lots of different cameras and flashes.

Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] if you still have questions.

====How many radios do I need?====

You will need at least 2 PocketWizards, one to work as a transmitter and one for each remote to work as a receiver. For example, if you are triggering one flash from your camera, you would need one for the camera and one for the flash, a total of 2. If you have 3 remote flashes, you would need 4 total radios. If you are triggering 2 remote cameras, you would need 3 radios - one in your hand to send the signal and one for each remote camera.

====Is my camera or flash compatible with your radios?====

Virtually all cameras and flashes with a standard size hot-shoe, PC socket, or sync port are compatible with Standard Channel radios like the [[Plus II]], [[Plus III]], [[PlusX]], and [[MultiMAX]].

Visit our [[Canon Compatibility]] or [[Nikon Compatibility]] pages to see if your camera or flash is compatible with our [[ControlTL]] radios like the [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5]].

Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] if you still have questions.

====I can’t update my firmware. Why won’t the Utility recognize my radios?====

Try the following steps:
* Start by making sure you're connecting your radios directly to your computer, rather than through a USB hub.
* Try disconnecting all additional USB devices from your computer.
* Uninstall the [[PocketWizard Utility]] and reinstall the latest version, available for download on this website, https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=Getting_Started.
* Attempt to update the radios using another user account.
* Attempt the update while running your computer in Safe Mode.
* See more options in our [[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]] page.
* Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for troubleshooting help.

====I think my radio needs to be repaired. What do I do?====

Contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support]. Warranty and repair inquiries are handled by the distributor in the region in which the radios are purchased, so please include this information in your message.

====Why does PocketWizard make radios in two different frequencies?====

Our radios are sold in [[Frequency|two different versions]] to comply with radio laws in different countries. In the United States, the FCC reserves the 344-354 MHz frequency for PocketWizard systems. In Europe, regulations assign 433-434 MHz. A PocketWizard sold in the USA bears the letters “FCC” on the outer shell; a European version will have the letters “CE.”

====Can I buy my radios directly through PocketWizard?====

Yes! You can buy PocketWizard products directly through the PocketWizard online store if you live in the US or Canada: https://shop.pocketwizard.com/. Or if you prefer, check with your local camera shop to see if they carry our products.

====The hot-shoe on my radio broke off! How do I get it fixed?====

Our radios are made from a glass-reinforced resin material, and shouldn’t break with normal usage. However, if gear gets dropped or knocked over, there is a high risk that some piece of gear will get damaged. A plastic foot allows for a less expensive (and user-serviceable) part to need replacement over a more expensive part like a camera or flash repair. In general, photography equipment like cameras and flashes and radios are not designed to be dropped or knocked over. We’re no exception. We provide a simpler, less expensive, and more accessible repair.

If you feel comfortable with minor repairs and are in the US or Canada, you can purchase a hot shoe directly from https://shop.pocketwizard.com and do the repair yourself or you can send it into us and we will do the repair for you. There are videos on each page so you can see the process before ordering the part. Please contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for details.

If you are outside North America, you can contact your local distributor, they should be able to help you. If you need help finding your local distributor, you can contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for information.

====Why is my remote flash not firing on the first shot?====

While our FlexTT5, FlexTT6, and Standard Channel radios don’t go to sleep, your flash does! Please be sure to set the sleep timer on your flash to either a fairly long period of time or just plain “off”. In Nikon, this setting is called STBY mode in the menu, for Canon it is in the Custom Functions. The MiniTT1 does go to sleep when the camera's meter sleeps so we always suggest doing a half press when you are ready to shoot again.

Note: if you are using ControlTL radios for Canon, the first shot is a calibration shot and will NOT fire the flashes. The second shot will.

====I'm trying to remotely trigger my camera and flash but they don't seem to sync!====

This setup is called relay mode. The trick is that you need to set the radio with your remote flash to receive on a different Channel. Here's how it works:
* The radio in your hand sends signal on Channel 1 (for example) to the radio attached to the camera. That radio triggers the camera through the remote port.
* When the shutter fires, the radio gets a signal through its hot shoe. The radio knows it needs to relay a signal one Channel higher than the one it received, so it will send a trigger on Channel 2. (or whatever is one higher than the one you chose).
* The receiving radio (attached to the flash) receives the signal on the higher Channel and fires the flash.
If you set all the radios to the same Channel, the flash will fire before the camera opens its shutter. The flash just needs the radio to tell it to fire and it does. The camera gets the signal and then needs to confirm focus and exposure before firing, even if everything is set to manual, so there is a slight delay. Relay solves that problem.

====Can I start and stop video recording with my PocketWizards?====
This is not a setting we test but we have found that for most cameras, video mode can be controlled by your PocketWizard. In some cameras, you will need to make a menu change so the camera knows you want to use the shutter for starting and stopping video. For best results, we recommend using the Plus IIIe radios.

====Questions about your specific radio?====

Check out our other FAQ pages for more information on your PocketWizard system:

:[[PocketWizard_E_Release#E_Release_FAQs | PocketWizard E Release FAQ]]

:[[PocketWizard Utility FAQ]]

:[[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]]

:[[Plus III FAQ]]

:[[PlusX FAQ]]

:[[MultiMAX FAQ]]

:[[PowerMC2 FAQ]]

:[[PowerST4 FAQ]]

Remote Camera Triggering

2025-04-09T19:55:29Z

Heathers: /* Remote Camera Cables */ added section about Sony cables

__FORCETOC__
[[File:PlusIIIE RemoteCamera.jpg|350px|thumb|right|Sony a9, Plus IIIe, and S-VPR1-ACC cable]]
All PocketWizard radios can be used to remotely trigger a remote camera. You will need at least 2 PocketWizard radios and the correct PocketWizard remote camera cable. Different camera bodies have different remote camera connectors and require different cables. To find the right cable for your particular camera, you can use the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder].

==Basic Remote Camera Setup==
# Set the transmitting radios and the receiving radio on your camera to the same [[Channels|Channel]] and Zone (if applicable).
# Attach the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ remote camera cable] to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the camera's receiving radio.
# Turn on your equipment top to bottom (radio, then camera)
# Press TEST on the transmitting radio in your hand to trigger the remote camera.

===Best Practices===
*Be sure to press the TEST button deliberately, do not "jab" it. If you press too fast, the remote camera may not have time to wake up and confirm focus and exposure. If you are using a Plus III/IIIe as the transmitter with a Plus III or Plus IV as a receiver, you can half press the TEST button to pre trigger the camera. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)
*Remote cameras are often set up in places where photographers cannot go. This means that the remote camera could be positioned in situations that are less than ideal for good reception, like on the ground behind a soccer goal, in a tree hidden from view, or on a stanchion behind a basketball goal. The receiving PocketWizard does not need to be in the hot shoe to trigger the camera. Cables are available in either 1' or 3' lengths and we have a 10' extension cable (the MMX) so you can put the camera where you want but put the radio in a position where it will be able to have the best reception.
*The type of cable does make a difference. PocketWizard remote camera cables are designed to be durable and last. They are also wired to be used with PocketWizard radios that can pre trigger the camera. Aftermarket cables may or may not be wired the correct way to work properly with the radios.
*Some radios have special modes such as LR (Long Range) and RP (Repeater) that can help with tricky setups. Be sure to check your radio's quick guide or the PocketWizard Wiki for details.

===Important Notes===
*When using a MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 remote camera setup using default radio settings, a remote camera can only be triggered in single shot mode and there will be a delay between shots. When the camera's meter is "awake" and the internal LED is active, the receiving radio cannot listen for an incoming signal. For Canon cameras, the delay is typically 2-3 seconds before the meter sleeps. For Nikon cameras, you can adjust the length of the delay by going into the custom menu settings and changing the setting. It's called Auto Meter Off or Standby and the shortest delay is 4 seconds.

Continuous triggering with ControlTL radios is possible if the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 attached to the camera has either Disable Shoe Communications or [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] set via the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. Basic Trigger mode is the recommended setup for remote camera triggering with ControlTL radios. With this setting, the radios only need to send a simple "fire now!" signal, instead of having to send information about power levels and sync speed, which you don't need with a remote camera.

==Triggering a Remote Camera from a Handheld Camera==
The setup is very similar to the Basic Remote Camera setup but there are a couple important differences. When you are triggering from a handheld PocketWizard to a remote camera, the radio will send hundreds of packets of triggers through the air. When you have a PocketWizard in the hot shoe of your handheld camera, the camera thinks the radio is a flash. That means it won't send a signal until the handheld camera's shutter is tripped. It then sends a very quick pop (because the camera thinks it only needs to pop a flash) to the radio in its hot shoe. Because the radio is getting a very short signal, it only has enough time to send out one or two trigger packets. If the remote camera is not completely ready when its radio gets the trigger, it may not fire because it is still checking the settings and will miss the packet. Adding a remote camera cable to your transmitting radio and handheld camera usually solves this issue. This is just a quick overview but there are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

===Best Practices===
*Always make sure you have the most recent firmware in your radio.
*Use the PTMM adapter. This adapter connects to your remote camera cable and has a switch on it. When you turn the switch "on", it will pre trigger your remote camera and keep it in a pre triggered state, as though you were constantly half pressing the shutter button. Note: It will use more battery power than usual, as your camera is kept constantly awake.
*Use a cable on BOTH the handheld and remote camera. With this setup, if you are using Plus III radios, when you half press the shutter button of the camera in your hand, it will send a half press signal to the remote camera at the same time. This will pre trigger the camera so it responds faster when you take the photo. With any other radio, it will ensure that a signal is sent out to the remote radio. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)

===Important Notes===
*With most mirrorless cameras, when you set the camera to continuous high speed shooting, the hot shoe will be disabled. For that setup, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera as well as the remote camera because the handheld camera won't send a signal to the transmitting radio through the hot shoe. (note: continuous high speed shooting and silent shooting modes also usually disable the hot shoe)
*When you are shooting from a handheld camera to a remote camera, there will be a delay between shots. This is because the transmitting camera will not send the signal to the hot shoe until AFTER the shutter moves. Using a PTMM or cables on both cameras will help lessen (though not completely eliminate) this time difference because the remote camera will be at half press and ready to receive a signal.
*There are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

==Relay Mode==
Sometimes you want to use a flash with your remote camera, for situations like self portraits or maybe taking a photo of a bear at night in the wild. Relay mode allows you to trigger a remote camera and to have that remote camera trigger a remote flash.

For Relay, you need at least 3 PocketWizards. One to send the signal, one on the camera, then one attached to the flash. You will also need the appropriate remote camera cable. It seems logical to set the radios all to the same Channel but if you do that, you will find they will not sync properly. A flash only needs a quick "fire now!" signal to fire while a camera has to verify that the exposure is correct and that the focus is confirmed before it will shoot, even if both of those are set to manual. When you set everything to the same Channel, the flash will fire before the camera, resulting in a dark exposure.

When you use our Relay mode, you use 2 different Channels. Here's how Relay works:
#The PocketWizard in your hand sends out a signal on a specific Channel.
#The PocketWizard for the camera will receive that incoming signal and trigger the camera. The camera then sends a sync pulse through the hot shoe. (note: the PocketWizard MUST be in the camera's hot shoe)
#The PocketWizard on the camera senses the trigger from the camera's hot shoe and automatically sends out a new signal on a different Channel.
#The PocketWizard connected to the flash receives the signal on the secondary Channel and fires the flash.

For example, the transmitting radio will be set to Channel 1. The radio on the camera will be set to TxRx Channel 1 and receives on Channel 1. When it gets the trigger from the camera's hot shoe, it will automatically send out a new trigger on Channel 2. The radio connected to the flash should be set to Channel 2 to receive the signal.

Any PocketWizard Auto Sensing Transceiver will automatically send out a signal one Channel higher.
*A FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 will automatically send the signal one Channel higher but you can program the radios in the PocketWizard Utility to send out the Relayed signal on a different Channel if you wish to.
*With the MultiMAX, you can choose which Channel you use for the Relayed signal.

For more information, please see our [[Relay Mode]] page.

'''Note:''' If you are using a FlexTT5 or FlexTT6, you can use a flash in the receiving camera's hot shoe, simply set it to Master, just as you would if you were firing directly from the camera.

==Auto Focus vs Manual Focus==
We strongly suggest using Manual focus for remote cameras. A remote camera that is using AutoFocus but has not been pre-released (with a pre-trigger cable or a half-press from a Plus III) will still attempt to focus a remote camera before firing an exposure. Depending on the AF setting that you have chosen for your remote camera, the auto focus behavior will look a little different:

* When the camera is set to AF-S (Single), the camera will not release the shutter button until it can confirm the focus. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will attempt to autofocus before releasing the shutter button.
* When the camera is set to AF-C (Continuous), the focus is continuous up until the point of the full shutter release. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will first attempt to focus and will then fire regardless of focus confirmation.

In AF-S there is the possibility of missing shots, if focus cannot be confirmed, and in AF-C there is the possibility of getting an out-of-focus shot. These limitations are tied to the camera’s auto-focus system – you will see the same behavior with or without PocketWizard radios.

==Remote Camera Cables==

To trigger a remote camera, you will need at least one remote camera cable for your camera. A remote camera cable has a stereo 3.5mm (1/8") connection for the PocketWizard and the other end is specific to the camera's remote port connection.

The most common cables are:
*'''Canon CM-E3-ACC:''' this cable has a 2.5mm connection. It fits Canon cameras with the E3 connection. It also usually works with most other cameras that have a 2.5mm connection, such as Fuji or Olympus, or with any flashes with a 2.5mm sync port. (Note: the Panasonic cameras will not work with this cable. You would need to use the PAN-ACC cable.)
*'''Canon CM-N3-ACC:''' this cable has a 3 prong connection. It fits Canon cameras with the N3 connection.
*'''Nikon N-MCDC2-ACC:''' this cable has a rectangular 4 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MCDC2 connection.
*'''Nikon N10-ACC:''' this cable has the Nikon 10 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MC30/10 pin connection.
*'''S-VPR1-ACC:''' this cable has the Sony micro connection. It fits Sony cameras with the VPR1 / micro USB connection. Use with Plus III, Plus IV, and through the bottom -ACC port of MultiMAX radios. See IMPORTANT NOTES section below if you plan to trigger a remote camera from a handheld camera.
*'''13377-S:''' this cable is the same as the S-VPR1-ACC but wired differently inside. Use this cable with a remote PlusX radios or through the top port of MultiMAX radios. See IMPORTANT NOTES section below if you plan to trigger a remote camera from a handheld camera.

These cables are all stereo cables and are capable of pre triggering the camera from the test button if you are using a Plus IIIe radios, or by enabling or disabling a Zone if you are using MultiMAX radios. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware) MultiMAX radios with -ACC ports are also capable of pre triggering by activating Zones.

You can add the PTMM adapter to any of these cables to have pre-trigger constantly on, regardless of the PocketWizard radios you are using. By pre-triggering the radio, the remote camera will be kept in a state of half press so it will respond to the trigger faster. The PTMM has a switch built in and when the switch is engaged, the connected camera behaves as if its shutter button is held down half way. This lets the camera respond more quickly and consistently, but at the expense of battery life. Pre-release cables can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode.

'''IMPORTANT NOTES:'''
*As noted above, if you are triggering a remote camera while shooting from a handheld camera with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe, we suggest using cables on both cameras for best results. For most mirrorless cameras, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera and transmitting radio, as the camera's hot shoe might be disabled.
*SONY USERS: If you are triggering from a handheld camera with a PlusX radio to a remote camera, you MUST use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your transmitting PlusX. You should use the 13377-S with a remote PlusX for best results. If you use the S-VPR1-ACC cable with a remote PlusX and the camera goes to sleep, it will lock up the radio. You would need to do a power cycle on the camera or remote PlusX or remove the cable to reset it. If you can disable the sleep timer in your camera, you should be able to use the S-VPR1-ACC cable.
*If you have older radios, like the Plus II, Plus Receiver, or use the MultiMAX top port, that requires a mono connection. Add the PTMM or an MSMM adapter. The Plus IIIe, Plus IVe, and PlusX radios can all use either stereo or mono cables.
*If you are using MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and/or FlexTT6 radios for remote camera triggering, we strongly suggest using Basic Trigger mode for best results.

Misc Tab

2025-01-08T18:01:52Z

Heathers: /* Disable Shoe Communications (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only): */ added note about using disable shoe for flash sync connection

{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}

__TOC__

[[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]

====Basic Trigger====

Basic Trigger mode allows MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 radios to work as a transmitter with any camera that can trigger through the center pin contact, as long as the radio fits in the hot shoe. It also allows FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios to receive a trigger from radios using Standard Legacy Channels, like the Plus and MultiMAX radios. Basic Trigger does not use any of the radio's communication pins, and as such disables all TTL, HSS/FP-Sync and power-controlling operations of the radio. It uses only the center pin for communication. This setting is helpful for radios that are not TTL compatible with the ControlTL radios as transmitters, like mirrorless cameras or brands such as Fuji or Olympus.

To enable Basic Trigger mode:
#Open PocketWizard Utility and connect your radio.
#When the Utility recognizes your radio, click the Misc tab
#Check the "Basic Trigger" box, then click on "Apply Changes".
#Once the radio has reset, you can disconnect it and take pictures.

Special Notes:

* When set to Basic Trigger mode, your radio will ONLY transmit and receive on Standard Legacy Channels. If you set your transmitting radio to Basic Trigger and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger as well. If you are using a Standard Channel radio (like a Plus or MultiMAX) as the transmitter and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger,
* Basic Trigger mode is not available with E Release firmware.
* A transmitting radio set to Basic Trigger uses the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. If you are having trouble with transmitter in Basic Trigger mode, please see the [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=The_FAQ#My_PocketWizards_aren.27t_working_on_my_new_camera.21 FAQ Wiki page] for details, as your hot shoe might be disabled.
* Basic Trigger mode is also very helpful if you want to use the ControlTL radios for triggering a remote camera, without flash sync. it will speed up communications. You can also select "Disable shoe Communications" for your receiving radio if you do not want to use it in the remote camera's hot shoe.
* This setting does not need to match across all radios in use - it needs only be used when connected to a non-compatible camera or flash. For example, transmitting MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 transmitting on both ControlTL and Standard Channels can be used to trigger a remote FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 in Basic Trigger Mode (receiving on a Standard Channel).
* Due to the manufacturer-specific layout of the pins on the bottom shoe, the MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 are not guaranteed to slide onto every camera's hot shoe. Do not force the units onto your camera. Slide gently.
* In Basic Trigger Mode, you get basic remote triggering on PocketWizard Standard Channels. This works with all PocketWizard radios including the Plus series, MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, and devices with PocketWizard radios built-in.
* HyperSync, High Speed Sync (FP Flash), or ControlTL functionality are not available on any channel when using this mode on a transmitting radio. A remote radio set to Basic Trigger Mode can still be used for [[HyperSync]] operation, when Standard Channels are configured on the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the transmitting radio.
* This mode will reduce battery life with the MiniTT1. Normally the MiniTT1 sleeps when the camera sleeps based on data it receives from the camera on the E-TTL / i-TTL communication pins. Since those pins are deactivated in this mode, the MiniTT1 never sleeps.
* The fastest usable shutter speed for flash (X-Sync) may be affected. This mode takes ~900 microseconds (1/1111 of a second) from the time X-sync is received until the remote flash begins generating light (radio propagation delay). Some cameras and flash combinations will tolerate this delay and achieve X-sync normally. Some will not. On those cameras that will not, you may need to reduce your shutter speed to something slower than X-sync to eliminate black lines in your images. Shortening your flash duration may also help.
* A hot shoe flash or Speedlite in the top shoe of a radio in this mode will only trigger in manual mode.

====Transmitter Only (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Allows the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to be used as a Transmitter only, just like the MiniTT1. This mode allows a photographer to work in the same area as other photographers, and share remote flashes, without the flash on top of the FlexTT5 being triggered by the other photographers. When this mode is engaged, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 will not respond to any triggers from another MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 acting as a Transmitter.

====Disable Shoe Communications (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Check this box to turn off the bottom shoe on a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6. This is useful for remote cameras where you want to deploy the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 radio in the shoe, but do not want the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to act as an Auto-Relay transmitter. If you do not want to use the remote radio in the camera's hot shoe, you must select this option. This is also necessary if you are using a sync cable and connecting the remote flash through the P2 sync port, instead of using the hot shoe connection.

'''Note:''' This control also disables triggering from the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 top-shoe and P2 port. A speedlight connected to a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 with disabled shoe communications will not fire.

====SpeedCycler:====
This mode is designed to rapidly cycle through multiple flash units fired individually in sequence. This allows you to fire a camera in sync with flashes faster than a single flash can recycle. It can also be used for triggering remote cameras sequentially. [[SpeedCycler]] is engaged on a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 via this checkbox.
[[SpeedCycler]] mode requires an [[AC3 ZoneController]] in the top shoe of the on-camera PocketWizard radio. Zones A, B, and C will be triggered sequentially and individual zones can be disabled by setting the AC3’s Zone Switch to the off position. Both TTL and manual flash are supported. Setting flash power manually will trigger faster. Receiving [[MultiMAX]]es or [[Plus III]]s can be used instead of FlexTT5s provided a Standard Channel between 17 and 32 is in use. Make sure to set the Standard Transmit Channel on your transmitting ControlTL radio to match the receiving MultiMAX's or Plus III's. The MultiMAX's and Plus III's A, B, and C Zones correspond to the AC3's Zones.

Read more about this feature on our [[SpeedCycler]] page.

====Top Shoe Detection Mode (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Set this control to AC3/AC9 if an [[AC3 ZoneController]] or [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]] will be connected to the top shoe of this radio. Set it to [http://www.nissindigital.com/top.html Nissin Flash] to use this radio with a Nissin Di866 or Di622 for Canon.

Read more about [[Canon_Compatibility#Nissin|Nissin Flash compatibility here]].

====Canon Camera Model (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Your radio always uses the first trigger of a session as a calibration shot. Some cameras have special considerations that can be accounted for by selecting the Camera Model via this setting. For optimal performance, we recommend selecting your specific camera model. This setting only affects radios configured to transmit when connected to a compatible camera.

====Ranger RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Ranger RX series pack.

====Digital 1200/2400RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Digital RX series pack.

====Flash Model====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to determine what kind of Elinchrom monobloc or flash pack you are using with your PowerST4.

Misc Tab

2025-01-08T17:55:31Z

Heathers: /* SpeedCycler: */ removed and extra space

{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}

__TOC__

[[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]

====Basic Trigger====

Basic Trigger mode allows MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 radios to work as a transmitter with any camera that can trigger through the center pin contact, as long as the radio fits in the hot shoe. It also allows FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios to receive a trigger from radios using Standard Legacy Channels, like the Plus and MultiMAX radios. Basic Trigger does not use any of the radio's communication pins, and as such disables all TTL, HSS/FP-Sync and power-controlling operations of the radio. It uses only the center pin for communication. This setting is helpful for radios that are not TTL compatible with the ControlTL radios as transmitters, like mirrorless cameras or brands such as Fuji or Olympus.

To enable Basic Trigger mode:
#Open PocketWizard Utility and connect your radio.
#When the Utility recognizes your radio, click the Misc tab
#Check the "Basic Trigger" box, then click on "Apply Changes".
#Once the radio has reset, you can disconnect it and take pictures.

Special Notes:

* When set to Basic Trigger mode, your radio will ONLY transmit and receive on Standard Legacy Channels. If you set your transmitting radio to Basic Trigger and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger as well. If you are using a Standard Channel radio (like a Plus or MultiMAX) as the transmitter and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger,
* Basic Trigger mode is not available with E Release firmware.
* A transmitting radio set to Basic Trigger uses the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. If you are having trouble with transmitter in Basic Trigger mode, please see the [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=The_FAQ#My_PocketWizards_aren.27t_working_on_my_new_camera.21 FAQ Wiki page] for details, as your hot shoe might be disabled.
* Basic Trigger mode is also very helpful if you want to use the ControlTL radios for triggering a remote camera, without flash sync. it will speed up communications. You can also select "Disable shoe Communications" for your receiving radio if you do not want to use it in the remote camera's hot shoe.
* This setting does not need to match across all radios in use - it needs only be used when connected to a non-compatible camera or flash. For example, transmitting MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 transmitting on both ControlTL and Standard Channels can be used to trigger a remote FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 in Basic Trigger Mode (receiving on a Standard Channel).
* Due to the manufacturer-specific layout of the pins on the bottom shoe, the MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 are not guaranteed to slide onto every camera's hot shoe. Do not force the units onto your camera. Slide gently.
* In Basic Trigger Mode, you get basic remote triggering on PocketWizard Standard Channels. This works with all PocketWizard radios including the Plus series, MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, and devices with PocketWizard radios built-in.
* HyperSync, High Speed Sync (FP Flash), or ControlTL functionality are not available on any channel when using this mode on a transmitting radio. A remote radio set to Basic Trigger Mode can still be used for [[HyperSync]] operation, when Standard Channels are configured on the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the transmitting radio.
* This mode will reduce battery life with the MiniTT1. Normally the MiniTT1 sleeps when the camera sleeps based on data it receives from the camera on the E-TTL / i-TTL communication pins. Since those pins are deactivated in this mode, the MiniTT1 never sleeps.
* The fastest usable shutter speed for flash (X-Sync) may be affected. This mode takes ~900 microseconds (1/1111 of a second) from the time X-sync is received until the remote flash begins generating light (radio propagation delay). Some cameras and flash combinations will tolerate this delay and achieve X-sync normally. Some will not. On those cameras that will not, you may need to reduce your shutter speed to something slower than X-sync to eliminate black lines in your images. Shortening your flash duration may also help.
* A hot shoe flash or Speedlite in the top shoe of a radio in this mode will only trigger in manual mode.

====Transmitter Only (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Allows the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to be used as a Transmitter only, just like the MiniTT1. This mode allows a photographer to work in the same area as other photographers, and share remote flashes, without the flash on top of the FlexTT5 being triggered by the other photographers. When this mode is engaged, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 will not respond to any triggers from another MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 acting as a Transmitter.

====Disable Shoe Communications (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Check this box to turn off the bottom shoe on a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6. This is useful for remote cameras where you want to deploy the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 radio in the shoe, but do not want the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to act as an Auto-Relay transmitter. If you do not want to use the remote radio in the camera's hot shoe, you must select this option.

'''Note:''' This control also disables triggering from the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 top-shoe and P2 port. A speedlight connected to a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 with disabled shoe communications will not fire.

====SpeedCycler:====
This mode is designed to rapidly cycle through multiple flash units fired individually in sequence. This allows you to fire a camera in sync with flashes faster than a single flash can recycle. It can also be used for triggering remote cameras sequentially. [[SpeedCycler]] is engaged on a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 via this checkbox.
[[SpeedCycler]] mode requires an [[AC3 ZoneController]] in the top shoe of the on-camera PocketWizard radio. Zones A, B, and C will be triggered sequentially and individual zones can be disabled by setting the AC3’s Zone Switch to the off position. Both TTL and manual flash are supported. Setting flash power manually will trigger faster. Receiving [[MultiMAX]]es or [[Plus III]]s can be used instead of FlexTT5s provided a Standard Channel between 17 and 32 is in use. Make sure to set the Standard Transmit Channel on your transmitting ControlTL radio to match the receiving MultiMAX's or Plus III's. The MultiMAX's and Plus III's A, B, and C Zones correspond to the AC3's Zones.

Read more about this feature on our [[SpeedCycler]] page.

====Top Shoe Detection Mode (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Set this control to AC3/AC9 if an [[AC3 ZoneController]] or [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]] will be connected to the top shoe of this radio. Set it to [http://www.nissindigital.com/top.html Nissin Flash] to use this radio with a Nissin Di866 or Di622 for Canon.

Read more about [[Canon_Compatibility#Nissin|Nissin Flash compatibility here]].

====Canon Camera Model (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Your radio always uses the first trigger of a session as a calibration shot. Some cameras have special considerations that can be accounted for by selecting the Camera Model via this setting. For optimal performance, we recommend selecting your specific camera model. This setting only affects radios configured to transmit when connected to a compatible camera.

====Ranger RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Ranger RX series pack.

====Digital 1200/2400RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Digital RX series pack.

====Flash Model====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to determine what kind of Elinchrom monobloc or flash pack you are using with your PowerST4.

Misc Tab

2025-01-08T17:52:31Z

Heathers: /* Disable Shoe Communications (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only): */

{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}

__TOC__

[[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]

====Basic Trigger====

Basic Trigger mode allows MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 radios to work as a transmitter with any camera that can trigger through the center pin contact, as long as the radio fits in the hot shoe. It also allows FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios to receive a trigger from radios using Standard Legacy Channels, like the Plus and MultiMAX radios. Basic Trigger does not use any of the radio's communication pins, and as such disables all TTL, HSS/FP-Sync and power-controlling operations of the radio. It uses only the center pin for communication. This setting is helpful for radios that are not TTL compatible with the ControlTL radios as transmitters, like mirrorless cameras or brands such as Fuji or Olympus.

To enable Basic Trigger mode:
#Open PocketWizard Utility and connect your radio.
#When the Utility recognizes your radio, click the Misc tab
#Check the "Basic Trigger" box, then click on "Apply Changes".
#Once the radio has reset, you can disconnect it and take pictures.

Special Notes:

* When set to Basic Trigger mode, your radio will ONLY transmit and receive on Standard Legacy Channels. If you set your transmitting radio to Basic Trigger and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger as well. If you are using a Standard Channel radio (like a Plus or MultiMAX) as the transmitter and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger,
* Basic Trigger mode is not available with E Release firmware.
* A transmitting radio set to Basic Trigger uses the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. If you are having trouble with transmitter in Basic Trigger mode, please see the [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=The_FAQ#My_PocketWizards_aren.27t_working_on_my_new_camera.21 FAQ Wiki page] for details, as your hot shoe might be disabled.
* Basic Trigger mode is also very helpful if you want to use the ControlTL radios for triggering a remote camera, without flash sync. it will speed up communications. You can also select "Disable shoe Communications" for your receiving radio if you do not want to use it in the remote camera's hot shoe.
* This setting does not need to match across all radios in use - it needs only be used when connected to a non-compatible camera or flash. For example, transmitting MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 transmitting on both ControlTL and Standard Channels can be used to trigger a remote FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 in Basic Trigger Mode (receiving on a Standard Channel).
* Due to the manufacturer-specific layout of the pins on the bottom shoe, the MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 are not guaranteed to slide onto every camera's hot shoe. Do not force the units onto your camera. Slide gently.
* In Basic Trigger Mode, you get basic remote triggering on PocketWizard Standard Channels. This works with all PocketWizard radios including the Plus series, MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, and devices with PocketWizard radios built-in.
* HyperSync, High Speed Sync (FP Flash), or ControlTL functionality are not available on any channel when using this mode on a transmitting radio. A remote radio set to Basic Trigger Mode can still be used for [[HyperSync]] operation, when Standard Channels are configured on the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the transmitting radio.
* This mode will reduce battery life with the MiniTT1. Normally the MiniTT1 sleeps when the camera sleeps based on data it receives from the camera on the E-TTL / i-TTL communication pins. Since those pins are deactivated in this mode, the MiniTT1 never sleeps.
* The fastest usable shutter speed for flash (X-Sync) may be affected. This mode takes ~900 microseconds (1/1111 of a second) from the time X-sync is received until the remote flash begins generating light (radio propagation delay). Some cameras and flash combinations will tolerate this delay and achieve X-sync normally. Some will not. On those cameras that will not, you may need to reduce your shutter speed to something slower than X-sync to eliminate black lines in your images. Shortening your flash duration may also help.
* A hot shoe flash or Speedlite in the top shoe of a radio in this mode will only trigger in manual mode.

====Transmitter Only (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Allows the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to be used as a Transmitter only, just like the MiniTT1. This mode allows a photographer to work in the same area as other photographers, and share remote flashes, without the flash on top of the FlexTT5 being triggered by the other photographers. When this mode is engaged, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 will not respond to any triggers from another MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 acting as a Transmitter.

====Disable Shoe Communications (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Check this box to turn off the bottom shoe on a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6. This is useful for remote cameras where you want to deploy the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 radio in the shoe, but do not want the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to act as an Auto-Relay transmitter. If you do not want to use the remote radio in the camera's hot shoe, you must select this option.

'''Note:''' This control also disables triggering from the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 top-shoe and P2 port. A speedlight connected to a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 with disabled shoe communications will not fire.

====SpeedCycler:====
This mode is designed to rapidly cycle through multiple flash units fired individually in sequence. This allows you to fire a camera in sync with flashes faster than a single flash can recycle. It can also be used for triggering remote cameras sequentially. [[SpeedCycler]] is engaged on a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 via this checkbox.
[[SpeedCycler]] mode requires an [[AC3 ZoneController]] in the top shoe of the on-camera PocketWizard radio. Zones A, B, and C will be triggered sequentially and individual zones can be disabled by setting the AC3’s Zone Switch to the off position. Both TTL and manual flash are supported. Setting flash power manually will trigger faster. Receiving [[MultiMAX]]es or [[Plus III]]s can be used instead of FlexTT5s provided a Standard Channel between 17 and 32 is in use. Make sure to set the Standard Transmit Channel on your transmitting ControlTL radio to match the receiving MultiMAX's or Plus III's. The MultiMAX's and Plus III's A, B, and C Zones correspond to the AC3's Zones.

Read more about this feature on our [[SpeedCycler]] page.

====Top Shoe Detection Mode (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Set this control to AC3/AC9 if an [[AC3 ZoneController]] or [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]] will be connected to the top shoe of this radio. Set it to [http://www.nissindigital.com/top.html Nissin Flash] to use this radio with a Nissin Di866 or Di622 for Canon.

Read more about [[Canon_Compatibility#Nissin|Nissin Flash compatibility here]].

====Canon Camera Model (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Your radio always uses the first trigger of a session as a calibration shot. Some cameras have special considerations that can be accounted for by selecting the Camera Model via this setting. For optimal performance, we recommend selecting your specific camera model. This setting only affects radios configured to transmit when connected to a compatible camera.

====Ranger RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Ranger RX series pack.

====Digital 1200/2400RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Digital RX series pack.

====Flash Model====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to determine what kind of Elinchrom monobloc or flash pack you are using with your PowerST4.

Misc Tab

2025-01-08T17:50:46Z

Heathers: /* Basic Trigger */ added note about remote camera triggering

{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}

__TOC__

[[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]

====Basic Trigger====

Basic Trigger mode allows MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 radios to work as a transmitter with any camera that can trigger through the center pin contact, as long as the radio fits in the hot shoe. It also allows FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios to receive a trigger from radios using Standard Legacy Channels, like the Plus and MultiMAX radios. Basic Trigger does not use any of the radio's communication pins, and as such disables all TTL, HSS/FP-Sync and power-controlling operations of the radio. It uses only the center pin for communication. This setting is helpful for radios that are not TTL compatible with the ControlTL radios as transmitters, like mirrorless cameras or brands such as Fuji or Olympus.

To enable Basic Trigger mode:
#Open PocketWizard Utility and connect your radio.
#When the Utility recognizes your radio, click the Misc tab
#Check the "Basic Trigger" box, then click on "Apply Changes".
#Once the radio has reset, you can disconnect it and take pictures.

Special Notes:

* When set to Basic Trigger mode, your radio will ONLY transmit and receive on Standard Legacy Channels. If you set your transmitting radio to Basic Trigger and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger as well. If you are using a Standard Channel radio (like a Plus or MultiMAX) as the transmitter and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger,
* Basic Trigger mode is not available with E Release firmware.
* A transmitting radio set to Basic Trigger uses the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. If you are having trouble with transmitter in Basic Trigger mode, please see the [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=The_FAQ#My_PocketWizards_aren.27t_working_on_my_new_camera.21 FAQ Wiki page] for details, as your hot shoe might be disabled.
* Basic Trigger mode is also very helpful if you want to use the ControlTL radios for triggering a remote camera, without flash sync. it will speed up communications. You can also select "Disable shoe Communications" for your receiving radio if you do not want to use it in the remote camera's hot shoe.
* This setting does not need to match across all radios in use - it needs only be used when connected to a non-compatible camera or flash. For example, transmitting MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 transmitting on both ControlTL and Standard Channels can be used to trigger a remote FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 in Basic Trigger Mode (receiving on a Standard Channel).
* Due to the manufacturer-specific layout of the pins on the bottom shoe, the MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 are not guaranteed to slide onto every camera's hot shoe. Do not force the units onto your camera. Slide gently.
* In Basic Trigger Mode, you get basic remote triggering on PocketWizard Standard Channels. This works with all PocketWizard radios including the Plus series, MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, and devices with PocketWizard radios built-in.
* HyperSync, High Speed Sync (FP Flash), or ControlTL functionality are not available on any channel when using this mode on a transmitting radio. A remote radio set to Basic Trigger Mode can still be used for [[HyperSync]] operation, when Standard Channels are configured on the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the transmitting radio.
* This mode will reduce battery life with the MiniTT1. Normally the MiniTT1 sleeps when the camera sleeps based on data it receives from the camera on the E-TTL / i-TTL communication pins. Since those pins are deactivated in this mode, the MiniTT1 never sleeps.
* The fastest usable shutter speed for flash (X-Sync) may be affected. This mode takes ~900 microseconds (1/1111 of a second) from the time X-sync is received until the remote flash begins generating light (radio propagation delay). Some cameras and flash combinations will tolerate this delay and achieve X-sync normally. Some will not. On those cameras that will not, you may need to reduce your shutter speed to something slower than X-sync to eliminate black lines in your images. Shortening your flash duration may also help.
* A hot shoe flash or Speedlite in the top shoe of a radio in this mode will only trigger in manual mode.

====Transmitter Only (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Allows the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to be used as a Transmitter only, just like the MiniTT1. This mode allows a photographer to work in the same area as other photographers, and share remote flashes, without the flash on top of the FlexTT5 being triggered by the other photographers. When this mode is engaged, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 will not respond to any triggers from another MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 acting as a Transmitter.

====Disable Shoe Communications (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Check this box to turn off the bottom shoe on a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6. This is useful for remote cameras where you want to deploy the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 radio in the shoe, but do not want the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to act as an Auto-Relay transmitter.

'''Note:''' This control also disables triggering from the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 top-shoe and P2 port. A speedlight connected to a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 with disabled shoe communications will not fire.

====SpeedCycler:====
This mode is designed to rapidly cycle through multiple flash units fired individually in sequence. This allows you to fire a camera in sync with flashes faster than a single flash can recycle. It can also be used for triggering remote cameras sequentially. [[SpeedCycler]] is engaged on a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 via this checkbox.
[[SpeedCycler]] mode requires an [[AC3 ZoneController]] in the top shoe of the on-camera PocketWizard radio. Zones A, B, and C will be triggered sequentially and individual zones can be disabled by setting the AC3’s Zone Switch to the off position. Both TTL and manual flash are supported. Setting flash power manually will trigger faster. Receiving [[MultiMAX]]es or [[Plus III]]s can be used instead of FlexTT5s provided a Standard Channel between 17 and 32 is in use. Make sure to set the Standard Transmit Channel on your transmitting ControlTL radio to match the receiving MultiMAX's or Plus III's. The MultiMAX's and Plus III's A, B, and C Zones correspond to the AC3's Zones.

Read more about this feature on our [[SpeedCycler]] page.

====Top Shoe Detection Mode (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Set this control to AC3/AC9 if an [[AC3 ZoneController]] or [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]] will be connected to the top shoe of this radio. Set it to [http://www.nissindigital.com/top.html Nissin Flash] to use this radio with a Nissin Di866 or Di622 for Canon.

Read more about [[Canon_Compatibility#Nissin|Nissin Flash compatibility here]].

====Canon Camera Model (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Your radio always uses the first trigger of a session as a calibration shot. Some cameras have special considerations that can be accounted for by selecting the Camera Model via this setting. For optimal performance, we recommend selecting your specific camera model. This setting only affects radios configured to transmit when connected to a compatible camera.

====Ranger RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Ranger RX series pack.

====Digital 1200/2400RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Digital RX series pack.

====Flash Model====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to determine what kind of Elinchrom monobloc or flash pack you are using with your PowerST4.

Misc Tab

2025-01-08T17:47:07Z

Heathers: /* Basic Trigger */ added explanation of how to do it and changed a lot of wording

{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}

__TOC__

[[File:Misc.jpg|500px|center|Misc Tab]]

====Basic Trigger====

Basic Trigger mode allows MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 radios to work as a transmitter with any camera that can trigger through the center pin contact, as long as the radio fits in the hot shoe. It also allows FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios to receive a trigger from radios using Standard Legacy Channels, like the Plus and MultiMAX radios. Basic Trigger does not use any of the radio's communication pins, and as such disables all TTL, HSS/FP-Sync and power-controlling operations of the radio. It uses only the center pin for communication. This setting is helpful for radios that are not TTL compatible with the ControlTL radios as transmitters, like mirrorless cameras or brands such as Fuji or Olympus.

To enable Basic Trigger mode:
#Open PocketWizard Utility and connect your radio.
#When the Utility recognizes your radio, click the Misc tab
#Check the "Basic Trigger" box, then click on "Apply Changes".
#Once the radio has reset, you can disconnect it and take pictures.

Special Notes:

* When set to Basic Trigger mode, your radio will ONLY transmit and receive on Standard Legacy Channels. If you set your transmitting radio to Basic Trigger and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger as well. If you are using a Standard Channel radio (like a Plus or MultiMAX) as the transmitter and are using FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios as receivers, you will need to set the remotes to Basic Trigger,
* Basic Trigger mode is not available with E Release firmware.
* A transmitting radio set to Basic Trigger uses the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. If you are having trouble with transmitter in Basic Trigger mode, please see the [https://wiki.pocketwizard.com/index.php?title=The_FAQ#My_PocketWizards_aren.27t_working_on_my_new_camera.21 FAQ Wiki page] for details, as your hot shoe might be disabled.
* This setting does not need to match across all radios in use - it needs only be used when connected to a non-compatible camera or flash. For example, transmitting MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 transmitting on both ControlTL and Standard Channels can be used to trigger a remote FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 in Basic Trigger Mode (receiving on a Standard Channel).
* Due to the manufacturer-specific layout of the pins on the bottom shoe, the MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 are not guaranteed to slide onto every camera's hot shoe. Do not force the units onto your camera. Slide gently.
* In Basic Trigger Mode, you get basic remote triggering on PocketWizard Standard Channels. This works with all PocketWizard radios including the Plus series, MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, and devices with PocketWizard radios built-in.
* HyperSync, High Speed Sync (FP Flash), or ControlTL functionality are not available on any channel when using this mode on a transmitting radio. A remote radio set to Basic Trigger Mode can still be used for [[HyperSync]] operation, when Standard Channels are configured on the [[HyperSync/HSS Tab]] of the transmitting radio.
* This mode will reduce battery life with the MiniTT1. Normally the MiniTT1 sleeps when the camera sleeps based on data it receives from the camera on the E-TTL / i-TTL communication pins. Since those pins are deactivated in this mode, the MiniTT1 never sleeps.
* The fastest usable shutter speed for flash (X-Sync) may be affected. This mode takes ~900 microseconds (1/1111 of a second) from the time X-sync is received until the remote flash begins generating light (radio propagation delay). Some cameras and flash combinations will tolerate this delay and achieve X-sync normally. Some will not. On those cameras that will not, you may need to reduce your shutter speed to something slower than X-sync to eliminate black lines in your images. Shortening your flash duration may also help.
* A hot shoe flash or Speedlite in the top shoe of a radio in this mode will only trigger in manual mode.

====Transmitter Only (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Allows the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to be used as a Transmitter only, just like the MiniTT1. This mode allows a photographer to work in the same area as other photographers, and share remote flashes, without the flash on top of the FlexTT5 being triggered by the other photographers. When this mode is engaged, the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 will not respond to any triggers from another MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 acting as a Transmitter.

====Disable Shoe Communications (FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Only):====
Check this box to turn off the bottom shoe on a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6. This is useful for remote cameras where you want to deploy the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 radio in the shoe, but do not want the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 to act as an Auto-Relay transmitter.

'''Note:''' This control also disables triggering from the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 top-shoe and P2 port. A speedlight connected to a FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 with disabled shoe communications will not fire.

====SpeedCycler:====
This mode is designed to rapidly cycle through multiple flash units fired individually in sequence. This allows you to fire a camera in sync with flashes faster than a single flash can recycle. It can also be used for triggering remote cameras sequentially. [[SpeedCycler]] is engaged on a transmitting MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 via this checkbox.
[[SpeedCycler]] mode requires an [[AC3 ZoneController]] in the top shoe of the on-camera PocketWizard radio. Zones A, B, and C will be triggered sequentially and individual zones can be disabled by setting the AC3’s Zone Switch to the off position. Both TTL and manual flash are supported. Setting flash power manually will trigger faster. Receiving [[MultiMAX]]es or [[Plus III]]s can be used instead of FlexTT5s provided a Standard Channel between 17 and 32 is in use. Make sure to set the Standard Transmit Channel on your transmitting ControlTL radio to match the receiving MultiMAX's or Plus III's. The MultiMAX's and Plus III's A, B, and C Zones correspond to the AC3's Zones.

Read more about this feature on our [[SpeedCycler]] page.

====Top Shoe Detection Mode (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Set this control to AC3/AC9 if an [[AC3 ZoneController]] or [[AC9 AlienBees Adapter]] will be connected to the top shoe of this radio. Set it to [http://www.nissindigital.com/top.html Nissin Flash] to use this radio with a Nissin Di866 or Di622 for Canon.

Read more about [[Canon_Compatibility#Nissin|Nissin Flash compatibility here]].

====Canon Camera Model (Canon Only):====
{{canononly}}

Your radio always uses the first trigger of a session as a calibration shot. Some cameras have special considerations that can be accounted for by selecting the Camera Model via this setting. For optimal performance, we recommend selecting your specific camera model. This setting only affects radios configured to transmit when connected to a compatible camera.

====Ranger RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Ranger RX series pack.

====Digital 1200/2400RX Head Selection====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to select the flash head in use with your Digital RX series pack.

====Flash Model====
([[PowerST4]]) Only

Use this setting to determine what kind of Elinchrom monobloc or flash pack you are using with your PowerST4.

Raven

2024-12-30T04:18:16Z

Heathers: small tweaks for clarity

[[File:raven.png|right|400px|MultiMAX]]
The Raven by Fusion TLC (our partner company) is a revolutionary new universal lighting and camera trigger that uses the new PocketWizard E Release protocol. Using a Raven on your camera, the unit will pair perfectly with your PocketWizard radios. You can also add new products to your system as the Raven is also designed to work with Paul C Buff, Profoto, and Godox flashes. This groundbreaking new product will let you trigger 2 different systems at the same time, while keeping all of the features that are available for both brands. The Raven takes the features of the FlexTT5 and AC3, plus special timing functions from our legendary flagship MultiMAX radios, then adds some groundbreaking new features, and combines them all into one easy to use unit. '''[https://pocketwizard.com/products-radios-raven/ Learn more]'''

==Compatibility==

The Raven is compatible with several different manufacturers. This wiki page will primarily include information about using the Raven with PocketWizard radios.

===PocketWizard===
The Raven can communicate with any PocketWizard that uses the E Release technology. It is compatible with the PlusXe, Plus IIIe, Plus IVe, FlexTT5, FlexTT6, and PowerMC2 radios. If your PocketWizard radios have not been upgraded to the E Release, you can learn more about it [http://www2.pocketwizard.com/erelease here].

===Other Manufacturers===
The Raven can trigger 2 different brands of remotes at the same time. It is currently compatible with PocketWizard, Paul C Buff, Profoto, and Godox. Other manufacturers are in the works. For more detailed compatibility with other brands, please visit the [https://fusiontlc.com/pages/camera-and-flash-compatibilities Fusion TLC compatibility] page.

==Basic Setup with PocketWizard Radios==

Before using a PocketWizard radio with your Raven, there are a few things to set up.
#Ensure that both your PocketWizard radios and the Raven have the most updated firmware version.
#Verify that the Raven is set to trigger a PocketWizard radio. From the Raven's main screen (Zone Selection Display), swipe from top down.
#Rotate the dial to the Brand icon and tap on it.
#Scroll through the first column until you see PocketWizard then press the check mark.
#Press the Back/home button to return to the main screen.

===Basic Manual Flash Setup===

#Connect a PocketWizard to a remote flash via the sync port. (if you are using a Plus IVe, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6, slide the speedlight into the hot shoe)
#Turn on the flash then turn on the PocketWizard. Set the flash to manual.
#Slide the Raven into your camera's hot shoe. Turn on the Raven, then the camera.
#Ensure the Zone you are using on the remote PocketWizard is set to manual on the Raven.
#Press the test button on the Raven to trigger the remote flash.
#Take photos normally. Adjust the flash power on the flashes themselves as needed.

For more details, please see the [https://fusiontlc.com/pages/setting-up-pocketwizard-radios-to-the-raven-for-lighting Fusion TLC Setting up PocketWizard radios] page.

===Basic TTL Flash Setup===

#Connect a PocketWizard FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 to a remote speedlight. (note: check the [[Canon]] or [[Nikon]] Wiki pages for compatibility if needed)
#Turn on the flash and set it to TTL. Do not use remote or slave. Turn on the PocketWizard. You should see a confirmation pop after a couple seconds.
#Slide the Raven into your camera's hot shoe. Turn on the Raven, then the camera.
#Ensure the Zone you are using on the remote PocketWizard is set to TTL on the Raven.
#Press the test button on the Raven to trigger the remote flash.
#Take photos normally.

For more details, please see the [https://fusiontlc.com/pages/setting-up-pocketwizard-radios-to-the-raven-for-lighting Fusion TLC Setting up PocketWizard radios] page.

===Basic Remote Camera Triggering===

#Connect a PocketWizard Plus IIIe or Plus IVe to the remote camera cable and connect the other end of the cable to your camera's remote port.
#Turn on the PocketWizard then turn on the remote camera. Change the PocketWizard's setting to either LR or Rx LR.
#Slide the Raven into your camera's hot shoe. Turn on the Raven, then the camera.
#Swipe right to left on the Raven. This brings you to the camera triggering screen. Tap the Master icon.
#Tap on the Zone you want to use so it is highlighted.
#Tap on the PING icon, you should see a green circle around the Zone you chose.
#Take pictures normally.

For more details, please see the [https://fusiontlc.com/pages/setting-up-raven-remote-camera-triggering Fusion TLC Remote Camera Triggering] page.

PlusX

2024-12-30T03:18:53Z

Heathers: /* PlusX Basics */ separated flash sync into its own section

[[File:PlusX SHP w-Glow 300dpi.jpg|right|250px|The PlusX Tranceiver]]
The PlusX is a radio transceiver, capable of acting as a transmitter or receiver for triggering remote flashes and cameras. To use the PlusX, at least one other PocketWizard radio is required. With the proper [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ cable], it can be connected to virtually any remote flash or camera.

Much like its predecessors, the Plus II and Plus III, the PlusX is a manual flash trigger and is compatible with all PocketWizard radios on the same frequency. It can trigger a remote flash up to the camera's X-sync but is not capable of TTL metering, power control, or High Speed Sync. The PlusX uses Legacy firmware while the PlusXe uses either E Release or Legacy firmware.

==Introducing the PlusXe!==
{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
| '''BREAKING NEWS!''' As of September 2024, the PlusXe joined our line of E Release firmware products!
|}

The PlusXe works exactly the same as the PlusX EXCEPT that it uses our E Release firmware protocol. That means you can use it with any other PocketWizards that use the E Release, like a Plus IIIe or PowerMC2e, as well as the Raven from Fusion TLC.

If you would like to use the Legacy firmware instead, to work with your existing PocketWizard radios, you can easily change the firmware protocol. And then switch back to the E Release any time you want.

To change firmware protocol:
#Turn on the PlusXe
#Set the dial to Channel 4 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 3 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 2 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 1 and press Test
#Turn the PlusXe off then on again and the firmware will be set.

Do you already have PlusX radios but would love to upgrade to the E Release? You can send your radios in and we can upgrade them for you! [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ Send us an email] and we can walk you through the steps to purchase the licenses for upgrades and send in the radios.

All of the following information in this Wiki page as well as the PlusX quick guide applies to both the PlusXe and PlusX radios.

==PlusX Basics==
===Connecting===
[[File:PlusX Connecting Hot Shoe.jpg|right|300px]]
[[File:PlusX Connecting Sync Cable.jpg|right|300px]]
The PlusX can be connected to your camera in two different ways, either through the top shoe of the camera or with a sync cable.

'''Top Shoe:''' Slide the PlusX into the top shoe of the camera and secure it using the locking ring. Make sure to orient the antenna to the back of the camera while placing the radio into the hot shoe. Also be sure your hot shoe is active. There are some [[The FAQ#My PocketWizards aren't working on my new camera!|settings]] that automatically disable the hot shoe with mirrorless cameras.

'''Sync Cable:''' If you are using a camera with no hot shoe, the hot shoe cannot be used, or you are remotely triggering your camera, connect the transmitting PlusX’s Flash/Camera Port to the camera’s sync terminal.

'''Flash Sync Connection:''' The PlusX can also be connected to almost any flash using the appropriate sync cable. Visit the PocketWizard [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] to find the correct cable for your camera or flash.

===Powering On/Off===
Locate the switch on the left hand side of the radio (with the channel selector facing you). When the switch is down the unit is off and when in the up position it is on.

*If the radio is using Legacy firmware, you will see one bold '''green''' blink on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

*If the radio is using the E Release firmware, you will see a '''red''' '''green''' '''red''' '''green''' blink pattern on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

===Channels===
To change the channel on your radio simply turn the Channel Selector to find your desired channel. Turning the Channel Selector clockwise will change the channel in ascending order, turning it counter-clockwise will change the channel in descending order. When selecting your channel, make sure that the dial fully clicks into place otherwise you may not be transmitting/receiving on the correct channel.

Note: All radios MUST be on the same channel to properly trigger remote flashes or cameras (except when using [[#Auto-Relay|Auto-Relay]]). They must also be using all the same firmware (either E Release or Legacy) and the same frequency (either FCC or CE).

===Battery Indicator===
The LED on the top of the PlusX will blink three different colors ('''green''', '''amber''', and '''red''') at different intervals to indicate the remaining battery power.

*One '''green''' blink indicates between 100% to 50% remaining battery life.
*Two '''amber''' blinks indicates between 50% to 25% remaining battery life.
*Three '''red''' blinks indicates less than 25% remaining battery life.

===PlusX FAQ===

Having trouble with your PlusX? Check out our [[PlusX FAQ]] page!

==Remote Flash Triggering==
[[File:PlusX Remote Flash Triggering.jpg|right|300px|]]
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Attach a PlusX to your camera’s hot shoe. You may also connect the PlusX radio to your camera’s PC sync port using the appropriate cable.
# Connect a PlusX to your remote flash via the appropriate sync cable.
# Select a Channel. Set any other PocketWizard radios to matching the previously set Channel.
# Take pictures normally at or below your camera’s X-sync speed.

'''Momentarily pressing the TEST button will test trigger the flash.'''

==Remote Camera Triggering==
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Connect PlusX to your remote camera via the appropriate remote camera cable.
# Select a Channel.
# Press the TEST button on the transmitting PocketWizard radio or fire the camera in your hands. The remote camera will trigger.

NOTE: If you are using a handheld camera with a transmitting radio to trigger a remote camera at the same time, we suggest using a cable on BOTH cameras for best results. Some camera settings automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent shooting, or the fastest FPS setting. In these cases, you will need to use a cable on the handheld camera as the camera will not send a signal through the hot shoe. Please see our [[Remote Camera Triggering]] page for more details.

==Features==
===Transmit Only Mode===
Transmit Only mode allows you to disable the receiver function of the PlusX. Use this mode when sharing remote flashes with other photographers. This mode will prevent other photographers from triggering the PlusX on your camera.

To put the PlusX into Transmit Only Mode:

#Start with the radio powered off.
#Press and hold the TEST button.
#Turn on the radio and then release the TEST button

If performed correctly the selected Channel and LED should blink every couple seconds. In this mode, the PlusX will not be able to receive a signal, it will only transmit signals. Do not select this if you are connecting a PlusX to a receiving flash. To disable this mode simply turn the radio off and then back on again.

===Auto-Relay===
[[File:PlusX auto relay.jpg|right|320px]]
Auto-Relay allows you to trigger remote flashes in sync with a remote camera and requires only three PocketWizard radios. Using Auto-Relay is the only situation where not all PocketWizard radios are set to the same channel since the relaying radio triggers them one channel higher than it received on.

To preform Auto-Relay:

#Set your transmitting PocketWizard radio to your desired channel.
#Set the relaying PocketWizard radio for your remote camera to the same channel as the radio in your hands.
#Connect the relaying PocketWizard radio’s Flash/Camera Port to the remote camera triggering post of the camera via a remote camera cable.
#Slide the relaying PlusX into the remote camera’s hot shoe.
#Connect your remote flash to a PocketWizard receiving radio via the appropriate sync cable and set it to one channel higher than the transmitting PocketWizard radio in your hands.
# Press and release TEST on the PocketWizard transmitter in your hands to fire both the remote camera and remote flash in sync.

==Sustaining High Performance==
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
Your PocketWizard radios use the environment as a medium for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The performance of your radios depends on their placement in the environment, nearby radio interference, and the radios’ orientation and position relative to each other.

===Wireless Basics===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
Whenever possible, maintain a line of sight between radios and keep antennas parallel. Make sure radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure radios are not blocked by these objects or by hills.

The PlusX Transceiver’s antenna is fairly omnidirectional and its orientation should not significantly impact performance in most shooting scenarios, but optimizing for radio reception will always improve the maximum range.

Maintain at least a 12” distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

==Technical Information==
{|
|'''Frequency'''
|FCC/IC model: 344.04MHz
CE model: 433.62 MHz
|-
|'''Channels'''
|PlusX: 10 Standard Channels with Legacy firmware
PlusXe: 10 E Release Channels
|-
|'''Zones'''
|Single zone
|-
|'''Antenna'''
| Precision tuned internal coil
|-
|'''Channel Setting'''
|Backlit rotating dial
|-
|'''Range'''
| Up to 1,600 feet (500 meters)

(Actual range is dependent on multiple factors including equipment, mode, environment, positioning, orientation and interference)
|-
|'''Sync Speed'''
| Up to 1/250 for focal plane shutters
|-
|'''Triggering Speed'''
| Up to 14.5 FPS
|-
|'''Contact Time'''
|62 milliseconds in normal operation
|-
|'''Status Indicator'''
| LED: Green, Amber, Red status indications

Solid Red: Triggering signal sending or receiving

Single Green Blink: Status OK, > 50% battery life

Double Amber Blink: Battery life < 50% but > 25%

Triple Red Blink: Battery life < 25%, change batteries
|-
|'''Transmit Output Power'''
| Less than 1 milliwatt (0.001 watt)
|-
|'''Power'''
| Two (2), AA (LR6), 1.5v alkaline recommended

NiMH, NiCAD, NiZn, Lithium acceptable (these chemistries may not report battery life accurately)

DO NOT USE 3.6V Li-Ion AA cells!
|-
|'''Battery Life'''
| Up to 100 hours (with alkaline batteries)

PlusX

2024-12-30T03:14:11Z

Heathers: /* Connecting */ added line about making sure hot shoe is active

[[File:PlusX SHP w-Glow 300dpi.jpg|right|250px|The PlusX Tranceiver]]
The PlusX is a radio transceiver, capable of acting as a transmitter or receiver for triggering remote flashes and cameras. To use the PlusX, at least one other PocketWizard radio is required. With the proper [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ cable], it can be connected to virtually any remote flash or camera.

Much like its predecessors, the Plus II and Plus III, the PlusX is a manual flash trigger and is compatible with all PocketWizard radios on the same frequency. It can trigger a remote flash up to the camera's X-sync but is not capable of TTL metering, power control, or High Speed Sync. The PlusX uses Legacy firmware while the PlusXe uses either E Release or Legacy firmware.

==Introducing the PlusXe!==
{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
| '''BREAKING NEWS!''' As of September 2024, the PlusXe joined our line of E Release firmware products!
|}

The PlusXe works exactly the same as the PlusX EXCEPT that it uses our E Release firmware protocol. That means you can use it with any other PocketWizards that use the E Release, like a Plus IIIe or PowerMC2e, as well as the Raven from Fusion TLC.

If you would like to use the Legacy firmware instead, to work with your existing PocketWizard radios, you can easily change the firmware protocol. And then switch back to the E Release any time you want.

To change firmware protocol:
#Turn on the PlusXe
#Set the dial to Channel 4 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 3 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 2 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 1 and press Test
#Turn the PlusXe off then on again and the firmware will be set.

Do you already have PlusX radios but would love to upgrade to the E Release? You can send your radios in and we can upgrade them for you! [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ Send us an email] and we can walk you through the steps to purchase the licenses for upgrades and send in the radios.

All of the following information in this Wiki page as well as the PlusX quick guide applies to both the PlusXe and PlusX radios.

==PlusX Basics==
===Connecting===
[[File:PlusX Connecting Hot Shoe.jpg|right|300px]]
[[File:PlusX Connecting Sync Cable.jpg|right|300px]]
The PlusX can be connected to your camera in two different ways, either through the top shoe of the camera or with a sync cable.

'''Top Shoe:''' Slide the PlusX into the top shoe of the camera and secure it using the locking ring. Make sure to orient the antenna to the back of the camera while placing the radio into the hot shoe. Also be sure your hot shoe is active. There are some [[The FAQ#My PocketWizards aren't working on my new camera!|settings]] that automatically disable the hot shoe with mirrorless cameras.

'''Sync Cable:''' If you are using a camera with no hot shoe, the hot shoe cannot be used, or you are remotely triggering your camera, connect the transmitting PlusX’s Flash/Camera Port to the camera’s sync terminal. The PlusX can also be connected to almost any flash using the appropriate sync cable. Visit the PocketWizard [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] to find the correct cable for your camera or flash.

===Powering On/Off===
Locate the switch on the left hand side of the radio (with the channel selector facing you). When the switch is down the unit is off and when in the up position it is on.

*If the radio is using Legacy firmware, you will see one bold '''green''' blink on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

*If the radio is using the E Release firmware, you will see a '''red''' '''green''' '''red''' '''green''' blink pattern on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

===Channels===
To change the channel on your radio simply turn the Channel Selector to find your desired channel. Turning the Channel Selector clockwise will change the channel in ascending order, turning it counter-clockwise will change the channel in descending order. When selecting your channel, make sure that the dial fully clicks into place otherwise you may not be transmitting/receiving on the correct channel.

Note: All radios MUST be on the same channel to properly trigger remote flashes or cameras (except when using [[#Auto-Relay|Auto-Relay]]). They must also be using all the same firmware (either E Release or Legacy) and the same frequency (either FCC or CE).

===Battery Indicator===
The LED on the top of the PlusX will blink three different colors ('''green''', '''amber''', and '''red''') at different intervals to indicate the remaining battery power.

*One '''green''' blink indicates between 100% to 50% remaining battery life.
*Two '''amber''' blinks indicates between 50% to 25% remaining battery life.
*Three '''red''' blinks indicates less than 25% remaining battery life.

===PlusX FAQ===

Having trouble with your PlusX? Check out our [[PlusX FAQ]] page!

==Remote Flash Triggering==
[[File:PlusX Remote Flash Triggering.jpg|right|300px|]]
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Attach a PlusX to your camera’s hot shoe. You may also connect the PlusX radio to your camera’s PC sync port using the appropriate cable.
# Connect a PlusX to your remote flash via the appropriate sync cable.
# Select a Channel. Set any other PocketWizard radios to matching the previously set Channel.
# Take pictures normally at or below your camera’s X-sync speed.

'''Momentarily pressing the TEST button will test trigger the flash.'''

==Remote Camera Triggering==
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Connect PlusX to your remote camera via the appropriate remote camera cable.
# Select a Channel.
# Press the TEST button on the transmitting PocketWizard radio or fire the camera in your hands. The remote camera will trigger.

NOTE: If you are using a handheld camera with a transmitting radio to trigger a remote camera at the same time, we suggest using a cable on BOTH cameras for best results. Some camera settings automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent shooting, or the fastest FPS setting. In these cases, you will need to use a cable on the handheld camera as the camera will not send a signal through the hot shoe. Please see our [[Remote Camera Triggering]] page for more details.

==Features==
===Transmit Only Mode===
Transmit Only mode allows you to disable the receiver function of the PlusX. Use this mode when sharing remote flashes with other photographers. This mode will prevent other photographers from triggering the PlusX on your camera.

To put the PlusX into Transmit Only Mode:

#Start with the radio powered off.
#Press and hold the TEST button.
#Turn on the radio and then release the TEST button

If performed correctly the selected Channel and LED should blink every couple seconds. In this mode, the PlusX will not be able to receive a signal, it will only transmit signals. Do not select this if you are connecting a PlusX to a receiving flash. To disable this mode simply turn the radio off and then back on again.

===Auto-Relay===
[[File:PlusX auto relay.jpg|right|320px]]
Auto-Relay allows you to trigger remote flashes in sync with a remote camera and requires only three PocketWizard radios. Using Auto-Relay is the only situation where not all PocketWizard radios are set to the same channel since the relaying radio triggers them one channel higher than it received on.

To preform Auto-Relay:

#Set your transmitting PocketWizard radio to your desired channel.
#Set the relaying PocketWizard radio for your remote camera to the same channel as the radio in your hands.
#Connect the relaying PocketWizard radio’s Flash/Camera Port to the remote camera triggering post of the camera via a remote camera cable.
#Slide the relaying PlusX into the remote camera’s hot shoe.
#Connect your remote flash to a PocketWizard receiving radio via the appropriate sync cable and set it to one channel higher than the transmitting PocketWizard radio in your hands.
# Press and release TEST on the PocketWizard transmitter in your hands to fire both the remote camera and remote flash in sync.

==Sustaining High Performance==
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
Your PocketWizard radios use the environment as a medium for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The performance of your radios depends on their placement in the environment, nearby radio interference, and the radios’ orientation and position relative to each other.

===Wireless Basics===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
Whenever possible, maintain a line of sight between radios and keep antennas parallel. Make sure radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure radios are not blocked by these objects or by hills.

The PlusX Transceiver’s antenna is fairly omnidirectional and its orientation should not significantly impact performance in most shooting scenarios, but optimizing for radio reception will always improve the maximum range.

Maintain at least a 12” distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

==Technical Information==
{|
|'''Frequency'''
|FCC/IC model: 344.04MHz
CE model: 433.62 MHz
|-
|'''Channels'''
|PlusX: 10 Standard Channels with Legacy firmware
PlusXe: 10 E Release Channels
|-
|'''Zones'''
|Single zone
|-
|'''Antenna'''
| Precision tuned internal coil
|-
|'''Channel Setting'''
|Backlit rotating dial
|-
|'''Range'''
| Up to 1,600 feet (500 meters)

(Actual range is dependent on multiple factors including equipment, mode, environment, positioning, orientation and interference)
|-
|'''Sync Speed'''
| Up to 1/250 for focal plane shutters
|-
|'''Triggering Speed'''
| Up to 14.5 FPS
|-
|'''Contact Time'''
|62 milliseconds in normal operation
|-
|'''Status Indicator'''
| LED: Green, Amber, Red status indications

Solid Red: Triggering signal sending or receiving

Single Green Blink: Status OK, > 50% battery life

Double Amber Blink: Battery life < 50% but > 25%

Triple Red Blink: Battery life < 25%, change batteries
|-
|'''Transmit Output Power'''
| Less than 1 milliwatt (0.001 watt)
|-
|'''Power'''
| Two (2), AA (LR6), 1.5v alkaline recommended

NiMH, NiCAD, NiZn, Lithium acceptable (these chemistries may not report battery life accurately)

DO NOT USE 3.6V Li-Ion AA cells!
|-
|'''Battery Life'''
| Up to 100 hours (with alkaline batteries)

MiniTT1 and FlexTT5

2024-12-30T02:56:32Z

Heathers: added note about compatibility with links

[[File:FlexTT5+MiniTT1.jpg|right|400px|PocketWizard Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5/FlexTT6]]Congratulations on your purchase of the PocketWizard MiniTT1® / FlexTT5/FlexTT6® Wireless Photo Control System for Canon or Nikon DSLR cameras and flashes. You can use the MiniTT1 Transmitter and FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 Transceiver to control single or multiple off-camera electronic or intelligent TTL flashes. The PocketWizard ControlTL® System takes the complex TTL data being sent through the camera’s hot shoe and digitally interprets and transmits it as a reliable radio signal. You can now place TTL or manual flashes anywhere to illuminate the scene: Around corners, out-of-sight and in bright sunlight. The MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 are compatible with any PocketWizard radio for triggering manual flash or remote cameras.

The Canon-specific MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 radios work within the Canon E-TTL II system. Be sure to check the [[Canon Compatibility]] wiki page for compatibility with your specific camera.

The Nikon-specific MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 radios work within the Nikon i-TTL / CLS system. Be sure to check the [[Nikon Compatibility]] wiki page for compatibility with your specific camera.

All references to TTL are exclusively for the electronic or intelligent TTL systems specific to Canon (E-TTL II) and Nikon (i-TTL / CLS), and not film TTL.

The terms Speedlite or Speedlight are used interchangeably throughout this wiki.

This wiki contains the latest information about the operation of your radios. If you would like to download a PDF of this information, [[PocketWizard_Wiki:Books/MiniTT1_and_FlexTT5_Manual|click here]] and follow the instructions.

{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #ffffcc;"
|'''Note:''' The FlexTT6 was created to make the newest generation of Canon cameras (such as the 1DX Mark II and 5D Mark IV) compatible with our ControlTL system. The difference between the FlexTT6 and FlexTT5 is a circuit board hardware change. The functions of the radios are identical. Any information or videos you see, with the exception of compatible cameras, is identical between the FlexTT6 and FlexTT5. To use a FlexTT5 with a FlexTT6, the FlexTT5 will need to be updated to firmware version 6.905 or later to function properly.
|}

__NOTOC__

== Operation ==

{{treasure map}}

'''To quickly begin using your radio, you might be interested in the Quick Guides or other documentation at [https://pocketwizard.com PocketWizard.com].'''

For more detailed information, use the links below to hone in on the specific feature you are looking for. The links are the section headings. For example, the words '''Getting Started''' below will take you straight to that section.

==== [[Getting Started]] ====

This is the first place to start. [[Getting Started | This page]] will walk you through downloading the Utility program to your computer then updating the radios to the latest firmware version. It will also walk you through the proper start up sequence so you can start shooting right away.

==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Key Features|Key Features]]====

Learn more about the key features of your MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 / FlexTT6. Additional information on features can also be found at [https://pocketwizard.com PocketWizard.com]

==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]] ====

Having trouble with your MiniTT1 or FlexTT5/FlexTT6? Check out our [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 FAQ]] page!

==== [[Safety Warnings]] ====

Information about operating the radios safely can be found here.

==== [[Nikon Compatibility]] ====

Find out exactly what cameras and flashes work with the Nikon-Specific ControlTL radios, and what specific operational considerations are required for your gear.

==== [[Canon Compatibility]] ====

Find out exactly what cameras and flashes work with the Canon-specific ControlTL radios, and what specific operational considerations are required for your gear.

==== [[Batteries]] ====

Battery types, polarity, and life expectancy information.

==== [[PocketWizard Utility]] ====

Connect your radios to your computer via USB and control many aspects of them via the PocketWizard Utility.

==== [[Basic Wireless TTL]] ====

Simple TTL operation instructions. Use all of your Speedlites as one zone of light with the camera making the exposure decision.

==== [[Advanced Wireless TTL]] ====

Advanced i-TTL operation instructions. Control individual zones of light. Control your remote Speedlights manually from the camera position.

==== [[Manual Flash]] ====

Trigger any remote flash simply.

==== [[PowerTracking]] ====

Trigger a compatible remote studio flash and control its power level directly from the camera position.

==== [[HyperSync]] ====

Learn more about increasing your X-Sync speed using HyperSync.

==== [[High Speed Sync]] / Auto FP ====

Use your Speedlites with your camera's fastest shutter speeds. See [[Understanding HyperSync and High Speed Sync]].

==== [[Channels]] ====

Channels allow you to work collaboratively with other photographers, or to work with your radios exclusively.

==== [[Remote Camera Triggering]] ====

In addition to triggering remote flash, your PocketWizard radios can trigger a remote camera's motor drive port. Relay Mode is covered in this section.

==== [[Factory Reset]] ====

Sometimes you just need the settings in your radio to be like they were when you first took them out of the box.

==== [[Status LED]] ====

This section covers the various colors and blink patterns used by the Status LED.

==== [[Mounting]] ====

Radios perform best when mounted properly.

==== [[Long Range Performance]] ====

Optimize range using these techniques.

==== [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Specifications]] ====

Details on radio specifics are found here.

==== [[FCC Notice]] ====

The FCC wants you to know...

PocketWizard Utility FAQ

2024-12-17T15:54:49Z

Heathers: /* If the PocketWizard Utility won't recognize your radios or can't update them, try these suggestions: */

Do you have questions about the [[PocketWizard Utility]]? Check out these Frequently Asked Questions, compiled by [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support].

If any of the methods below resolves your issue, '''please''' report which one worked for you [mailto:info@pocketwizard.com?subject=Utility%20Report here]! Thank you!

===How do I reset everything back to defaults?===

Your PocketWizard radios can be reset using the [[PocketWizard Utility]] or by doing a full manual reset, which is the recommended method. To reset via the PocketWizard Utility, click the Update tab then click on Factory Reset. Say Yes to reset the unit.

For full manual resets:
*Plus III or Plus IV: Hold in the test button as you turn the radio on. When all of the segments light up, you can release the test button. The radios should default to TxRx, ABCD, and either CH17 (for Legacy firmware) or CH01 (for E Release ).firmware.
*MultiMAX: Hit *MENU B D C or hold in the C button as you turn it on.
*MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6: Hold in the test button as you turn it on, for about 15 seconds, until you see 4 green blinks. You will see 1 blink, pause, 2 blinks, longer pause, then the last 4 blinks.
*PowerST4 or PowerMC2: these can only be reset via the PocketWizard Utility.

Check out our [[Factory Reset]] page for details.

===If the PocketWizard Utility won't recognize your radios or can't update them, try these suggestions: ===

When you connect the PocketWizard to the PocketWizard Utility, you should see an image of the radio and it will show you the serial number, firmware version, loader version, and hardware version. If you are not seeing the radio in the PocketWizard Utility window or if you get an error message when updating, there are several ways to try to fix the issue. Here are some things you can try:

* Make sure you have the latest version of the Utility, available for download on our [[Getting Started]] page
* Try performing a "hard" [[Factory Reset]] or "Reset B" on your radio. This can sometimes be effective where clicking the Factory Reset button in the Utility is not
* Try a different USB cable. You may have a bad cable or you may have a cable that is only a power cable. You will need a mini B to USB data cable to make changes with the PocketWizard Utility.
* If you are using a USB hub, like in your monitor, try a USB port directly on the computer
* If you are using a USB port directly on the computer, try going through a hub
* If you are using a Port Expander, try connecting directly to the computer
* If you are using a USB 3.0 port, try a USB2.0 port, or vice versa
* Try closing the Utility program, connecting the radio, then reopen the Utility program
* Make sure your computer's motherboard and operating system drivers are up to date
* If the radio has batteries in it, try connecting without batteries installed or with brand new batteries
* If the radio switch is in the OFF position when connecting it to USB, try it in the ON position, or vice versa
* Try connecting your radio to the computer's USB port before running the PocketWizard Utility
* Be patient. When disconnecting one radio, wait 15 seconds (or more!) before connecting another one, and then wait up to 2 minutes to see if it eventually connects (it can take a Windows computer up to 2 minutes to recognize a radio for the first time)
* Wait for any messages in the bottom of the Utility to disappear before connecting another radio, especially "Lost communication..."
* Temporarily disable any software that is specifically looking for other USB devices, like a voice recorder, camcorder, tablet, gaming controllers, etc.
* Temporarily disable any anti-virus or anti-malware software that may be trying to "manage" your USB ports for you
* Disconnect any and all other USB devices that may be interfering
* Try using a different user account
* Try using your computer’s Safe Mode
* Try another computer
* If you’re still having trouble, contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for help

===I'm getting this error: "Archive Extraction Error" or "Error extracting files from archive. #17"===

There are several workarounds for this issue. Please try one of the methods below and '''please''' report which one worked for you [mailto:info@pocketwizard.com?subject=Utility%20Report here]

Try the steps in the "Why won’t the Utility recognize or update my radios?" section above. Sometimes this issue is USB related.

====Try a complete uninstall and re-install of the Utility====

*Mac OS X
:#In the Finder sidebar, click Applications then drag "PocketWizard Utility" from the Applications folder to the Trash (located at the end of the Dock), then choose Finder > Empty Trash. Do this for all PocketWizard applications and downloads
:#Install the PocketWizard Utility from here: [[Getting Started]]

*Windows
:#Start | Programs | PocketWizard Utility | Uninstall
:#Go to C:\Users\<YOUR USERNAME>\AppData\Roaming\ and delete everything PocketWizard
:#Install the PocketWizard Utility from here: [[Getting Started]]

====Try drag and drop of individual firmware files====

Contact PocketWizard Technical Support via [mailto:info@pocketwizard.com?subject=Firmware%20file%20request email] to obtain the appropriate firmware files for your devices. You will need to attach a photo of each unit's serial number to obtain the correct firmware files. Technical support will determine if they can send you the appropriate files.

WARNING: Attempting to install the wrong firmware file into your radio could render it unusable/bricked! Only use the drag and drop method after you have discussed it with tech support and they have verified your exact radio.

#Save the appropriate files to your computer. Don't open, expand, extract, or perform any other operations with the files - just save them to your desktop or a folder where you can find them
#Connect your radio to the computer and run the Utility
#Drag the correct file onto the Utility with the radio connected, then drop it onto the picture of the radio. Don't open, expand, extract, or perform any other operations with the file - just drag and drop it

====Try using the older version of the Utility====

You will not be able to use a Panasonic FlexTT5 or a Plus IV radio with Utility versions 1.54 through 1.63, nor will you have the latest security certificates or bug fixes available in 1.70.

*Windows
:#Start | Programs | PocketWizard Utility | Uninstall
:#Go to C:\Users\<YOUR USERNAME>\AppData\Roaming\ and delete everything PocketWizard
:#Download version 1.63 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%201.63.exe here], version 1.58 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%201.58.exe here], or version 1.70 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Setup%201.70.exe here] and install it

*Mac OS X
:#In the Finder sidebar, click Applications then drag "PocketWizard Utility" from the Applications folder to the Trash (located at the end of the Dock), then choose Finder > Empty Trash. Do this for all PocketWizard applications and downloads
:#For Mac OS X version 10.6 (Snow Leopard) through 10.12 (Sierra), download version 1.63 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%201.63.dmg here]
:#For Mac OS X version 10.13 (High Sierra) through 10.14 (Mojave), download version 1.70 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%20Installer%201.70.dmg here]
:#For PowerPC Mac (older Macs - 2006 or earlier) or Mac OS X version 10.5 (Leopard) and earlier download version 1.58 from [http://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/PocketWizard%20Utility%201.54.dmg here]

====Try another computer====

Sometimes this issue is simply not correctable any other way.

===Can I leave my radio connected to the USB port to test changes quickly?===

No, you should disconnect the radio and power cycle it (if it was turned on) after any changes. Being connected to the PocketWizard Utility his will affect sync timing and give you inaccurate results.

===Why won’t the Utility let me download the latest firmware version?===

-Make sure you’re running the latest version of the [[PocketWizard Utility]], which is available for download on our [[Getting Started]] page.

-Are you looking for [[Beta Firmware]]? Make sure you've enabled that in the PocketWizard Utility. Follow the steps [[Beta Firmware|here]].

-Look in Device Inventory and find the radio. Delete it from the inventory, then try to update the unit again.

-The Utility uses a standard protocol to download firmware files. You can test HTTPS by entering the following URL into your browser:

:: [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/ https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/]

*If the link above opens a new tab or window with an indexed list of files, then your computer has access to our servers. Close that tab or window; it just tests if your computer has general access to our servers, but this tab or window is not used by the Utility.

*If you get the list of files, but the Utility still will not download firmware files, then check any firewall, anti-malware or anti-virus software you may be running. Temporarily disable it to test the PocketWizard Utility behavior, but re-enable the firewall after testing.

*If you do not see the list of files, then something is blocking your computer's access to the servers. Try this:
**Check your internet connection and verify it is working
**Check any firewall, anti-malware or anti-virus software you may be running. Temporarily disable it test with the PocketWizard Utility behavior
**Check with your network administrator to see if it is being blocked on your network

-If you’re still having trouble, contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] for help.

===Is the Utility compatible with my operating system?===

The latest version of the [[PocketWizard Utility]] works well with all recent versions of Windows (7, 8.1, 10) and the latest Mac OS, Catalina (10.15.3). In the Read Me file, Windows 8.1 and 10 are not listed as compatible.

===Why are all the fields in the Utility screen grayed-out?===

The Utility is trying to contact our servers and can't. Start by opening a new browser window and entering [https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/ https://utility.lpadesign.com/utility/]. If you are presented with an index list of files, that’s good – it means the [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] can access the necessary servers. If you are not presented with a list of files, check your firewall and security settings to be sure the [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] has been allowed the necessary permissions.

If you still have trouble, contact [http://www.pocketwizard.com/contact/inquiry/ PocketWizard tech support].

===Where are all the options for advanced settings?===

Click the check-box in the bottom-left corner of the [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] window (next to a picture of a small blue gear) to enable Advanced Mode and reveal additional settings.

===What is the latest firmware version for my radio? Where can I find release notes?===

You can find the latest firmware versions for your radios and read release notes on our [[Getting Started]] page.

===What do all of these Utility selections mean, anyway?===

The [[PocketWizard Utility|Utility]] can be used to optimize ControlTL radios for a particular desired performance. Most photographers will be able to use radios in their default settings. To read more about each Utility setting, visit our [[PocketWizard Utility]] wiki page.

Power Control for Non-Compatible Cameras

2024-12-09T15:34:50Z

Heathers: added quick not about other receivers and mirrorless hot shoes. needs overhaul

[[File:Sony with 430EXII-3611.jpg|right|400px]]

This page explains how to use a MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 with an [[AC3 ZoneController]] on nearly any non-TTL compatible camera with a basic hot shoe to get manual power control.

==Setup==

For most mirrorless cameras and other non-compatible camera brands like Sony, Olympus, Hasselblad, Mamiya, and others, using manual power control with your [[ControlTL]] radios and remote speedlights is simple. A [[MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6]] with an [[AC3 ZoneController]] must be used on-camera to transmit. Remote speedlights must be used with receiving FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 radios. Only compatible Canon/Nikon speedlights are supported and the receiving FlexTT5 or FlexTT6s must match the flashes they are attached to.

How to set up your radios for manual power control with non-compatible cameras:

# Put a MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 in the hot shoe of your non-Canon or non-Nikon camera.
# Slide your AC3 ZoneController into the top shoe of the radio on your camera. Make sure all Zones are set to M or 0. A mode is not supported for non-compatible cameras.
# Place your remote speedlights into the top shoes of the receiving FlexTT5s.
# Set remote speedlights to TTL mode on the back of the flashes.
# Turn on your remote speedlights, and then the receiving FlexTT5s or FlexTT6s.
# Turn on your transmitting radio, and then the camera.
# Use the camera to fire the flashes! You can adjust the AC3 dials for remote manual power.

==Operational Considerations==

Some of these operational notes may also be helpful:

* [[Current Firmware|Update your firmware!]] The ability to use an AC3 and ControlTL radio on a non-compatible camera was added in Version 6.400 for Canon radios and Version 3.400 for Nikon radios. This feature will not work using old radio firmware.
* Make sure your camera has flash usage enabled. Some cameras (like the Fuji X-10 and X100 cameras) cannot use flash when Silent Mode is enabled.
* If the smaller TTL pins in the hot-shoe of your camera line up with the transmitting radio's TTL pins, the radios try to communicate with the camera, which can result in bad exposures. Use tape to cover all but the large center pin in your camera’s hot-shoe if you see problems with your radios or flashes.
* If you are using a camera that is not TTL compatible with your radios but is the same brand (such as a Canon mirrorless camera with a Canon MiniTT1), you will need to cover the extra TTL pins as described above.
* We have found some Fuji cameras (The X-Pro2 specifically) will give an "overheat" warning when used with a Canon MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 in the shoe. If you tape over the extra TTL pins (as described above), this should solve that issue.
* The MiniTT1 has an auto-standby feature that is enabled after 180 seconds when an AC3 is mounted in the transmitter's top-shoe. You may need to press the TEST button on the side of your MiniTT1 if you experience missed exposures after this time period.
* You may notice a lower overall maximum sync speed when using manual power control on your non-compatible camera. If you want faster flash firing, use [[Misc Tab#Basic Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]]. Basic Trigger Mode disables manual power control.
* Power control with non-compatible cameras is only possible if the radio brand matches the speedlight brand. For example, you need to use Canon radios if you have Canon speedlights. This feature will not work with flashes that are not compatible with the ControlTL system.
 

==Notes==
'''Compatible flashes''':
This setting should work with any ControlTL radio and compatible flash, including the Einstein from Paul Buff with a PowerMC2 receiver, Elinchrom flashes with PowerST4 receivers, and White Lightning & AlienBees flashes connected to AC9 AlienBees Adapters with FlexTT5/FlexTT6 receivers.

'''Hot Shoe Setting''':
Be sure your camera's hot shoe is active. The camera manufacturers decided that there are a lot of settings with mirrorless cameras that don't need a flash and some settings automatically disable the camera's hot shoe. If the hot shoe is turned off, the PocketWizard won't get a trigger from the camera. If it doesn't get a trigger, it can't send out a remote signal to the other radio.
Here are the most common settings causing this issue:
*Silent Shooting. Turn it off.
*Continuous high speed drive. Set it to single shot or slower continuous.
*Sometimes electronic shutter. Switch it to Auto or mechanical.
It's easy to confirm whether or not it's working, just watch the LED on the PocketWizard. Every time you take a picture, it should go red. If it's not going red, it's not getting a signal from the camera.

PlusX

2024-09-24T21:43:47Z

Heathers: /* Technical Information */ added E Release Channels

[[File:PlusX SHP w-Glow 300dpi.jpg|right|250px|The PlusX Tranceiver]]
The PlusX is a radio transceiver, capable of acting as a transmitter or receiver for triggering remote flashes and cameras. To use the PlusX, at least one other PocketWizard radio is required. With the proper [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ cable], it can be connected to virtually any remote flash or camera.

Much like its predecessors, the Plus II and Plus III, the PlusX is a manual flash trigger and is compatible with all PocketWizard radios on the same frequency. It can trigger a remote flash up to the camera's X-sync but is not capable of TTL metering, power control, or High Speed Sync. The PlusX uses Legacy firmware while the PlusXe uses either E Release or Legacy firmware.

==Introducing the PlusXe!==
{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
| '''BREAKING NEWS!''' As of September 2024, the PlusXe joined our line of E Release firmware products!
|}

The PlusXe works exactly the same as the PlusX EXCEPT that it uses our E Release firmware protocol. That means you can use it with any other PocketWizards that use the E Release, like a Plus IIIe or PowerMC2e, as well as the Raven from Fusion TLC.

If you would like to use the Legacy firmware instead, to work with your existing PocketWizard radios, you can easily change the firmware protocol. And then switch back to the E Release any time you want.

To change firmware protocol:
#Turn on the PlusXe
#Set the dial to Channel 4 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 3 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 2 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 1 and press Test
#Turn the PlusXe off then on again and the firmware will be set.

Do you already have PlusX radios but would love to upgrade to the E Release? You can send your radios in and we can upgrade them for you! [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ Send us an email] and we can walk you through the steps to purchase the licenses for upgrades and send in the radios.

All of the following information in this Wiki page as well as the PlusX quick guide applies to both the PlusXe and PlusX radios.

==PlusX Basics==
===Connecting===
[[File:PlusX Connecting Hot Shoe.jpg|right|300px]]
[[File:PlusX Connecting Sync Cable.jpg|right|300px]]
The PlusX can be connected to your camera in two different ways, either through the top shoe of the camera or with a sync cable.

'''Top Shoe:''' Slide the PlusX into the top shoe of the camera and secure it using the locking ring. Make sure to orient the antenna to the back of the camera while placing the radio into the hot shoe.

'''Sync Cable:''' If you are using a camera with no hot shoe, the hot shoe cannot be used, or you are remotely triggering your camera, connect the transmitting PlusX’s Flash/Camera Port to the camera’s sync terminal. The PlusX can also be connected to almost any flash using the appropriate sync cable. Visit the PocketWizard [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] to find the correct cable for your camera or flash.

===Powering On/Off===
Locate the switch on the left hand side of the radio (with the channel selector facing you). When the switch is down the unit is off and when in the up position it is on.

*If the radio is using Legacy firmware, you will see one bold '''green''' blink on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

*If the radio is using the E Release firmware, you will see a '''red''' '''green''' '''red''' '''green''' blink pattern on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

===Channels===
To change the channel on your radio simply turn the Channel Selector to find your desired channel. Turning the Channel Selector clockwise will change the channel in ascending order, turning it counter-clockwise will change the channel in descending order. When selecting your channel, make sure that the dial fully clicks into place otherwise you may not be transmitting/receiving on the correct channel.

Note: All radios MUST be on the same channel to properly trigger remote flashes or cameras (except when using [[#Auto-Relay|Auto-Relay]]). They must also be using all the same firmware (either E Release or Legacy) and the same frequency (either FCC or CE).

===Battery Indicator===
The LED on the top of the PlusX will blink three different colors ('''green''', '''amber''', and '''red''') at different intervals to indicate the remaining battery power.

*One '''green''' blink indicates between 100% to 50% remaining battery life.
*Two '''amber''' blinks indicates between 50% to 25% remaining battery life.
*Three '''red''' blinks indicates less than 25% remaining battery life.

===PlusX FAQ===

Having trouble with your PlusX? Check out our [[PlusX FAQ]] page!

==Remote Flash Triggering==
[[File:PlusX Remote Flash Triggering.jpg|right|300px|]]
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Attach a PlusX to your camera’s hot shoe. You may also connect the PlusX radio to your camera’s PC sync port using the appropriate cable.
# Connect a PlusX to your remote flash via the appropriate sync cable.
# Select a Channel. Set any other PocketWizard radios to matching the previously set Channel.
# Take pictures normally at or below your camera’s X-sync speed.

'''Momentarily pressing the TEST button will test trigger the flash.'''

==Remote Camera Triggering==
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Connect PlusX to your remote camera via the appropriate remote camera cable.
# Select a Channel.
# Press the TEST button on the transmitting PocketWizard radio or fire the camera in your hands. The remote camera will trigger.

NOTE: If you are using a handheld camera with a transmitting radio to trigger a remote camera at the same time, we suggest using a cable on BOTH cameras for best results. Some camera settings automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent shooting, or the fastest FPS setting. In these cases, you will need to use a cable on the handheld camera as the camera will not send a signal through the hot shoe. Please see our [[Remote Camera Triggering]] page for more details.

==Features==
===Transmit Only Mode===
Transmit Only mode allows you to disable the receiver function of the PlusX. Use this mode when sharing remote flashes with other photographers. This mode will prevent other photographers from triggering the PlusX on your camera.

To put the PlusX into Transmit Only Mode:

#Start with the radio powered off.
#Press and hold the TEST button.
#Turn on the radio and then release the TEST button

If performed correctly the selected Channel and LED should blink every couple seconds. In this mode, the PlusX will not be able to receive a signal, it will only transmit signals. Do not select this if you are connecting a PlusX to a receiving flash. To disable this mode simply turn the radio off and then back on again.

===Auto-Relay===
[[File:PlusX auto relay.jpg|right|320px]]
Auto-Relay allows you to trigger remote flashes in sync with a remote camera and requires only three PocketWizard radios. Using Auto-Relay is the only situation where not all PocketWizard radios are set to the same channel since the relaying radio triggers them one channel higher than it received on.

To preform Auto-Relay:

#Set your transmitting PocketWizard radio to your desired channel.
#Set the relaying PocketWizard radio for your remote camera to the same channel as the radio in your hands.
#Connect the relaying PocketWizard radio’s Flash/Camera Port to the remote camera triggering post of the camera via a remote camera cable.
#Slide the relaying PlusX into the remote camera’s hot shoe.
#Connect your remote flash to a PocketWizard receiving radio via the appropriate sync cable and set it to one channel higher than the transmitting PocketWizard radio in your hands.
# Press and release TEST on the PocketWizard transmitter in your hands to fire both the remote camera and remote flash in sync.

==Sustaining High Performance==
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
Your PocketWizard radios use the environment as a medium for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The performance of your radios depends on their placement in the environment, nearby radio interference, and the radios’ orientation and position relative to each other.

===Wireless Basics===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
Whenever possible, maintain a line of sight between radios and keep antennas parallel. Make sure radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure radios are not blocked by these objects or by hills.

The PlusX Transceiver’s antenna is fairly omnidirectional and its orientation should not significantly impact performance in most shooting scenarios, but optimizing for radio reception will always improve the maximum range.

Maintain at least a 12” distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

==Technical Information==
{|
|'''Frequency'''
|FCC/IC model: 344.04MHz
CE model: 433.62 MHz
|-
|'''Channels'''
|PlusX: 10 Standard Channels with Legacy firmware
PlusXe: 10 E Release Channels
|-
|'''Zones'''
|Single zone
|-
|'''Antenna'''
| Precision tuned internal coil
|-
|'''Channel Setting'''
|Backlit rotating dial
|-
|'''Range'''
| Up to 1,600 feet (500 meters)

(Actual range is dependent on multiple factors including equipment, mode, environment, positioning, orientation and interference)
|-
|'''Sync Speed'''
| Up to 1/250 for focal plane shutters
|-
|'''Triggering Speed'''
| Up to 14.5 FPS
|-
|'''Contact Time'''
|62 milliseconds in normal operation
|-
|'''Status Indicator'''
| LED: Green, Amber, Red status indications

Solid Red: Triggering signal sending or receiving

Single Green Blink: Status OK, > 50% battery life

Double Amber Blink: Battery life < 50% but > 25%

Triple Red Blink: Battery life < 25%, change batteries
|-
|'''Transmit Output Power'''
| Less than 1 milliwatt (0.001 watt)
|-
|'''Power'''
| Two (2), AA (LR6), 1.5v alkaline recommended

NiMH, NiCAD, NiZn, Lithium acceptable (these chemistries may not report battery life accurately)

DO NOT USE 3.6V Li-Ion AA cells!
|-
|'''Battery Life'''
| Up to 100 hours (with alkaline batteries)

PlusX

2024-09-24T21:41:24Z

Heathers: /* Remote Camera Triggering */ added link for remote camera page

[[File:PlusX SHP w-Glow 300dpi.jpg|right|250px|The PlusX Tranceiver]]
The PlusX is a radio transceiver, capable of acting as a transmitter or receiver for triggering remote flashes and cameras. To use the PlusX, at least one other PocketWizard radio is required. With the proper [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ cable], it can be connected to virtually any remote flash or camera.

Much like its predecessors, the Plus II and Plus III, the PlusX is a manual flash trigger and is compatible with all PocketWizard radios on the same frequency. It can trigger a remote flash up to the camera's X-sync but is not capable of TTL metering, power control, or High Speed Sync. The PlusX uses Legacy firmware while the PlusXe uses either E Release or Legacy firmware.

==Introducing the PlusXe!==
{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
| '''BREAKING NEWS!''' As of September 2024, the PlusXe joined our line of E Release firmware products!
|}

The PlusXe works exactly the same as the PlusX EXCEPT that it uses our E Release firmware protocol. That means you can use it with any other PocketWizards that use the E Release, like a Plus IIIe or PowerMC2e, as well as the Raven from Fusion TLC.

If you would like to use the Legacy firmware instead, to work with your existing PocketWizard radios, you can easily change the firmware protocol. And then switch back to the E Release any time you want.

To change firmware protocol:
#Turn on the PlusXe
#Set the dial to Channel 4 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 3 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 2 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 1 and press Test
#Turn the PlusXe off then on again and the firmware will be set.

Do you already have PlusX radios but would love to upgrade to the E Release? You can send your radios in and we can upgrade them for you! [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ Send us an email] and we can walk you through the steps to purchase the licenses for upgrades and send in the radios.

All of the following information in this Wiki page as well as the PlusX quick guide applies to both the PlusXe and PlusX radios.

==PlusX Basics==
===Connecting===
[[File:PlusX Connecting Hot Shoe.jpg|right|300px]]
[[File:PlusX Connecting Sync Cable.jpg|right|300px]]
The PlusX can be connected to your camera in two different ways, either through the top shoe of the camera or with a sync cable.

'''Top Shoe:''' Slide the PlusX into the top shoe of the camera and secure it using the locking ring. Make sure to orient the antenna to the back of the camera while placing the radio into the hot shoe.

'''Sync Cable:''' If you are using a camera with no hot shoe, the hot shoe cannot be used, or you are remotely triggering your camera, connect the transmitting PlusX’s Flash/Camera Port to the camera’s sync terminal. The PlusX can also be connected to almost any flash using the appropriate sync cable. Visit the PocketWizard [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] to find the correct cable for your camera or flash.

===Powering On/Off===
Locate the switch on the left hand side of the radio (with the channel selector facing you). When the switch is down the unit is off and when in the up position it is on.

*If the radio is using Legacy firmware, you will see one bold '''green''' blink on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

*If the radio is using the E Release firmware, you will see a '''red''' '''green''' '''red''' '''green''' blink pattern on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

===Channels===
To change the channel on your radio simply turn the Channel Selector to find your desired channel. Turning the Channel Selector clockwise will change the channel in ascending order, turning it counter-clockwise will change the channel in descending order. When selecting your channel, make sure that the dial fully clicks into place otherwise you may not be transmitting/receiving on the correct channel.

Note: All radios MUST be on the same channel to properly trigger remote flashes or cameras (except when using [[#Auto-Relay|Auto-Relay]]). They must also be using all the same firmware (either E Release or Legacy) and the same frequency (either FCC or CE).

===Battery Indicator===
The LED on the top of the PlusX will blink three different colors ('''green''', '''amber''', and '''red''') at different intervals to indicate the remaining battery power.

*One '''green''' blink indicates between 100% to 50% remaining battery life.
*Two '''amber''' blinks indicates between 50% to 25% remaining battery life.
*Three '''red''' blinks indicates less than 25% remaining battery life.

===PlusX FAQ===

Having trouble with your PlusX? Check out our [[PlusX FAQ]] page!

==Remote Flash Triggering==
[[File:PlusX Remote Flash Triggering.jpg|right|300px|]]
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Attach a PlusX to your camera’s hot shoe. You may also connect the PlusX radio to your camera’s PC sync port using the appropriate cable.
# Connect a PlusX to your remote flash via the appropriate sync cable.
# Select a Channel. Set any other PocketWizard radios to matching the previously set Channel.
# Take pictures normally at or below your camera’s X-sync speed.

'''Momentarily pressing the TEST button will test trigger the flash.'''

==Remote Camera Triggering==
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Connect PlusX to your remote camera via the appropriate remote camera cable.
# Select a Channel.
# Press the TEST button on the transmitting PocketWizard radio or fire the camera in your hands. The remote camera will trigger.

NOTE: If you are using a handheld camera with a transmitting radio to trigger a remote camera at the same time, we suggest using a cable on BOTH cameras for best results. Some camera settings automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent shooting, or the fastest FPS setting. In these cases, you will need to use a cable on the handheld camera as the camera will not send a signal through the hot shoe. Please see our [[Remote Camera Triggering]] page for more details.

==Features==
===Transmit Only Mode===
Transmit Only mode allows you to disable the receiver function of the PlusX. Use this mode when sharing remote flashes with other photographers. This mode will prevent other photographers from triggering the PlusX on your camera.

To put the PlusX into Transmit Only Mode:

#Start with the radio powered off.
#Press and hold the TEST button.
#Turn on the radio and then release the TEST button

If performed correctly the selected Channel and LED should blink every couple seconds. In this mode, the PlusX will not be able to receive a signal, it will only transmit signals. Do not select this if you are connecting a PlusX to a receiving flash. To disable this mode simply turn the radio off and then back on again.

===Auto-Relay===
[[File:PlusX auto relay.jpg|right|320px]]
Auto-Relay allows you to trigger remote flashes in sync with a remote camera and requires only three PocketWizard radios. Using Auto-Relay is the only situation where not all PocketWizard radios are set to the same channel since the relaying radio triggers them one channel higher than it received on.

To preform Auto-Relay:

#Set your transmitting PocketWizard radio to your desired channel.
#Set the relaying PocketWizard radio for your remote camera to the same channel as the radio in your hands.
#Connect the relaying PocketWizard radio’s Flash/Camera Port to the remote camera triggering post of the camera via a remote camera cable.
#Slide the relaying PlusX into the remote camera’s hot shoe.
#Connect your remote flash to a PocketWizard receiving radio via the appropriate sync cable and set it to one channel higher than the transmitting PocketWizard radio in your hands.
# Press and release TEST on the PocketWizard transmitter in your hands to fire both the remote camera and remote flash in sync.

==Sustaining High Performance==
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
Your PocketWizard radios use the environment as a medium for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The performance of your radios depends on their placement in the environment, nearby radio interference, and the radios’ orientation and position relative to each other.

===Wireless Basics===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
Whenever possible, maintain a line of sight between radios and keep antennas parallel. Make sure radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure radios are not blocked by these objects or by hills.

The PlusX Transceiver’s antenna is fairly omnidirectional and its orientation should not significantly impact performance in most shooting scenarios, but optimizing for radio reception will always improve the maximum range.

Maintain at least a 12” distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

==Technical Information==
{|
|'''Frequency'''
|FCC/IC model: 344.04MHz
CE model: 433.62 MHz
|-
|'''Channels'''
|10 Standard Channels with Legacy firmware

Reverse compatible with ''all'' PocketWizard radios using Standard Channels using the same frequency.
|-
|'''Zones'''
|Single zone
|-
|'''Antenna'''
| Precision tuned internal coil
|-
|'''Channel Setting'''
|Backlit rotating dial
|-
|'''Range'''
| Up to 1,600 feet (500 meters)

(Actual range is dependent on multiple factors including equipment, mode, environment, positioning, orientation and interference)
|-
|'''Sync Speed'''
| Up to 1/250 for focal plane shutters
|-
|'''Triggering Speed'''
| Up to 14.5 FPS
|-
|'''Contact Time'''
|62 milliseconds in normal operation
|-
|'''Status Indicator'''
| LED: Green, Amber, Red status indications

Solid Red: Triggering signal sending or receiving

Single Green Blink: Status OK, > 50% battery life

Double Amber Blink: Battery life < 50% but > 25%

Triple Red Blink: Battery life < 25%, change batteries
|-
|'''Transmit Output Power'''
| Less than 1 milliwatt (0.001 watt)
|-
|'''Power'''
| Two (2), AA (LR6), 1.5v alkaline recommended

NiMH, NiCAD, NiZn, Lithium acceptable (these chemistries may not report battery life accurately)

DO NOT USE 3.6V Li-Ion AA cells!
|-
|'''Battery Life'''
| Up to 100 hours (with alkaline batteries)

PlusX

2024-09-24T21:39:46Z

Heathers: /* Channels */ added line about firmware & frequency

[[File:PlusX SHP w-Glow 300dpi.jpg|right|250px|The PlusX Tranceiver]]
The PlusX is a radio transceiver, capable of acting as a transmitter or receiver for triggering remote flashes and cameras. To use the PlusX, at least one other PocketWizard radio is required. With the proper [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ cable], it can be connected to virtually any remote flash or camera.

Much like its predecessors, the Plus II and Plus III, the PlusX is a manual flash trigger and is compatible with all PocketWizard radios on the same frequency. It can trigger a remote flash up to the camera's X-sync but is not capable of TTL metering, power control, or High Speed Sync. The PlusX uses Legacy firmware while the PlusXe uses either E Release or Legacy firmware.

==Introducing the PlusXe!==
{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
| '''BREAKING NEWS!''' As of September 2024, the PlusXe joined our line of E Release firmware products!
|}

The PlusXe works exactly the same as the PlusX EXCEPT that it uses our E Release firmware protocol. That means you can use it with any other PocketWizards that use the E Release, like a Plus IIIe or PowerMC2e, as well as the Raven from Fusion TLC.

If you would like to use the Legacy firmware instead, to work with your existing PocketWizard radios, you can easily change the firmware protocol. And then switch back to the E Release any time you want.

To change firmware protocol:
#Turn on the PlusXe
#Set the dial to Channel 4 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 3 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 2 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 1 and press Test
#Turn the PlusXe off then on again and the firmware will be set.

Do you already have PlusX radios but would love to upgrade to the E Release? You can send your radios in and we can upgrade them for you! [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ Send us an email] and we can walk you through the steps to purchase the licenses for upgrades and send in the radios.

All of the following information in this Wiki page as well as the PlusX quick guide applies to both the PlusXe and PlusX radios.

==PlusX Basics==
===Connecting===
[[File:PlusX Connecting Hot Shoe.jpg|right|300px]]
[[File:PlusX Connecting Sync Cable.jpg|right|300px]]
The PlusX can be connected to your camera in two different ways, either through the top shoe of the camera or with a sync cable.

'''Top Shoe:''' Slide the PlusX into the top shoe of the camera and secure it using the locking ring. Make sure to orient the antenna to the back of the camera while placing the radio into the hot shoe.

'''Sync Cable:''' If you are using a camera with no hot shoe, the hot shoe cannot be used, or you are remotely triggering your camera, connect the transmitting PlusX’s Flash/Camera Port to the camera’s sync terminal. The PlusX can also be connected to almost any flash using the appropriate sync cable. Visit the PocketWizard [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] to find the correct cable for your camera or flash.

===Powering On/Off===
Locate the switch on the left hand side of the radio (with the channel selector facing you). When the switch is down the unit is off and when in the up position it is on.

*If the radio is using Legacy firmware, you will see one bold '''green''' blink on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

*If the radio is using the E Release firmware, you will see a '''red''' '''green''' '''red''' '''green''' blink pattern on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

===Channels===
To change the channel on your radio simply turn the Channel Selector to find your desired channel. Turning the Channel Selector clockwise will change the channel in ascending order, turning it counter-clockwise will change the channel in descending order. When selecting your channel, make sure that the dial fully clicks into place otherwise you may not be transmitting/receiving on the correct channel.

Note: All radios MUST be on the same channel to properly trigger remote flashes or cameras (except when using [[#Auto-Relay|Auto-Relay]]). They must also be using all the same firmware (either E Release or Legacy) and the same frequency (either FCC or CE).

===Battery Indicator===
The LED on the top of the PlusX will blink three different colors ('''green''', '''amber''', and '''red''') at different intervals to indicate the remaining battery power.

*One '''green''' blink indicates between 100% to 50% remaining battery life.
*Two '''amber''' blinks indicates between 50% to 25% remaining battery life.
*Three '''red''' blinks indicates less than 25% remaining battery life.

===PlusX FAQ===

Having trouble with your PlusX? Check out our [[PlusX FAQ]] page!

==Remote Flash Triggering==
[[File:PlusX Remote Flash Triggering.jpg|right|300px|]]
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Attach a PlusX to your camera’s hot shoe. You may also connect the PlusX radio to your camera’s PC sync port using the appropriate cable.
# Connect a PlusX to your remote flash via the appropriate sync cable.
# Select a Channel. Set any other PocketWizard radios to matching the previously set Channel.
# Take pictures normally at or below your camera’s X-sync speed.

'''Momentarily pressing the TEST button will test trigger the flash.'''

==Remote Camera Triggering==
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Connect PlusX to your remote camera via the appropriate remote camera cable.
# Select a Channel.
# Press the TEST button on the transmitting PocketWizard radio or fire the camera in your hands. The remote camera will trigger.

NOTE: If you are using a handheld camera with a transmitting radio to trigger a remote camera at the same time, we suggest using a cable on BOTH cameras for best results. Some camera settings automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent shooting, or the fastest FPS setting. In these cases, you will need to use a cable on the handheld camera as the camera will not send a signal through the hot shoe.

==Features==
===Transmit Only Mode===
Transmit Only mode allows you to disable the receiver function of the PlusX. Use this mode when sharing remote flashes with other photographers. This mode will prevent other photographers from triggering the PlusX on your camera.

To put the PlusX into Transmit Only Mode:

#Start with the radio powered off.
#Press and hold the TEST button.
#Turn on the radio and then release the TEST button

If performed correctly the selected Channel and LED should blink every couple seconds. In this mode, the PlusX will not be able to receive a signal, it will only transmit signals. Do not select this if you are connecting a PlusX to a receiving flash. To disable this mode simply turn the radio off and then back on again.

===Auto-Relay===
[[File:PlusX auto relay.jpg|right|320px]]
Auto-Relay allows you to trigger remote flashes in sync with a remote camera and requires only three PocketWizard radios. Using Auto-Relay is the only situation where not all PocketWizard radios are set to the same channel since the relaying radio triggers them one channel higher than it received on.

To preform Auto-Relay:

#Set your transmitting PocketWizard radio to your desired channel.
#Set the relaying PocketWizard radio for your remote camera to the same channel as the radio in your hands.
#Connect the relaying PocketWizard radio’s Flash/Camera Port to the remote camera triggering post of the camera via a remote camera cable.
#Slide the relaying PlusX into the remote camera’s hot shoe.
#Connect your remote flash to a PocketWizard receiving radio via the appropriate sync cable and set it to one channel higher than the transmitting PocketWizard radio in your hands.
# Press and release TEST on the PocketWizard transmitter in your hands to fire both the remote camera and remote flash in sync.

==Sustaining High Performance==
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
Your PocketWizard radios use the environment as a medium for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The performance of your radios depends on their placement in the environment, nearby radio interference, and the radios’ orientation and position relative to each other.

===Wireless Basics===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
Whenever possible, maintain a line of sight between radios and keep antennas parallel. Make sure radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure radios are not blocked by these objects or by hills.

The PlusX Transceiver’s antenna is fairly omnidirectional and its orientation should not significantly impact performance in most shooting scenarios, but optimizing for radio reception will always improve the maximum range.

Maintain at least a 12” distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

==Technical Information==
{|
|'''Frequency'''
|FCC/IC model: 344.04MHz
CE model: 433.62 MHz
|-
|'''Channels'''
|10 Standard Channels with Legacy firmware

Reverse compatible with ''all'' PocketWizard radios using Standard Channels using the same frequency.
|-
|'''Zones'''
|Single zone
|-
|'''Antenna'''
| Precision tuned internal coil
|-
|'''Channel Setting'''
|Backlit rotating dial
|-
|'''Range'''
| Up to 1,600 feet (500 meters)

(Actual range is dependent on multiple factors including equipment, mode, environment, positioning, orientation and interference)
|-
|'''Sync Speed'''
| Up to 1/250 for focal plane shutters
|-
|'''Triggering Speed'''
| Up to 14.5 FPS
|-
|'''Contact Time'''
|62 milliseconds in normal operation
|-
|'''Status Indicator'''
| LED: Green, Amber, Red status indications

Solid Red: Triggering signal sending or receiving

Single Green Blink: Status OK, > 50% battery life

Double Amber Blink: Battery life < 50% but > 25%

Triple Red Blink: Battery life < 25%, change batteries
|-
|'''Transmit Output Power'''
| Less than 1 milliwatt (0.001 watt)
|-
|'''Power'''
| Two (2), AA (LR6), 1.5v alkaline recommended

NiMH, NiCAD, NiZn, Lithium acceptable (these chemistries may not report battery life accurately)

DO NOT USE 3.6V Li-Ion AA cells!
|-
|'''Battery Life'''
| Up to 100 hours (with alkaline batteries)

PlusX

2024-09-24T21:38:45Z

Heathers: /* Powering On/Off */ changed to add E Release blink pattern

[[File:PlusX SHP w-Glow 300dpi.jpg|right|250px|The PlusX Tranceiver]]
The PlusX is a radio transceiver, capable of acting as a transmitter or receiver for triggering remote flashes and cameras. To use the PlusX, at least one other PocketWizard radio is required. With the proper [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ cable], it can be connected to virtually any remote flash or camera.

Much like its predecessors, the Plus II and Plus III, the PlusX is a manual flash trigger and is compatible with all PocketWizard radios on the same frequency. It can trigger a remote flash up to the camera's X-sync but is not capable of TTL metering, power control, or High Speed Sync. The PlusX uses Legacy firmware while the PlusXe uses either E Release or Legacy firmware.

==Introducing the PlusXe!==
{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
| '''BREAKING NEWS!''' As of September 2024, the PlusXe joined our line of E Release firmware products!
|}

The PlusXe works exactly the same as the PlusX EXCEPT that it uses our E Release firmware protocol. That means you can use it with any other PocketWizards that use the E Release, like a Plus IIIe or PowerMC2e, as well as the Raven from Fusion TLC.

If you would like to use the Legacy firmware instead, to work with your existing PocketWizard radios, you can easily change the firmware protocol. And then switch back to the E Release any time you want.

To change firmware protocol:
#Turn on the PlusXe
#Set the dial to Channel 4 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 3 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 2 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 1 and press Test
#Turn the PlusXe off then on again and the firmware will be set.

Do you already have PlusX radios but would love to upgrade to the E Release? You can send your radios in and we can upgrade them for you! [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ Send us an email] and we can walk you through the steps to purchase the licenses for upgrades and send in the radios.

All of the following information in this Wiki page as well as the PlusX quick guide applies to both the PlusXe and PlusX radios.

==PlusX Basics==
===Connecting===
[[File:PlusX Connecting Hot Shoe.jpg|right|300px]]
[[File:PlusX Connecting Sync Cable.jpg|right|300px]]
The PlusX can be connected to your camera in two different ways, either through the top shoe of the camera or with a sync cable.

'''Top Shoe:''' Slide the PlusX into the top shoe of the camera and secure it using the locking ring. Make sure to orient the antenna to the back of the camera while placing the radio into the hot shoe.

'''Sync Cable:''' If you are using a camera with no hot shoe, the hot shoe cannot be used, or you are remotely triggering your camera, connect the transmitting PlusX’s Flash/Camera Port to the camera’s sync terminal. The PlusX can also be connected to almost any flash using the appropriate sync cable. Visit the PocketWizard [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] to find the correct cable for your camera or flash.

===Powering On/Off===
Locate the switch on the left hand side of the radio (with the channel selector facing you). When the switch is down the unit is off and when in the up position it is on.

*If the radio is using Legacy firmware, you will see one bold '''green''' blink on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

*If the radio is using the E Release firmware, you will see a '''red''' '''green''' '''red''' '''green''' blink pattern on the LED at power on, followed by a subtle green blink every second or so to let you know the radio is ready and waiting for a signal. The Channel selector will also be lit up.

===Channels===
To change the channel on your radio simply turn the Channel Selector to find your desired channel. Turning the Channel Selector clockwise will change the channel in ascending order, turning it counter-clockwise will change the channel in descending order. When selecting your channel, make sure that the dial fully clicks into place otherwise you may not be transmitting/receiving on the correct channel.

Note: All radios MUST be on the same channel to properly trigger remote flashes or cameras (except when using [[#Auto-Relay|Auto-Relay]]).

===Battery Indicator===
The LED on the top of the PlusX will blink three different colors ('''green''', '''amber''', and '''red''') at different intervals to indicate the remaining battery power.

*One '''green''' blink indicates between 100% to 50% remaining battery life.
*Two '''amber''' blinks indicates between 50% to 25% remaining battery life.
*Three '''red''' blinks indicates less than 25% remaining battery life.

===PlusX FAQ===

Having trouble with your PlusX? Check out our [[PlusX FAQ]] page!

==Remote Flash Triggering==
[[File:PlusX Remote Flash Triggering.jpg|right|300px|]]
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Attach a PlusX to your camera’s hot shoe. You may also connect the PlusX radio to your camera’s PC sync port using the appropriate cable.
# Connect a PlusX to your remote flash via the appropriate sync cable.
# Select a Channel. Set any other PocketWizard radios to matching the previously set Channel.
# Take pictures normally at or below your camera’s X-sync speed.

'''Momentarily pressing the TEST button will test trigger the flash.'''

==Remote Camera Triggering==
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Connect PlusX to your remote camera via the appropriate remote camera cable.
# Select a Channel.
# Press the TEST button on the transmitting PocketWizard radio or fire the camera in your hands. The remote camera will trigger.

NOTE: If you are using a handheld camera with a transmitting radio to trigger a remote camera at the same time, we suggest using a cable on BOTH cameras for best results. Some camera settings automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent shooting, or the fastest FPS setting. In these cases, you will need to use a cable on the handheld camera as the camera will not send a signal through the hot shoe.

==Features==
===Transmit Only Mode===
Transmit Only mode allows you to disable the receiver function of the PlusX. Use this mode when sharing remote flashes with other photographers. This mode will prevent other photographers from triggering the PlusX on your camera.

To put the PlusX into Transmit Only Mode:

#Start with the radio powered off.
#Press and hold the TEST button.
#Turn on the radio and then release the TEST button

If performed correctly the selected Channel and LED should blink every couple seconds. In this mode, the PlusX will not be able to receive a signal, it will only transmit signals. Do not select this if you are connecting a PlusX to a receiving flash. To disable this mode simply turn the radio off and then back on again.

===Auto-Relay===
[[File:PlusX auto relay.jpg|right|320px]]
Auto-Relay allows you to trigger remote flashes in sync with a remote camera and requires only three PocketWizard radios. Using Auto-Relay is the only situation where not all PocketWizard radios are set to the same channel since the relaying radio triggers them one channel higher than it received on.

To preform Auto-Relay:

#Set your transmitting PocketWizard radio to your desired channel.
#Set the relaying PocketWizard radio for your remote camera to the same channel as the radio in your hands.
#Connect the relaying PocketWizard radio’s Flash/Camera Port to the remote camera triggering post of the camera via a remote camera cable.
#Slide the relaying PlusX into the remote camera’s hot shoe.
#Connect your remote flash to a PocketWizard receiving radio via the appropriate sync cable and set it to one channel higher than the transmitting PocketWizard radio in your hands.
# Press and release TEST on the PocketWizard transmitter in your hands to fire both the remote camera and remote flash in sync.

==Sustaining High Performance==
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
Your PocketWizard radios use the environment as a medium for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The performance of your radios depends on their placement in the environment, nearby radio interference, and the radios’ orientation and position relative to each other.

===Wireless Basics===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
Whenever possible, maintain a line of sight between radios and keep antennas parallel. Make sure radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure radios are not blocked by these objects or by hills.

The PlusX Transceiver’s antenna is fairly omnidirectional and its orientation should not significantly impact performance in most shooting scenarios, but optimizing for radio reception will always improve the maximum range.

Maintain at least a 12” distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

==Technical Information==
{|
|'''Frequency'''
|FCC/IC model: 344.04MHz
CE model: 433.62 MHz
|-
|'''Channels'''
|10 Standard Channels with Legacy firmware

Reverse compatible with ''all'' PocketWizard radios using Standard Channels using the same frequency.
|-
|'''Zones'''
|Single zone
|-
|'''Antenna'''
| Precision tuned internal coil
|-
|'''Channel Setting'''
|Backlit rotating dial
|-
|'''Range'''
| Up to 1,600 feet (500 meters)

(Actual range is dependent on multiple factors including equipment, mode, environment, positioning, orientation and interference)
|-
|'''Sync Speed'''
| Up to 1/250 for focal plane shutters
|-
|'''Triggering Speed'''
| Up to 14.5 FPS
|-
|'''Contact Time'''
|62 milliseconds in normal operation
|-
|'''Status Indicator'''
| LED: Green, Amber, Red status indications

Solid Red: Triggering signal sending or receiving

Single Green Blink: Status OK, > 50% battery life

Double Amber Blink: Battery life < 50% but > 25%

Triple Red Blink: Battery life < 25%, change batteries
|-
|'''Transmit Output Power'''
| Less than 1 milliwatt (0.001 watt)
|-
|'''Power'''
| Two (2), AA (LR6), 1.5v alkaline recommended

NiMH, NiCAD, NiZn, Lithium acceptable (these chemistries may not report battery life accurately)

DO NOT USE 3.6V Li-Ion AA cells!
|-
|'''Battery Life'''
| Up to 100 hours (with alkaline batteries)

PlusX

2024-09-24T21:33:19Z

Heathers: added new PlusXe section

[[File:PlusX SHP w-Glow 300dpi.jpg|right|250px|The PlusX Tranceiver]]
The PlusX is a radio transceiver, capable of acting as a transmitter or receiver for triggering remote flashes and cameras. To use the PlusX, at least one other PocketWizard radio is required. With the proper [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ cable], it can be connected to virtually any remote flash or camera.

Much like its predecessors, the Plus II and Plus III, the PlusX is a manual flash trigger and is compatible with all PocketWizard radios on the same frequency. It can trigger a remote flash up to the camera's X-sync but is not capable of TTL metering, power control, or High Speed Sync. The PlusX uses Legacy firmware while the PlusXe uses either E Release or Legacy firmware.

==Introducing the PlusXe!==
{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
| '''BREAKING NEWS!''' As of September 2024, the PlusXe joined our line of E Release firmware products!
|}

The PlusXe works exactly the same as the PlusX EXCEPT that it uses our E Release firmware protocol. That means you can use it with any other PocketWizards that use the E Release, like a Plus IIIe or PowerMC2e, as well as the Raven from Fusion TLC.

If you would like to use the Legacy firmware instead, to work with your existing PocketWizard radios, you can easily change the firmware protocol. And then switch back to the E Release any time you want.

To change firmware protocol:
#Turn on the PlusXe
#Set the dial to Channel 4 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 3 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 2 and press Test
#Change the dial to Channel 1 and press Test
#Turn the PlusXe off then on again and the firmware will be set.

Do you already have PlusX radios but would love to upgrade to the E Release? You can send your radios in and we can upgrade them for you! [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ Send us an email] and we can walk you through the steps to purchase the licenses for upgrades and send in the radios.

All of the following information in this Wiki page as well as the PlusX quick guide applies to both the PlusXe and PlusX radios.

==PlusX Basics==
===Connecting===
[[File:PlusX Connecting Hot Shoe.jpg|right|300px]]
[[File:PlusX Connecting Sync Cable.jpg|right|300px]]
The PlusX can be connected to your camera in two different ways, either through the top shoe of the camera or with a sync cable.

'''Top Shoe:''' Slide the PlusX into the top shoe of the camera and secure it using the locking ring. Make sure to orient the antenna to the back of the camera while placing the radio into the hot shoe.

'''Sync Cable:''' If you are using a camera with no hot shoe, the hot shoe cannot be used, or you are remotely triggering your camera, connect the transmitting PlusX’s Flash/Camera Port to the camera’s sync terminal. The PlusX can also be connected to almost any flash using the appropriate sync cable. Visit the PocketWizard [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder] to find the correct cable for your camera or flash.

===Powering On/Off===
Locate the switch on the left hand side of the radio (with the channel selector facing you). When the switch is down the unit is off and when in the up position it is on. When the unit is on the Channel Selector will be lit up and the Battery Indicator will blink.

===Channels===
To change the channel on your radio simply turn the Channel Selector to find your desired channel. Turning the Channel Selector clockwise will change the channel in ascending order, turning it counter-clockwise will change the channel in descending order. When selecting your channel, make sure that the dial fully clicks into place otherwise you may not be transmitting/receiving on the correct channel.

Note: All radios MUST be on the same channel to properly trigger remote flashes or cameras (except when using [[#Auto-Relay|Auto-Relay]]).

===Battery Indicator===
The LED on the top of the PlusX will blink three different colors ('''green''', '''amber''', and '''red''') at different intervals to indicate the remaining battery power.

*One '''green''' blink indicates between 100% to 50% remaining battery life.
*Two '''amber''' blinks indicates between 50% to 25% remaining battery life.
*Three '''red''' blinks indicates less than 25% remaining battery life.

===PlusX FAQ===

Having trouble with your PlusX? Check out our [[PlusX FAQ]] page!

==Remote Flash Triggering==
[[File:PlusX Remote Flash Triggering.jpg|right|300px|]]
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Attach a PlusX to your camera’s hot shoe. You may also connect the PlusX radio to your camera’s PC sync port using the appropriate cable.
# Connect a PlusX to your remote flash via the appropriate sync cable.
# Select a Channel. Set any other PocketWizard radios to matching the previously set Channel.
# Take pictures normally at or below your camera’s X-sync speed.

'''Momentarily pressing the TEST button will test trigger the flash.'''

==Remote Camera Triggering==
With transmitting and receiving PocketWizard® radios set to the same channel, remote flashes will be synchronized with the camera.

# Connect PlusX to your remote camera via the appropriate remote camera cable.
# Select a Channel.
# Press the TEST button on the transmitting PocketWizard radio or fire the camera in your hands. The remote camera will trigger.

NOTE: If you are using a handheld camera with a transmitting radio to trigger a remote camera at the same time, we suggest using a cable on BOTH cameras for best results. Some camera settings automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent shooting, or the fastest FPS setting. In these cases, you will need to use a cable on the handheld camera as the camera will not send a signal through the hot shoe.

==Features==
===Transmit Only Mode===
Transmit Only mode allows you to disable the receiver function of the PlusX. Use this mode when sharing remote flashes with other photographers. This mode will prevent other photographers from triggering the PlusX on your camera.

To put the PlusX into Transmit Only Mode:

#Start with the radio powered off.
#Press and hold the TEST button.
#Turn on the radio and then release the TEST button

If performed correctly the selected Channel and LED should blink every couple seconds. In this mode, the PlusX will not be able to receive a signal, it will only transmit signals. Do not select this if you are connecting a PlusX to a receiving flash. To disable this mode simply turn the radio off and then back on again.

===Auto-Relay===
[[File:PlusX auto relay.jpg|right|320px]]
Auto-Relay allows you to trigger remote flashes in sync with a remote camera and requires only three PocketWizard radios. Using Auto-Relay is the only situation where not all PocketWizard radios are set to the same channel since the relaying radio triggers them one channel higher than it received on.

To preform Auto-Relay:

#Set your transmitting PocketWizard radio to your desired channel.
#Set the relaying PocketWizard radio for your remote camera to the same channel as the radio in your hands.
#Connect the relaying PocketWizard radio’s Flash/Camera Port to the remote camera triggering post of the camera via a remote camera cable.
#Slide the relaying PlusX into the remote camera’s hot shoe.
#Connect your remote flash to a PocketWizard receiving radio via the appropriate sync cable and set it to one channel higher than the transmitting PocketWizard radio in your hands.
# Press and release TEST on the PocketWizard transmitter in your hands to fire both the remote camera and remote flash in sync.

==Sustaining High Performance==
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
Your PocketWizard radios use the environment as a medium for transmitting and receiving radio signals. The performance of your radios depends on their placement in the environment, nearby radio interference, and the radios’ orientation and position relative to each other.

===Wireless Basics===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
Whenever possible, maintain a line of sight between radios and keep antennas parallel. Make sure radios are not near any large metal, concrete, or high water-content objects. People and trees are mostly water! Make sure radios are not blocked by these objects or by hills.

The PlusX Transceiver’s antenna is fairly omnidirectional and its orientation should not significantly impact performance in most shooting scenarios, but optimizing for radio reception will always improve the maximum range.

Maintain at least a 12” distance between antennas. Avoid direct antenna contact with anything metallic. “Dead spots” have a number of causes, but the solution is usually the same: move the radio a few inches or feet away from the problem area.

==Technical Information==
{|
|'''Frequency'''
|FCC/IC model: 344.04MHz
CE model: 433.62 MHz
|-
|'''Channels'''
|10 Standard Channels with Legacy firmware

Reverse compatible with ''all'' PocketWizard radios using Standard Channels using the same frequency.
|-
|'''Zones'''
|Single zone
|-
|'''Antenna'''
| Precision tuned internal coil
|-
|'''Channel Setting'''
|Backlit rotating dial
|-
|'''Range'''
| Up to 1,600 feet (500 meters)

(Actual range is dependent on multiple factors including equipment, mode, environment, positioning, orientation and interference)
|-
|'''Sync Speed'''
| Up to 1/250 for focal plane shutters
|-
|'''Triggering Speed'''
| Up to 14.5 FPS
|-
|'''Contact Time'''
|62 milliseconds in normal operation
|-
|'''Status Indicator'''
| LED: Green, Amber, Red status indications

Solid Red: Triggering signal sending or receiving

Single Green Blink: Status OK, > 50% battery life

Double Amber Blink: Battery life < 50% but > 25%

Triple Red Blink: Battery life < 25%, change batteries
|-
|'''Transmit Output Power'''
| Less than 1 milliwatt (0.001 watt)
|-
|'''Power'''
| Two (2), AA (LR6), 1.5v alkaline recommended

NiMH, NiCAD, NiZn, Lithium acceptable (these chemistries may not report battery life accurately)

DO NOT USE 3.6V Li-Ion AA cells!
|-
|'''Battery Life'''
| Up to 100 hours (with alkaline batteries)

Batteries

2024-09-16T02:14:01Z

Heathers: /* Battery Chemistry */ made more generic instead of just Mini/Flex

{{recommended reading|Status LED|}}

Some PocketWizard radios require batteries.

__TOC__

'''CAUTION'''

'''Turn OFF your equipment (PocketWizard units, electronic flash units, cameras, etc.) before making connections or changing batteries.'''

==Battery Chemistry==

PocketWizard radios will operate reliably using just about any pair of ~1.5 volt AA batteries, regardless of the type of battery chemistry. Alkaline, lithium, nickel metal hydride, nickel cadmium, and other battery chemistrys may vary somewhat in total life expectancy, but all are compatible. PocketWizard radios will report the most accurate remaining battery life using Alkaline batteries, since other chemistrys have a slightly different voltage discharge curve, which is how the remaining life is measured.

Regardless of the particular battery chemistry, the radios regulate the battery power which gives excellent performance throughout the entire life of the batteries. The units will continue to function normally until the batteries are nearly exhausted.

The voltage regulation in our radios is very efficient. There is usually only a small benefit when using lithium (non-rechargeable) batteries. Lithium batteries are designed for the quick burst high current draw found in cameras and portable flash devices. Expect only a 10-20% longer battery life (approximate) over alkaline batteries when using lithium batteries.

== FlexTT5, Canon or Nikon ==
[[File:FlexTT5 Battery Polarity.jpg|thumb|300px|Note proper polarity]]

Install 2 fresh AA (IEC:LR6) batteries into the FlexTT5 Transceiver. Make sure to note proper polarity.

Alkaline batteries are recommended. Rechargeable or other chemistry batteries will also work, though life expectancy may vary.

Life expectancy = approximately 60 hours with alkaline batteries.
{{clear}}

== MiniTT1, Canon or Nikon ==
[[File:MiniTT1_Battery_Polarity.jpg|thumb|300px|Note proper polarity]]

The MiniTT1 saves batteries by automatically entering an extremely low power state when the camera enters sleep mode, or if not on a camera and TEST is not pressed for 10 seconds.

Install a fresh CR2450 coin cell battery into the MiniTT1 Transmitter. Make sure to note proper polarity. When the battery is in the radio, you should be able to see the + sign.

Life expectancy varies based on usage profile, as well as camera and flash models. When using a CR2450:
* Canon MiniTT1 = 100’s of hours/thousands of triggers
* Nikon MiniTT1 = approximately 30 hours of camera awake time

[[Misc Tab | Basic Trigger]] Mode consumes the coin cell battery more quickly and is not recommended when using the MiniTT1 for Nikon on a Nikon camera, or when using the MiniTT1 for Canon on a Canon camera.

Low temperature can significantly affect coin cell performance. Always use fresh batteries in cold temperatures. Make sure to read the [[Safety Warnings]] about temperature.
{{clear}}

== MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Status LED ==

<div style="float: right;"><videoflash>ooEGUQ4yX2g&loop=1&rel=0&autoplay=0|225|155</videoflash></div>

Look at the normal [[Status LED]] blink to determine battery level, or use the PocketWizard Utility.

;LED Blink:
1 Green blink = More than 50% remaining

2 Amber blinks = Warning – less than 50% remaining

3 Red blinks = Less than 25% remaining – change immediately

These battery levels are tuned for alkaline batteries in the FlexTT5 and a standard Lithium coin cell
in the MiniTT1. Other battery chemistries can work, but their battery level may not be reported
accurately.

'''Please note:''' The LED battery level blinks are based on the discharge curve and voltages of standard Alkaline batteries. Those are the most common and most predictable. Rechargeables have slightly different voltages, very different discharge curves, and, considering the different chemistries and aging of the batteries, are less predictable from the LED's perspective. It would be nearly impossible for us to make an LED battery level blink that accommodated all chemistries and aging of rechargeables.

You can still use your rechargeable batteries, but you need to build your own mental map of how they perform over time. If your rechargeables last 20 hours, then plan accordingly. If they blink amber when fully charged, then work with that information. If they only last a few hours when the LED blinks red, then use that information. The radios will reliably measure the voltages, but the LED colors and blinks will have different meanings for your batteries relative to alkalines.

The radios will continue to work reliably and consistently until the batteries are exhausted. They are low current draw devices, and take very little power from the batteries to operate. They will have the same range and performance when the LED is green, amber or red. At the very end of the batteries life (LED has been red for a while) they might begin to have issues depending on how well the batteries recover at low voltage, but up until that very end point they should operate identically shot to shot.

== MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Battery Meter in the PocketWizard Utility ==

To see your battery level in the PocketWizard Utility, make sure your MiniTT1 or FlexTT5 are turned on (set to C.1 or C.2) before you connect the USB cable. Hover your mouse cursor over the battery icon to get an exact voltage and battery status.

== Storage ==

For all PocketWizard products,the storage temperature range, without batteries, is above -30° C (-22° F) and below 85° C (185° F).

'''Always remove batteries during storage.'''

== Battery Warnings ==

WARNING – To avoid battery leakage, follow these guidelines:

* Always remove the batteries when the unit is not in use for extended periods of time, or during shipping or long distance travel.

* Never mix old and new batteries. Always use a fresh pair of matched batteries.

* Always change batteries promptly at the first indication of low battery operation.

* Do not use or leave the unit in extreme temperature or humid environments.

[[Category:MiniTT1 and FlexTT5|1]]

Sekonic RT-32CTL module

2024-09-13T02:14:32Z

Heathers: /* PocketWizard Radios */ fixed layout

With the Sekonic RT-32CTL module in your meter, you can trigger PocketWizard ControlTL radios, including the FlexTT5, FlexTT6, PowerM2, and PowerST4, using Legacy ControlTL Channels. The module can also trigger Legacy Standard Channels, for all PocketWizard radios using Legacy firmware. This lets you meter your remote flashes completely wirelessly.
The module cannot trigger using E Release Channels at this point.
[[File:Sekonic rt32.JPG|right|400px]]

==Compatibility==

===Sekonic Meters===
The RT-32CTL module can be used in the L-358, L-758D, and L-758CINE meters. It is pre-installed in to the L-758DR, C-500R, and C-700R-U models. Please see this [https://sekonic.com/classroom/about-radio-triggering-of-pocketwizard-system/ Sekonic blog page] for details

===PocketWizard Radios===

*FlexTT5 (Canon and Nikon)
*FlexTT6 Canon
*Plus series (Plus, Plus II, PlusX, Plus III, Plus IV)
*MultiMAX, MultiMAX II
*PowerST4
*PowerMC2

NOTE: RT-32 modules can only use Legacy firmware, they are not currently compatible with the E Release firmware protocol.
'''[[PocketWizard Firmware|Click here]]''' for details about firmware protocols.

==Channels==

When using the RT-32CTL module in your compatible Sekonic light meter, It will simultaneously send trigger signals out on both your selected Standard Channel and selected ControlTL Channel when pressing the meter’s triggering button.

Standard Channels are used with Plus series and MultiMAX radios, as well as many flash packs with built-in PocketWizard radios.
ControlTL Channels are used with the MiniTT1, FlexTT5 with Speedlites, FlexTT5 with the AC9 AlienBees Adapter, PowerST4, and PowerMC2.

Newer L-758 DigitalMaster light meters can select Standard and ControlTL Channels and zones independently.

The L-358, and previous versions of the L-758 meter, use a channel mapping mode (see table below) to pair up Standard and ControlTL channels automatically.

Learn more about PocketWizard Channels [[Channels|here.]]

[https://www.youtube.com/watch?v=zOOq3sX6Ki4&t This episode of PWTV] will show you how use the meters with the radios. One important note: The meter in this video has the RT-32N module, for Standard Channels only. If you have the RT-32CTL meter, do NOT uncheck the "Use ControlTL for Receive Channel" box.

'''To select Channels on the L-358:'''

*Turn on the Sekonic light meter.
*Hold the Mode button and use the scroll wheel to select the wireless metering mode option.(wireless metering icon pictured on the right)
*Once the Channel selection page comes on screen release the Mode button and use the scroll wheel to select your Channel.
[[File:Wireless Metering.JPG|thumb|Wireless Metering icon]]
*If using Zones (only available on Channels 17-32) press the mode button once to select Zone “A” and then use the scroll wheel to select/deselect the Zone. Press the mode button to switch between Zones.
*Once you have your Channel (and Zones if applicable) set, hold the Mode button and move the scroll wheel one click to the right.

'''To select Channels on the L-758 (all models)'''

*Turn on the Sekonic light meter.
*Hold the Mode button and use the scroll wheel to select the wireless metering mode option.
*Once the Channel selection page comes on screen release the Mode button and use the scroll wheel to select your Channel.
*If using Zones (only available on Channels 17-32) use the four buttons on the meter labeled in blue with A,B,C, and D.
*Once you have your Channel (and Zones if applicable) set, press the triggering button located on the right side of the meter.

'''Sekonic Channel mapping'''

<table border="1">
<tr>
<th rowspan="2">Meter Channel</th>
<th colspan="2">Standard Channel</th>
<th colspan="2">ControlTL Channel</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<th>Plus II</th>
<th>Plus III/MultiMAX</th>
<th>FCC</th>
<th>CE</th>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">1</td>
<td align="center">1</td>
<td align="center">1</td>
<td align="center">1 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">1 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">2</td>
<td align="center">2</td>
<td align="center">2</td>
<td align="center">2 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">2 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">3</td>
<td align="center">3</td>
<td align="center">3</td>
<td align="center">3 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">3 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">4</td>
<td align="center">4</td>
<td align="center">4</td>
<td align="center">4 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">5</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">5</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">6</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">6</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">7</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">7</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">8</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">8</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">9</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">9</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">10</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">10</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">11</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">11</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">12</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">12</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">13</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">13</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">14</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">14</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">15</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">15</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">16</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">16</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">17 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">17 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">5 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">1 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">18 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">18 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">6 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">2 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">19 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">19 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">7 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">3 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">20 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">20 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">8 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">1 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">21 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">21 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">9 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">2 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">22 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">22 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">10 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">3 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">23 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">23 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">11 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">1 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">24 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">24 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">12 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">2 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">25 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">25 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">13 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">3 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">26 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">26 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">14 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">1 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">27 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">27 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">15 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">2 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">28 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">28 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">16 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">3 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">29 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">29 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">17 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">1 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">30 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">30 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">18 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">2 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">31 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">31 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">19 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">3 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
<tr>
<td align="center">32 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">-</td>
<td align="center">32 Zone ABCD</td>
<td align="center">20 Zone ABC</td>
<td align="center">1 Zone ABC</td>
</tr>
</table>

Cables

2024-06-16T02:49:28Z

Heathers:

==Remote Camera Cables==

Using a remote camera lets you explore creativity and expand photographic coverage in unique ways. On location, remote cameras can be where you physically can't. Get shots no one else can by firing a remote camera at the same time you fire your main body. Two images, two perspectives, one photographer! In the studio, get out from behind the lens and really connect with your subjects.

To trigger a remote camera, you need at least one remote camera cable. If you want to trigger the camera by a handheld PocketWizard, you need a remote camera cable for each remote camera. If you want to trigger a remote camera from a handheld camera, you will need a cable for both cameras.

All of our current cables are stereo cables, with the capability to pre trigger the remote camera, depending on the radios you're using. These cables are also called -ACC cables.

Here's where you can find cables that enable you to fire a remote camera.

===Search By Cable===

Learn how each cable works with each type of radio

====-ACC Cables====

These cables have a stereo miniphone connector on one end and a camera-specific remote connector on the other. A camera can be remotely pre-released when connected via an -ACC cable to a compatible Pocketwizard radio. They can be used with the PlusX, Plus III, the ACC port on a MultiMAX or the P1 port on a FlexTT5.
 

''Note: As an added bonus, all -ACC cables shipped into the market starting July/August 2013 also include an MSMM Adapter (stereo to mono miniphone) which converts a -ACC cable to a Standard cable.''

*'''PlusX''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.
*'''Plus II''' - Use the MSMM adapter with this -ACC cable or use a Standard cable.
*'''Plus III''' - Use this cable with the Plus III’s exclusive 2-stage trigger to wake-up or focus your remote camera just like using the camera’s shutter release button.
*'''Plus IV''' - Use this cable with a Plus IV to remotely fire your camera. If you use a Plus III as a transmitter, you can use the Plus III’s exclusive 2-stage trigger to wake-up or focus your remote camera just like using the camera’s shutter release button.
*'''MultiMAX with no -ACC port''' - Use the MSMM adapter with this -ACC cable or use a Standard cable instead.
*'''MultiMAX with -ACC port''' - Enable a remote zone with your hand-held MultiMAX, and your remote MultiMAX will wake up its remote camera with this cable. As long as the zone is turned on, the remote camera will stay awake and respond more quickly and consistently, but also consume the camera's batteries much more quickly. When the remote zone is disabled, the camera will enter its normal sleep modes. The MultiMAX does not support the 2-stage trigger function.
*'''FlexTT5''' - This cable is required for auto-relay mode with TTL, or other remote triggering with the FlexTT5. You can use a –P cable or Standard cable with a FlexTT5, but your remote camera will not be able to relay a TTL signal to speedlights. The FlexTT5 does not support the 2-stage trigger function.
 

====-P Cables====
''Note: As of July 2013, we've replaced all -P cables with a Pre-Trigger Mono Miniphone (PTMM) Adapter. This adapter works with an -ACC cable to convert it from an -ACC cable to a Pre-Trigger (-P) cable for pre-releasing your shutter. So if you are looking for a -P cable and cannot find one, ask your local or online retailer for the appropriate -ACC cable and a PTMM Adapter and you'll be good to go.''

These cables have a mono miniphone connector on one end and a camera-specific remote connector on the other. They also have a pre-release switch built into the cable itself. When the switch is engaged (set to |), the connected camera behaves as if its shutter button is held down half way. This lets the camera respond more quickly and consistently, but at the expense of battery life. When the switch is turned off (set to o), the cable behaves like a Standard cable. Pre-release cables can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode. Note: when the switch is engaged, image review is not available on the camera until the cable is switched off.
 

*'''PlusX''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position.
*'''Plus II''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position.
*'''Plus III''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position. Use an –ACC cable for best results (without the PTMM adapter) and to have half-press capability from the camera's position when using a Plus III as the transmitter.
*'''Plus IV''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position. Use an –ACC cable for best results (without the PTMM adapter) and to have half-press capability from the camera's position when using a Plus III as the transmitter.
*'''MultiMAX with no -ACC port''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position.
*'''MultiMAX with –ACC port''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera but cannot wake up the camera in a remote zone. Use an -ACC cable for best results.
*'''FlexTT5''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position, but your remote camera will not be able to relay a TTL signal to speedlights. The radio will need to be set to [[Misc Tab | Basic Trigger]] mode and use Standard Channels. Use an –ACC cable for best results.
 
''Note: You do not need to use the MSMM adapter if you are using an -ACC cable and the PTMM adapter with a Plus II or MultiMAX with no -ACC port.''

====Standard Cables====
''Note: All Standard cables have been discontinued at this point. But all -ACC cables shipped into the market starting July/August 2013 include an MSMM Adapter (stereo to mono miniphone) which converts a -ACC cable to a Standard cable.''

These cables have a mono miniphone connector on one end and a camera-specific remote connector on the other. They can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode.
 

*'''PlusX''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.
*'''Plus II''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.
*'''Plus III''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera but it has no half-press control. Use an –ACC cable for half-press control.
*'''Plus IV''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera but it has no half-press control. Use a Plus III as a transmitter and an –ACC cable for half-press control.
*'''MultiMAX with no -ACC port''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.
*'''MultiMAX with –ACC port''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera but it has no half-press control. Use an -ACC cable for best results.
*'''FlexTT5''' - This cable can be used to remotely fire your camera, like a –P cable or Standard cable with a FlexTT5, but your remote camera will not be able to relay a TTL signal to speedlights. The radio will need to be set to [[Misc Tab | Basic Trigger]] mode and use Standard Channels. Use an –ACC cable for best results. Use an –ACC cable for best results.
 

===Search By Radio===

Learn which cable will work best for your needs, based on your radios.

====PlusX====
*'''-ACC Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.
*'''-P Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position.
*'''Standard Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.

====Plus II====
*'''-ACC Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.
*'''-P Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position.
*'''Standard Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.

====Plus III====
*'''-ACC Cable''' - Use this cable with the Plus III’s exclusive 2-stage trigger to wake-up or focus your remote camera just like using the camera’s shutter release button.
*'''-P Cable''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position. Use an –ACC cable for best results (with no PTMM adapter) and to have half-press capability from a transmitting Plus III.
*'''Standard Cable''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera but it has no half-press control. Use an –ACC cable for half-press control.

====Plus IV====
*'''-ACC Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera. If you use a Plus III as a trnamsitter, you can use the Plus III’s exclusive 2-stage trigger to wake-up or focus your remote camera just like using the camera’s shutter release button.
*'''-P Cable''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position. Use an –ACC cable for best results (with no PTMM adapter) and to have half-press capability from a transmitting Plus III.
*'''Standard Cable''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera but it has no half-press control. Use an –ACC cable for half-press control from a transmitting Plus III.

====MultiMAX with no -ACC Port====
*'''-ACC Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.
*'''-P Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position.
*'''Standard Cable''' - Use this cable to remotely fire your camera.

====MultiMAX with -ACC Port====
*'''-ACC Cable''' - Enable a remote zone with your hand-held MultiMAX, and your remote MultiMAX will wake up its remote camera with this cable. As long as the zone is turned on, the remote camera will stay awake and respond more quickly and consistently, but also consume the camera's batteries much more quickly. When the remote zone is disabled, the camera will enter its normal sleep modes. The MultiMAX does not support the 2-stage trigger function.
*'''-P Cable''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera but cannot wake up the camera in a remote zone. Use an -ACC cable for best results.
*'''Standard Cable''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera but it has no half-press control. Use an -ACC cable for best results

====FlexTT5====
*'''-ACC Cable''' - This cable is required for auto-relay mode with TTL, or other remote triggering with the FlexTT5. You can use a –P cable or Standard cable with a FlexTT5, but your remote camera will not be able to relay a TTL signal to speedlights. The FlexTT5 does not support the 2-stage trigger function.
*'''-P Cable''' - This cable can remotely fire your camera and control half-press function at the camera’s position, but your remote camera will not be able to relay a TTL signal to speedlights. Use an –ACC cable for best results.
*'''Standard Cable''' - This cable can be used to remotely fire your camera, like a –P cable or Standard cable with a FlexTT5, but your remote camera will not be able to relay a TTL signal to speedlights. Use an –ACC cable for best results.
 

== Flash Cables ==

PocketWizard Transceivers need a connecting cable to trigger your flash. Surf through the variety of connector styles and lengths [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/flash_sync_cables/ here] or try the [http://www.pocketwizard.com/support/cable_finder/ PocketWizard Cable Finder] to locate the exact cable required for most major brands of flash.

== PC Sync Cables ==

Connect your PocketWizard radio to the ubiquitous PC terminal.
*Does your camera's hot shoe have a flash in it and you need to connect your transmitting PocketWizard radio to the PC sync terminal?
*Do you need to trigger a PC terminal equipped hot shoe flash?
*Using a medium format camera with lens PC sync only?
Find what you need right [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/synccables/ here].

== Cable Accessories ==

Even accessories need accessories. Look [http://www.pocketwizard.com/products/cable_accessory/accessories/ here] for buttons, adapters, rods, and more!

Power Control for Non-Compatible Cameras

2024-06-16T02:27:05Z

Heathers:

PocketWizard Games

2024-06-03T02:40:51Z

Heathers: /* CABLES ARE CRITICAL! */ added 13377

'''You can use Google Translate to view this Wiki in a different language. Go to [https://translate.google.com translate.google.com], then type ''wiki.pocketwizard.com'' into the box. Click the arrow in the box to see the new page.'''

This page was specifically designed to help support photographers at The Games in Tokyo for July 2021. The information here can also be helpful for any events with large quantities of photographers. This page was created by Shawn Cullen, a veteran of many large sporting events and Heather Simons, PocketWizard Tech Support Manager. It is designed to help you with setup, answer questions, and includes basic troubleshooting ideas. It will also let you know about special features that you may not be aware of. For best results, we suggest that photographers use Plus III radios with the E Release firmware and strongly consider installing a Custom ID on their units.

==PocketWizard Radios and Firmware==

'''August 1, 2020: SEE NOTE [[#The E Release and Custom IDs|BELOW]] FOR NEW PLUS III FIRMWARE UPDATE!'''

MultiMAX radios have been the gold standard for triggering remotes at sporting events and are known for their rock solid reliability. Our firmware has worked well over the past 30 years but since it was released, there have been many changes in technology. In today’s world, there are a lot more products that can cause RF interference than ever before, between television cameras, LED scoreboards, and simply far more photographers on the field at the same time.

At PocketWizard, we wanted to ensure that photographers would never miss a shot. We released the new E Release firmware protocol on September 19th, 2019. This new special firmware upgrade for PocketWizard Plus III radios extends the signal range drastically. It is also less susceptible to RF interference.

PocketWizard FCC radios use a frequency range of 340-354 MHz. With Legacy firmware, Standard Channels 1-16 have the same frequency of 344.04 while the frequency of QuadZone Triggering Channels 17 to 32 ranges from 346.50 to 354.00 MHz. These Channels allow the user to assign their radios to 4 different Zones as well as having more advanced coding functions and features.

The E Release can more than double the shooting distance of our Legacy firmware and now offers QuadZone Triggering on all Channels. It has E Release Channels 1-32 for flash triggering and adds new LR Channels 1-80, designed specifically for triggering remote cameras. With the new E Release firmware upgrade, each individual channel now has its own separate frequency, so no more Channels sharing the same frequencies, as 1-16 used to. This is especially helpful to increase channel and frequency separation between users.

Besides the increase in the number of additional channels, the E Release firmware enhances the frequency reliability by eliminating frequency drift and making it a more stable frequency over a longer distance.

The E Release firmware is available for the Plus III, the Plus IV, and the Nikon FlexTT5. It is not currently available for the MultiMAX radios. Any new Plus III or Plus IV radios were shipped with the firmware pre-installed and are now called Plus IIIe or Plus IVe radios. You can upgrade any existing units to the E Release by simply purchasing a license for each radio and upgrading through our Utility program. Learn more [https://pocketwizard.com/e-release-firmware/ here].

==Custom IDs and Frequency==

===The Truth about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID can be a valuable asset to a photographer at a major event, as it ensures that nobody else can trigger your Channel.

===A Misconception about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID is NOT a "private frequency"! It is a common misconception that you are getting your own frequency, you are not! A Custom ID which is an exclusive digital code that rides on top of the PocketWizard device frequencies. This exclusive digital code prevents other users from triggering your remote camera or strobes. However, this does not mean you are completely protected. It is possible that other PocketWizard users on the same frequency can block your signal to your receiver, and you can block theirs, even though you have this digital code.

===How Custom IDs Actually Work===

When a Custom ID is created for your device, you are given a 3 digit Custom ID and it is traditionally assigned to Channel 17. However, the Custom ID channel does not use Channel 17’s frequency. The actual frequency used for the ID will vary, depending on your Custom ID code. Most Custom ID’s are placed within channel 17 to 32 since channels 1-16 share the same frequency. Custom ID code information is kept securely and confidentially on file by PocketWizard. Nobody can be assigned to your code and there are no duplicates.

The reason for assigning the Custom ID to Channel 17 with Legacy firmware is due to the Reset feature within the MultiMAX, MultiMAX II, and Plus III. It is recommended every time you turn on your device, do a reset at start up so that any timing delays or other features last use are cleared out, and the device is set to factory default which is Channel 17 with all Zones active.

==Knowing your PocketWizard Frequency==

In situations where you have multiuser environments such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, you need to know your exact Custom ID frequency. This way you know if others will be triggering on your frequency, which could cause issues. If you need to change your Custom ID to another channel for channel separation from other users, you can move the ID to a different frequency if you are using MultiMAX and MultiMAX II radios. However, you can only move it within the 16-channel spread between Channels 17-32.

Switching from TxRx to LR (Long Range mode) does not change your frequency or create channel separation from other users if you have Legacy firmware! LR uses the exact same frequencies, and your receiver can still be blocked by other users. To view your Custom ID and the frequency it is on, for the MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, you can press and hold "A" on your MultiMAX and slide the power switch to one of the ON positions (Transmit or Receive) to display your Custom ID. For the Plus III there should be a label inside the battery compartment with your Custom ID and frequency information.

Let’s use the 100-meter dash at the Games as an example. There will be at least 50+ photographers covering the event, and just think how many remote cameras will be set up just for the finish line. With every photographer triggering their remotes all at the same time as the athletes cross the finish line, with all of those frequencies in the air, the potential for signal blocking is very high! Remember, every Channel between 17 to 32 has a different frequency, but there are only 16 Channels from 17 to 32, so there will be some overlap with Custom IDs. Because Channels 1-16 share the same frequency, 344.04MHz, so there is no point in having your Custom ID set to this frequency. So, with 50+ photographers and possibly 25-30 remotes set up, with only a 16-channel spread for all those Custom ID’s to be placed on, you can see why it is important to know your Custom ID frequency. You need to know what frequency will work best for you and possibly get some Channel separation from everyone else. You can look at the PocketWizard Channel sign-up sheet in the media room to see who is set up on the different channels and know if anyone is set up on the same frequency as your Custom ID.

You can find the frequencies for the different Channels on our [[Channels]] Wiki page.

==The E Release and Custom IDs==

The Plus III units with the E Release and Custom IDs work a little differently. Unlike the Legacy firmware, your Custom ID will use the frequency that the ID is assigned to. For example, when you use your Plus III with Legacy firmware, your Custom ID is assigned to Channel 17 (346.5 MHz) but it may actually trigger on Channel 23’s frequency (349.5 MHz). When you upgrade your radio to the E Release, your Custom ID will trigger on the same frequency as Channel 17, but with E Release frequencies (345.80 MHz for regular Channels or 343.20 MHz for LR Channels).

'''You can now move the Custom ID installed on your Plus IIIe radio to a different frequency and Channel. Please see the '''[[Plus III#Plus_III_CUSTOM_ID|Plus III Custom ID]]''' page for details.'''

==The Essentials of Remote Camera Triggering - Tips from Shawn==

When setting up your remote camera there is a lot to consider and think about. Obviously, you want to select the best spot for composition of the image but the way your PocketWizard device is also very important. You will need to determine the best location to mount the receiver, plus consider other factors as well to ensure that receiver unit can receive the signal from the transmitter consistently and reliably. Shawn has set up literally thousands of cameras at various events, from small gyms to international stadiums, all around the world. His tips and tricks are incredibly valuable and have served him well over the years.

{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
|'''NEW FIRMWARE UPDATES'''

Firmware 2.717 or higher: This firmware adds a new mode: Rx LR. This mode is specifically designed for remote camera triggering, when you have a camera in your hand transmitting to a remote camera. Use regular LR mode for the transmitting radio and Rx LR on the remote radio. IMPORTANT: You should also DISABLE the hot shoe on the remote camera. You can do this by taking it out of the hot shoe, turning the camera's hot shoe off, or by holding in the D button till the display changes from CH to Cd to indicate the Plus III's hot shoe is disabled.

'''Plus IIIe current firmware:'''

'''2.740''': This firmware is for most cameras. This will allow the Plus III to be connected to either a mono or stereo cable. If you are using a button trigger or footpedal with the transmitting radio, you MUST use this firmware version for the transmitter, even if you are using remote Sony camera.

'''2.840''': This firmware is for Sony cameras. The Plus III will ONLY trigger with a stereo cable. If you are using a remote Sony camera, you MUST use 2.840 on the remote Plus III. You can use 2.740 on the transmitting radio, even if you are transmitting from another camera (Sony or otherwise) or from a mono connection. You can also use 2.840 on the transmitting radio as long as you have a stereo connection.

Please contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] if you need more help.
|}

===CABLES ARE CRITICAL!===

To trigger a remote camera, you need to use a remote camera cable to connect the PocketWizard to the camera. This allows the radio to trigger the camera through the camera's remote port.

When you are using a mirrorless camera in your hand (with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe) to trigger a remote camera, you '''MUST''' use a cable on the handheld camera as well as one on the remote camera. Many settings on the camera will automatically disable the hot shoe. Using a cable connected to the remote port will ensure the transmitting radio will get a trigger signal from the handheld camera. It is always more reliable than the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. We also suggest disabling the hot shoe on Plus III radios for best results. Hold in the D Zone button for a few seconds until the display changes from CH to Cd.

'' '''SONY USERS:''' for your transmitting camera/PocketWizard with Plus III or Plus IV radios, you '''MUST''' use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your handheld camera as well as one on the remote camera. For the remote cameras, you can use the S-VPR1-ACC, the 13377-S, OR the 13369-S (with the USB power tail).''

There are 6 main cables, based on camera connections:
*N10-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 10 pin connection, like the D6
*N-MCDC2-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 4 pin MCDC2 port, like the Z series
*CM-N3-ACC: for Canon cameras with the 3 pin port, like the 1DX Mark III
*CM-E3-ACC: for cameras with the 2.5 mm subminiphone port, like most Canon mirrorless as well as many Fuji or Olympus cameras
*S-VPR1-ACC: for Sony cameras with the micro USB port, like the a9 II, when using the Plus III or Plus IV radios
*13377-S: for Sony cameras with the micro USB port, like the a9 II, when using the PlusX radios
If you are not sure which cable you need, you can [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact us] at PocketWizard support.

===TxRx or LR mode===
The main options are: TxRx (Transmit or Receive), Tx Only (Transmit Only), Rx
Only (Receive Only), and LR (Long Range mode). With Plus III firmware 2.716 or higher, you will also have RxLR. For more details and other modes, please see the MultiMAX or Plus III pages. Rx LR mode increases the contact time for your remote camera, which gives you more reliable and consistent triggering, especially in continuous drive mode.

Personally, I always choose LR (Long Range) mode for triggering remote cameras. It is a slightly slower traveling signal, specifically designed for frequency stability. This keeps the signal true to the transmitted frequency, limiting the frequency drift to prevent it from spreading to adjacent frequencies or Channels. This frequency stability increases signal reliability and distance. The new Rx LR mode also increases contact time on the remote camera, resulting in more reliable triggering. If you have that option, you should be using LR mode on your transmitting radio and RxLR mode for the remote radios.

TxRx mode is mostly intended for use with strobes. It has smaller packets of data being transmitted which allows it to be transmitted and received at faster speeds. These signals allow you to trigger up to X-sync. LR mode has much larger packets of data which transmit at slower speeds. This holds the frequency stable but you will lose a stop or two of sync speed. TxRx mode cannot accept these larger packets with is why you cannot combine the different modes.

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR SONY SHOOTERS: If triggering from a handheld camera to a remote camera with Plus III radios: you must use firmware 2.716 or higher. Use LR mode for your transmitting radio and use RxLR for your remote radios.

===Placement of the Receiver: Hot Shoe vs Railing===

This really depends on the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, and how close the receiver might be to metal objects when placed in the hot shoe. As a general rule, you want to keep the radios away from metal. All digital products, including cameras, are known to put out small amounts of RFN noise or interference. With the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, this amount of RF Noise could definitely be a factor in the transmitted signal being blocked from the receiver. Whenever possible, mount the receiver to a metal railing for stability, using an Isolation/Mounting bar and super clamp to extend the distance away from the metal railing. I fully understand how much space and weight a Super Clamp requires, however it can mean the difference in the ability to trigger the remote camera or not. I never ever suggest putting the receiver on the ground. If the remote camera is set up on the floor, then the hot shoe would be best spot, to at least get the unit higher off the ground. Also, try to avoid placing your receiver next to any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content.

===Height of PocketWizard Device from Ground Level===
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
The height of the PocketWizard device from the ground level is an extremely significant factor to think about. The ground can definitely cut down the signal distance and quality, plus increase the frequency spread to other frequencies. You do not need to mount the receiving radio in the hot shoe of the camera. You can mount the radio in a better position for reception and put the camera where you want it. Remote camera cables are available in 1’ or 3’ lengths and a 10’ extension cable is available to help with extreme situations

===Maintain line of sight to transmitter===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
In smaller venues this may not be such a big deal, but why risk it? With so much RF noise at major events, line of sight to the transmitter should be the top priority when setting up the receiver. Always make sure you can see the transmitter from the receiver once it is mounted and keep the antennas parallel. The only exception to keeping the antennas parallel is when setting up remote cameras in higher elevated positions. I routinely place the receiver upside down so the antenna is more exposed to the rising signal at a lower level. (Note from PocketWizard: upside down is usually not recommended but in extreme situations may be the best course of action.)

===Mini phone extensions and Isolation/Mounting Bar===
I always make it a practice to carry some miniphone extension cables like the PocketWizard MMX for those situations where I need to mount the receiver in places the remote camera cable will not reach. There are also situations where you might want to place the transmitter off the camera to obtain line of sight to the receiver unit. For example, when shooting under an overhang, or dugout. I suggest having options from 10’ to 20’ mini phone extensions just to make sure you can place the receiver in the best spot possible. However, with the longer cables try to avoid running your cables near any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content. The MMX is a 10' cable.

As mentioned earlier, Isolation/Mounting bars are very useful in placing your PocketWizard device in a more optimal position for receiving or transmitting a signal. These are called MB4s and are sold in 4” lengths, however you can connect two of them together by threading one into the other to make an 8” length. And don’t forget about key rings to run your safety cables through. Never ever use the lanyards that come with the PocketWizard devices. They were not designed with intent to be used as a safety when mounting remote cameras. Make sure that the key ring is big enough to slip through the eyelet on the Plus III, and big enough to to slip the safety cable through.

===Hot Shoe Disable===
This feature that allows the photographer to disable the hot shoe contact of their radios. Hot Shoe Disable can be used on both the transmitter and receiver. There are a few reasons to use this feature.

When you’re using a handheld camera with a radio in the top shoe and triggering remote cameras, you may sometimes want to disable the hot shoe of the transmitting radio. This prevents the handheld camera from triggering your remotes with every picture taken, as the radio in the hot shoe won’t get the sync signal from the camera. Turning off the hot shoe gives the photographer the ability to use a trigger button cable (like the BT1) plugged into the transmitting radio, to trigger the remotes when you see fit, just by pressing on the trigger button.

The reason for disabling the hot shoe contact of the receiver is to prevent Auto Relay Mode from engaging. When using a Plus III in the hot shoe of a remote camera, connected by a remote cable, after triggering the camera, the Plus III will automatically transmit a relay signal one Channel higher than the signal it received. For example, if the transmitting radio and the Plus III receiver connected to the remote camera are set to Channel 1, the remote Plus III will then relay a transmitting signal on Channel 2 to trigger a third Plus III unit set to receive and set to Channel 2. This feature was designed in order to trigger strobes with the third Plus III unit. This is the way the product is designed to work.

However, if a second photographer is using Channel 2 and the first photographer is not using relay but just a remote camera, the relay signal could inadvertently trigger the second photographer’s equipment.

In a situation such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, photographers need to register the Channels they plan to use. If a photographer is only planning on triggering remote cameras on (for example) Channel 24, another photographer could be assigned Channel 25. When the photographer using Channel 24 fires his camera remotely, his connected Plus III will trigger any PocketWizard receiver set to Channel 25.

We have also found that the hot shoes of some mirrorless cameras seem to behave differently with a radio in their hot shoe and may note properly trigger the camera. We suggest disabling the hot shoes of your Plus III radios for best results, especially if you are using a mirrorless camera.

====How to Disable a Plus III Hot Shoe====

Hold down the Zone D button for three seconds until the “CH” on the display changes to “Cd”. The Plus III will not receive any signal from its hot shoe. To enable the hot shoe contacts, simply hold the Zone D button for another three seconds until “Cd” switched back to “CH” on the display or turn the radio off. When the radio is turned back on, it will return to an active hot shoe.

*Legacy Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 1.215
*E Release Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 2.505 or greater

====How to Disable a MultiMAX Hot Shoe====

Start by turning on your MultiMAX to transmit. Then press the *MENU button. Next press the “L” button for Other Functions. Now you will press “B” for Hot Shoe Off. The MultiMAX will show what function is active. For example, if it says "Hot Shoe Off", the shoe is disabled. When you press *MENU L B again, it will change to "Hot Shoe On" and the shoe will be active again.

====Other Ways to Disable a Hot Shoe====

The camera thinks the PocketWizard in its shoe is a flash, which it triggers through the center pin contact. To disable this function, you need to break the connection between the radio and camera's center pins.

The easiest solution is to take the radio out of the remote camera's hot shoe. Unless you are using Relay mode, it does not need to be the in shoe.

One simple way to disable the hot shoe is to physically block the center pin connection, using a thin piece of tape or paper.

You can also turn the hot shoe off by using the camera's flash settings. Simply set the flash setting to "off".

Some settings in your camera will automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent mode, continuous high speed drive, and with Nikons, certain Live View options in the Custom Setting menu (usually d8-"Apply Changes to Live View"). Check your camera's instruction manual for details.

===Batteries vs AC Power Supplies===

Batteries have a finite life span, 50 to 60 hours, whereas AC power supplies can provide continuous power to your PocketWizard device for the duration of your needs, as long as a power outlet is within an acceptable distance.

You can use either AA alkaline or Lithium batteries to power the MultiMAX or Plus III. The Lithium batteries will only last about 10-20% longer than Alkaline batteries. However, they will die off at a faster rate at the end of their capacity than Alkaline batteries. You will need to keep an eye out for this.

AC power supplies obviously need a power outlet to plug into to power your PocketWizard device. It is up to you, the user, to decide what is an acceptable distance to run an extension cord to the nearest power outlet. Most modern arenas, stadium, and sports venues now have power outlets within 10’-20’ of each other eliminating the need for long extension cord runs.

The type of AC power supply depends on your PocketWizard device. The original MultiMAX has three options depending on what version of the MultiMAX you have. Please see the [[AC Adapters]] Wiki page to find the correct adapter for your specific MultiMAX.

The AC power supply for the MultiMAX II, Plus IV, and Plus III is the PW-AC-USB. In all honesty, if you find yourself in a pinch to power your Plus III with AC, you could even use an iPhone charging cube and a USB Mini B cable.

In the event of a power failure or a tripped circuit breaker for the outlet the AC power supply is plugged into, the MultiMAX USB, MultiMAX II, Plus III, and Plus IV, will all still operate as long as two fresh AA batteries are installed. Unfortunately, the first generation MultiMAX using the PW-AC-MX power supply will not work even with batteries installed.

==Troubleshooting & Best Practices==

It is important to know some basic troubleshooting techniques. When you are out in the field and have an issue, you can often isolate and solve the problem by just knowing what to do first. Below are the most common solutions. For more detailed information and for other troubleshooting ideas, please download [[Media:Trouble Shooting - Remote Camera.pdf|this PDF]].

'''Sometimes we all just need a good reset.'''
A reset is ALWAYS one of the best places to start. It is easy to change something without realizing it. Here’s how to reset your radio:

MultiMAX: To reset your MultiMAX unit start with the unit turned OFF. Then press and hold in the C button and slide the power switch to Transmit. When you see the "CLEAR/RESET" message on the LCD screen, release the C button. The radio has now been reset to factory defaults and will automatically reset to channel 17 with all Zones enabled.

Plus III: To reset your Plus III unit, start by holding in the TEST button as you power the radio on. Once you see the LCD screen turn on you can release the TEST button.

*Legacy Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 17 with all Zones enabled.
*E Release Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 1 with all Zones enabled

'''Check your Firmware'''
It is always best to have the most recent firmware version running. To update all PocketWizard device’s that have a USB port you can use the PocketWizard Utility. You can learn more about it here.
To download the PocketWizard Utility click here

Here are the most up to date firmware available for PocketWizard devices
*MultiMAX with USB 7.53
*MultiMax II 8.117
*Plus III Legacy 1.215
*Plus IIIe (E Release) 2.740 / 2.840

'''Check or change your batteries and check your battery contacts'''
Fresh batteries are always a good idea. Also, check your internal battery contacts for signs of corrosion (usually blue or green) or rust. If the contacts are damaged, you can try cleaning them with a pencil eraser, rubbing them with aluminum foil, adding a drop or two of lemon juice or alcohol if needed. Be careful about getting any liquid onto the main board. If the damage is bad, you can usually replace the contacts or back cover.

'''Watch the Lights'''
The LED on your radio should go red briefly any time it sends or receives a signal.
-If your transmitter is not going red, check to see if you disabled the hot shoe on your radio or on your camera. (hint: Silent Shooting mode usually disables the shoe!). You can also use a pencil eraser to clean the hot shoe contacts on your camera and radio. Seems basic but has “fixed” a lot of “broken” equipment over the years.
-If your receiver is not going red, check to see if the radios are on the same Channels, Zones, and/or modes.
-If everything is going red but your remotes are not firing, check your cable. Press test on the radio connected to the camera or flash. If it doesn’t fire, there is an issue with the radio, the cable, or the sync port on the remote equipment.

'''Label Your Radios!'''
If you have 10 Plus III radios and have a problem with one unit, you’ll probably just swap it out for an immediate fix if you’re in a tight spot. But if you don’t know which radio you swapped out and that unit has a problem, how will you know that for next time? When testing equipment, it’s a good idea to label everything-your cameras, flashes, radios, and cables. Then you can swap things around and know what did or didn’t work and can narrow down the issue.

We hope these tips will help ensure a troublefree and successful photo shoot. Please do not hesitate to reach out to PocketWizard tech support for assistance if you are stuck. When contacting us, keep in mind we are typically available from about 10 am – 4 pm EST, Monday through Friday. We do work remotely sometimes and are not always in the office. If you have an urgent matter, please email us at [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] with the word URGENT in the subject line, so we can better see it. We will try to respond as soon as possible. We do check email on the weekends sometimes and will do our best to contact you as soon as possible.

Remote Camera Triggering

2024-06-03T02:35:45Z

Heathers: /* Remote Camera Cables */ added 13377 cables

__FORCETOC__
[[File:PlusIIIE RemoteCamera.jpg|350px|thumb|right|Sony a9, Plus IIIe, and S-VPR1-ACC cable]]
All PocketWizard radios can be used to remotely trigger a remote camera. You will need at least 2 PocketWizard radios and the correct PocketWizard remote camera cable. Different camera bodies have different remote camera connectors and require different cables. To find the right cable for your particular camera, you can use the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder].

==Basic Remote Camera Setup==
# Set the transmitting radios and the receiving radio on your camera to the same [[Channels|Channel]] and Zone (if applicable).
# Attach the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ remote camera cable] to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the camera's receiving radio.
# Turn on your equipment top to bottom (radio, then camera)
# Press TEST on the transmitting radio in your hand to trigger the remote camera.

===Best Practices===
*Be sure to press the TEST button deliberately, do not "jab" it. If you press too fast, the remote camera may not have time to wake up and confirm focus and exposure. If you are using a Plus III/IIIe as the transmitter with a Plus III or Plus IV as a receiver, you can half press the TEST button to pre trigger the camera. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)
*Remote cameras are often set up in places where photographers cannot go. This means that the remote camera could be positioned in situations that are less than ideal for good reception, like on the ground behind a soccer goal, in a tree hidden from view, or on a stanchion behind a basketball goal. The receiving PocketWizard does not need to be in the hot shoe to trigger the camera. Cables are available in either 1' or 3' lengths and we have a 10' extension cable (the MMX) so you can put the camera where you want but put the radio in a position where it will be able to have the best reception.
*The type of cable does make a difference. PocketWizard remote camera cables are designed to be durable and last. They are also wired to be used with PocketWizard radios that can pre trigger the camera. Aftermarket cables may or may not be wired the correct way to work properly with the radios.
*Some radios have special modes such as LR (Long Range) and RP (Repeater) that can help with tricky setups. Be sure to check your radio's quick guide or the PocketWizard Wiki for details.

===Important Notes===
*When using a MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 remote camera setup using default radio settings, a remote camera can only be triggered in single shot mode and there will be a delay between shots. When the camera's meter is "awake" and the internal LED is active, the receiving radio cannot listen for an incoming signal. For Canon cameras, the delay is typically 2-3 seconds before the meter sleeps. For Nikon cameras, you can adjust the length of the delay by going into the custom menu settings and changing the setting. It's called Auto Meter Off or Standby and the shortest delay is 4 seconds.

Continuous triggering with ControlTL radios is possible if the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 attached to the camera has either Disable Shoe Communications or [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] set via the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. Basic Trigger mode is the recommended setup for remote camera triggering with ControlTL radios. With this setting, the radios only need to send a simple "fire now!" signal, instead of having to send information about power levels and sync speed, which you don't need with a remote camera.

==Triggering a Remote Camera from a Handheld Camera==
The setup is very similar to the Basic Remote Camera setup but there are a couple important differences. When you are triggering from a handheld PocketWizard to a remote camera, the radio will send hundreds of packets of triggers through the air. When you have a PocketWizard in the hot shoe of your handheld camera, the camera thinks the radio is a flash. That means it won't send a signal until the handheld camera's shutter is tripped. It then sends a very quick pop (because the camera thinks it only needs to pop a flash) to the radio in its hot shoe. Because the radio is getting a very short signal, it only has enough time to send out one or two trigger packets. If the remote camera is not completely ready when its radio gets the trigger, it may not fire because it is still checking the settings and will miss the packet. Adding a remote camera cable to your transmitting radio and handheld camera usually solves this issue. This is just a quick overview but there are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

===Best Practices===
*Always make sure you have the most recent firmware in your radio.
*Use the PTMM adapter. This adapter connects to your remote camera cable and has a switch on it. When you turn the switch "on", it will pre trigger your remote camera and keep it in a pre triggered state, as though you were constantly half pressing the shutter button. Note: It will use more battery power than usual, as your camera is kept constantly awake.
*Use a cable on BOTH the handheld and remote camera. With this setup, if you are using Plus III radios, when you half press the shutter button of the camera in your hand, it will send a half press signal to the remote camera at the same time. This will pre trigger the camera so it responds faster when you take the photo. With any other radio, it will ensure that a signal is sent out to the remote radio. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)

===Important Notes===
*With most mirrorless cameras, when you set the camera to continuous high speed shooting, the hot shoe will be disabled. For that setup, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera as well as the remote camera because the handheld camera won't send a signal to the transmitting radio through the hot shoe. (note: continuous high speed shooting and silent shooting modes also usually disable the hot shoe)
*When you are shooting from a handheld camera to a remote camera, there will be a delay between shots. This is because the transmitting camera will not send the signal to the hot shoe until AFTER the shutter moves. Using a PTMM or cables on both cameras will help lessen (though not completely eliminate) this time difference because the remote camera will be at half press and ready to receive a signal.
*There are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

==Relay Mode==
Sometimes you want to use a flash with your remote camera, for situations like self portraits or maybe taking a photo of a bear at night in the wild. Relay mode allows you to trigger a remote camera and to have that remote camera trigger a remote flash.

For Relay, you need at least 3 PocketWizards. One to send the signal, one on the camera, then one attached to the flash. You will also need the appropriate remote camera cable. It seems logical to set the radios all to the same Channel but if you do that, you will find they will not sync properly. A flash only needs a quick "fire now!" signal to fire while a camera has to verify that the exposure is correct and that the focus is confirmed before it will shoot, even if both of those are set to manual. When you set everything to the same Channel, the flash will fire before the camera, resulting in a dark exposure.

When you use our Relay mode, you use 2 different Channels. Here's how Relay works:
#The PocketWizard in your hand sends out a signal on a specific Channel.
#The PocketWizard for the camera will receive that incoming signal and trigger the camera. The camera then sends a sync pulse through the hot shoe. (note: the PocketWizard MUST be in the camera's hot shoe)
#The PocketWizard on the camera senses the trigger from the camera's hot shoe and automatically sends out a new signal on a different Channel.
#The PocketWizard connected to the flash receives the signal on the secondary Channel and fires the flash.

For example, the transmitting radio will be set to Channel 1. The radio on the camera will be set to TxRx Channel 1 and receives on Channel 1. When it gets the trigger from the camera's hot shoe, it will automatically send out a new trigger on Channel 2. The radio connected to the flash should be set to Channel 2 to receive the signal.

Any PocketWizard Auto Sensing Transceiver will automatically send out a signal one Channel higher.
*A FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 will automatically send the signal one Channel higher but you can program the radios in the PocketWizard Utility to send out the Relayed signal on a different Channel if you wish to.
*With the MultiMAX, you can choose which Channel you use for the Relayed signal.

For more information, please see our [[Relay Mode]] page.

'''Note:''' If you are using a FlexTT5 or FlexTT6, you can use a flash in the receiving camera's hot shoe, simply set it to Master, just as you would if you were firing directly from the camera.

==Auto Focus vs Manual Focus==
We strongly suggest using Manual focus for remote cameras. A remote camera that is using AutoFocus but has not been pre-released (with a pre-trigger cable or a half-press from a Plus III) will still attempt to focus a remote camera before firing an exposure. Depending on the AF setting that you have chosen for your remote camera, the auto focus behavior will look a little different:

* When the camera is set to AF-S (Single), the camera will not release the shutter button until it can confirm the focus. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will attempt to autofocus before releasing the shutter button.
* When the camera is set to AF-C (Continuous), the focus is continuous up until the point of the full shutter release. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will first attempt to focus and will then fire regardless of focus confirmation.

In AF-S there is the possibility of missing shots, if focus cannot be confirmed, and in AF-C there is the possibility of getting an out-of-focus shot. These limitations are tied to the camera’s auto-focus system – you will see the same behavior with or without PocketWizard radios.

==Remote Camera Cables==

To trigger a remote camera, you will need the correct remote camera cable for your camera. A remote camera cable has a stereo 3.5mm (1/8") connection for the PocketWizard and the other end is specific to the camera's remote port connection.

The most common cables are:
*'''Canon CM-E3-ACC:''' this cable has a 2.5mm connection. It fits Canon cameras with the E3 connection. It also usually works with most other cameras that have a 2.5mm connection, such as Fuji or Olympus, or with any flashes with a 2.5mm sync port. (Note: the Panasonic cameras will not work with this cable. You would need to use the PANA-ACC cable.)
*'''Canon CM-N3-ACC:''' this cable has a 3 prong connection. It fits Canon cameras with the N3 connection.
*'''Nikon N-MCDC2-ACC:''' this cable has a rectangular 4 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MCDC2 connection.
*'''Nikon N10-ACC:''' this cable has the Nikon 10 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MC30/10 pin connection.
*'''S-VPR1-ACC:''' this cable has the Sony micro connection. It fits Sony cameras with the VPR1 / micro USB connection. Use with Plus III, Plus IV, and through the bottom -ACC port of MultiMAX radios.
*'''13377-S:''' this cable is the same as the S-VPR1-ACC but wired differently inside. Use this cable with PlusX radios or through the top port of MultiMAX radios.

These cables are all stereo cables and are capable of pre triggering the camera from the test button if you are using a Plus IIIe radios, or by enabling or disabling a Zone if you are using MultiMAX radios. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware) MultiMAX radios with -ACC ports are also capable of pre triggering by activating Zones.

You can add the PTMM adapter to any of these cables to have pre-trigger constantly on, regardless of the PocketWizard radios you are using. By pre-triggering the radio, the remote camera will be kept in a state of half press so it will respond to the trigger faster. The PTMM has a switch built in and when the switch is engaged, the connected camera behaves as if its shutter button is held down half way. This lets the camera respond more quickly and consistently, but at the expense of battery life. Pre-release cables can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode.

'''IMPORTANT NOTES:'''
*If you have older radios, like the Plus II, Plus Receiver, or use the MultiMAX top port, that requires a mono connection. Add the PTMM or an MSMM adapter. The Plus IIIe, Plus IVe, and PlusX radios can all use either stereo or mono cables.
*As noted above, if you are triggering a remote camera while shooting from a handheld camera with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe, we suggest using cables on both cameras for best results. For most mirrorless cameras, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera and transmitting radio, as the camera's hot shoe might be disabled.
*If you are using MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and/or FlexTT6 radios for remote camera triggering, we strongly suggest using Basic Trigger mode for best results.

Sekonic L-478DR

2024-05-02T18:33:40Z

Heathers: /* No Change (Trigger Only): */ changed formatting

[[File:Sekonic L478DR.jpg|right|250px|Sekonic L-478DR]]
==Product Description==
The Sekonic L-478DR has an integrated PocketWizard transmitter with the ability to control the output power of compatible remote flashes connected to PocketWizard ControlTL receivers. The meter comes with PocketWizard Legacy firmware installed but can be upgraded to the E Release firmware protocol.

Using the meter’s zone control features, you can adjust the power levels of compatible Nikon or Canon Speedlights attached to FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 Transceivers. You can also control the power of certain studio flashes from Elinchrom and Paul C. Buff equipped with receivers like the PowerST4 and PowerMC2. The L-478DR also includes the ability to switch zones on and off to make measuring individual lights easier.

The L-478DR works just like the MiniTT1 and AC3 ZoneController when used off camera to set power levels, but with the added ability to measure the light.

The meter also works with all PocketWizard radios like the Plus and MultiMAX radios, as well as with flash units incorporating Standard PocketWizard radio receivers. You won’t be able to control the power of these flashes, but you may be able to toggle on and off specific zones of light to control how you meter the scene.
 
 

==PocketWizard Firmware & Radio Compatibility==

The Sekonic L-478DR comes from the factory with the PocketWizard Legacy firmware installed and can trigger any PocketWizard using Legacy firmware. Plus and MultiMAX radios use Standard and QuadZone Triggering Channels, as well as some studio packs with integrated PocketWizard receivers. FlexTT5 and FlexTT6 transceivers, as well as PowerMC2 and PowerST4 receivers, use ControlTL Channels.
*Standard Channels 1-16: the meter will trigger all remotes set to the same Channel
*QuadZone Triggering Channels 17-32: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose.
*ControlTL Channels: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose. The meter can also adjust power to each individual Zone.

With PocketWizard E Release firmware, the meter can trigger any PocketWizard using E Release firmware. E Release firmware is available for Plus III, Plus IV, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 transceivers and PowerMC2 receivers.
*E Release Channels 1-32 with Plus radios: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose.
*E Release Channels 1-32 with ControlTL radios: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose. The meter can also adjust power to each individual Zone.

*E Release LR Channels 1-80: The L-478DR is not compatible with E Release LR Channels.

''The Sekonic L-478DR can be shipped to LPA Design to have the E Release firmware installed in the unit. It can only be done at our corporate office in Vermont, it is not user upgradeable. For more information about the E Release firmware protocol, please see our [[PocketWizard Firmware]] wiki page. For more information about upgrading your meter, please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact PocketWizard support.]''

'''NOTE:''' as with all PocketWizard radios, the L-478DR is available with either FCC or CE frequency. The meter's frequency must match the PocketWizard radio frequency. An FCC meter cannot trigger CE PocketWizards or vice versa.

==TTL Compatibility==

The Sekonic L-478DR does not have specific features for measuring or integrating information about TTL flash pulses from remote Speedlights. TTL (Through The Lens) metering is calculated by the camera using pre-flashes, and the flash power level used can vary dramatically from shot to shot. With a Sekonic L-478DR, the meter, not the camera, is used to make precision calculations. You control your lighting with exact repeatable results shot to shot. We typically suggest using manual power control when using the meter for best results.

'''Note:''' When using the L-478DR to trigger a remote Speedlight on a FlexTT5, the Speedlight will still need to be set to TTL (normal operation for any FlexTT5-mounted Speedlight – set it to TTL, not MASTER or REMOTE/SLAVE). This allows the FlexTT5/FlexTT6 to control the Speedlight for all kinds of flash triggering, including manual power control operation from a Sekonic L-478DR. If you set the FlexTT5-mounted Speedlight to Manual using the Speedlight’s controls, you will not be able to control its power level with your Sekonic L-478DR.

If you want to know how much light was emitted during a camera-controlled TTL exposure, you can get an approximate power value by setting your meter to “Cordless multiple (cumulative) flash mode” and pressing the measuring button up to 90 seconds before triggering the camera. This measurement will include light emitted from all communication and pre-flashes which are not included in the camera’s exposure, and are not always of a repeatable value. You will need to account for this extra light in your interpretation of the meter’s readings.
 
 

==No Change (Trigger Only):==

ControlTL receivers will respond to the last power level command they receive from any ControlTL transmitter on the same channel and zone. To ensure the L-478DR is exclusively controlling the power level of remote flashes, the on-camera/transmitting MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 should be set to “No Change (Trigger Only)” mode. This will allow the meter to be the master power controller, and make sure the camera triggers the remote flashes but does not change their power levels. The meter can turn off individual Zones for measuring their values, but the transmitting radio will always fire all Zones, regardless of the meter's setting.

With the PocketWizard Utility running on your computer, follow these steps:

#Connect your transmitting PocketWizard (MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6) to the computer using a USB cord.
#Click the “Advanced Mode” check box located on the bottom left to reveal all available options and tabs.
#Select the FLASH tab.
#In the SPEEDLIGHT section, click the drop down and select “No Change (Trigger Only). ''NOTE: If you are using a FlexTT5/FlexTT6 as a Transmitter, you may want to take this opportunity to set it to “Transmitter Only” Mode. With this mode set, your on-camera FlexTT5 will not respond to triggers or power level commands from the L-478DR and will instead give its full attention to triggers from your camera. “Transmitter Only” mode is set on the MISC tab.''
#Click “Apply Changes” to set these features in your radio.

These modes only need to be engaged for your on-camera/transmitting MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6. Do not need engage this setting for remote radios triggering flashes.
 
 

==AC3 & PowerTracking==

When using the L-478DR to meter and adjust your lights, it is possible to also use the AC3 attached to a transmitting radio with PowerTracking enabled to make adjustments from your camera. To do this, use the following procedure:

#Set the transmitter to use your desired PowerTracking method
#Trigger the remote strobes with the L-478DR
#Make adjustments to power levels on the meter’s sliders
#Note the meter’s measurement (aperture and shutter speed) as well as the slider positions
#Before firing the camera, manually change the AC3’s dials to match meter’s sliders. Setting any Zone on the AC3 to 0 will disable that respective Zone from triggering its flash
#Before firing the camera, manually change the aperture and shutter speed to match the L-478DR’s reading
#Fire your first shot on the camera (set PowerTracking center to same power level used by the meter)
#Use PowerTracking to make fine adjustments, or to adjust depth of field & ISO
#If metering again, repeat in reverse (set the meter to match your adjusted camera settings before pressing the meter’s measurement button)
 
 

==Useful Links==

If you would like to learn more about the Sekonic L-478DR visit the following links:

[http://www.sekonic.com/Support/InstructionManualUserGuideDownload.aspx Sekonic L-478DR User Manual]

[https://sekonic.com/sekonic-l-478dr-u-litemaster-pro-for-pocketwizard-system-light-meter/ Sekonic L-478DR Product Page]

[https://sekonic.com/faqs/ Sekonic Support FAQs: (US)]

'''Note:''' If you are outside North America, you will have to first visit [http://www.sekonic.com/ Sekonic’s homepage] and select the appropriate country.
 
 

{{CustomerService}}

Sekonic L-478DR

2024-05-02T18:25:16Z

Heathers: /* Useful Links */ updated broken links

[[File:Sekonic L478DR.jpg|right|250px|Sekonic L-478DR]]
==Product Description==
The Sekonic L-478DR has an integrated PocketWizard transmitter with the ability to control the output power of compatible remote flashes connected to PocketWizard ControlTL receivers. The meter comes with PocketWizard Legacy firmware installed but can be upgraded to the E Release firmware protocol.

Using the meter’s zone control features, you can adjust the power levels of compatible Nikon or Canon Speedlights attached to FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 Transceivers. You can also control the power of certain studio flashes from Elinchrom and Paul C. Buff equipped with receivers like the PowerST4 and PowerMC2. The L-478DR also includes the ability to switch zones on and off to make measuring individual lights easier.

The L-478DR works just like the MiniTT1 and AC3 ZoneController when used off camera to set power levels, but with the added ability to measure the light.

The meter also works with all PocketWizard radios like the Plus and MultiMAX radios, as well as with flash units incorporating Standard PocketWizard radio receivers. You won’t be able to control the power of these flashes, but you may be able to toggle on and off specific zones of light to control how you meter the scene.
 
 

==PocketWizard Firmware & Radio Compatibility==

The Sekonic L-478DR comes from the factory with the PocketWizard Legacy firmware installed and can trigger any PocketWizard using Legacy firmware. Plus and MultiMAX radios use Standard and QuadZone Triggering Channels, as well as some studio packs with integrated PocketWizard receivers. FlexTT5 and FlexTT6 transceivers, as well as PowerMC2 and PowerST4 receivers, use ControlTL Channels.
*Standard Channels 1-16: the meter will trigger all remotes set to the same Channel
*QuadZone Triggering Channels 17-32: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose.
*ControlTL Channels: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose. The meter can also adjust power to each individual Zone.

With PocketWizard E Release firmware, the meter can trigger any PocketWizard using E Release firmware. E Release firmware is available for Plus III, Plus IV, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 transceivers and PowerMC2 receivers.
*E Release Channels 1-32 with Plus radios: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose.
*E Release Channels 1-32 with ControlTL radios: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose. The meter can also adjust power to each individual Zone.

*E Release LR Channels 1-80: The L-478DR is not compatible with E Release LR Channels.

''The Sekonic L-478DR can be shipped to LPA Design to have the E Release firmware installed in the unit. It can only be done at our corporate office in Vermont, it is not user upgradeable. For more information about the E Release firmware protocol, please see our [[PocketWizard Firmware]] wiki page. For more information about upgrading your meter, please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact PocketWizard support.]''

'''NOTE:''' as with all PocketWizard radios, the L-478DR is available with either FCC or CE frequency. The meter's frequency must match the PocketWizard radio frequency. An FCC meter cannot trigger CE PocketWizards or vice versa.

==TTL Compatibility==

The Sekonic L-478DR does not have specific features for measuring or integrating information about TTL flash pulses from remote Speedlights. TTL (Through The Lens) metering is calculated by the camera using pre-flashes, and the flash power level used can vary dramatically from shot to shot. With a Sekonic L-478DR, the meter, not the camera, is used to make precision calculations. You control your lighting with exact repeatable results shot to shot. We typically suggest using manual power control when using the meter for best results.

'''Note:''' When using the L-478DR to trigger a remote Speedlight on a FlexTT5, the Speedlight will still need to be set to TTL (normal operation for any FlexTT5-mounted Speedlight – set it to TTL, not MASTER or REMOTE/SLAVE). This allows the FlexTT5/FlexTT6 to control the Speedlight for all kinds of flash triggering, including manual power control operation from a Sekonic L-478DR. If you set the FlexTT5-mounted Speedlight to Manual using the Speedlight’s controls, you will not be able to control its power level with your Sekonic L-478DR.

If you want to know how much light was emitted during a camera-controlled TTL exposure, you can get an approximate power value by setting your meter to “Cordless multiple (cumulative) flash mode” and pressing the measuring button up to 90 seconds before triggering the camera. This measurement will include light emitted from all communication and pre-flashes which are not included in the camera’s exposure, and are not always of a repeatable value. You will need to account for this extra light in your interpretation of the meter’s readings.
 
 

==No Change (Trigger Only):==

ControlTL receivers will respond to the last power level command they receive from any ControlTL transmitter on the same channel and zone. To ensure the L-478DR is exclusively controlling the power level of remote flashes, the on-camera/transmitting MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 should be set to “No Change (Trigger Only)” mode. This will allow the meter to be the master power controller, and make sure the camera triggers the remote flashes but does not change their power levels. The meter can turn off individual Zones for measuring their values, but the transmitting radio will always fire all Zones, regardless of the meter's setting.

With the PocketWizard Utility running on your computer, follow these steps:

#Connect your transmitting PocketWizard (MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6) to the computer using a USB cord.
#Click the “Advanced Mode” check box located on the bottom left to reveal all available options and tabs.
#Select the FLASH tab.
#In the SPEEDLIGHT section, click the drop down and select “No Change (Trigger Only).
##If you are using a FlexTT5/FlexTT6 as a Transmitter, you may want to take this opportunity to set it to “Transmitter Only” Mode. With this mode set, your on-camera FlexTT5 will not respond to triggers or power level commands from the L-478DR and will instead give its full attention to triggers from your camera. “Transmitter Only” mode is set on the MISC tab.
#Click “Apply Changes” to set these features in your radio.

These modes only need to be engaged for your on-camera/transmitting MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6. Do not need engage this setting for remote radios triggering flashes.
 
 

==AC3 & PowerTracking==

When using the L-478DR to meter and adjust your lights, it is possible to also use the AC3 attached to a transmitting radio with PowerTracking enabled to make adjustments from your camera. To do this, use the following procedure:

#Set the transmitter to use your desired PowerTracking method
#Trigger the remote strobes with the L-478DR
#Make adjustments to power levels on the meter’s sliders
#Note the meter’s measurement (aperture and shutter speed) as well as the slider positions
#Before firing the camera, manually change the AC3’s dials to match meter’s sliders. Setting any Zone on the AC3 to 0 will disable that respective Zone from triggering its flash
#Before firing the camera, manually change the aperture and shutter speed to match the L-478DR’s reading
#Fire your first shot on the camera (set PowerTracking center to same power level used by the meter)
#Use PowerTracking to make fine adjustments, or to adjust depth of field & ISO
#If metering again, repeat in reverse (set the meter to match your adjusted camera settings before pressing the meter’s measurement button)
 
 

==Useful Links==

If you would like to learn more about the Sekonic L-478DR visit the following links:

[http://www.sekonic.com/Support/InstructionManualUserGuideDownload.aspx Sekonic L-478DR User Manual]

[https://sekonic.com/sekonic-l-478dr-u-litemaster-pro-for-pocketwizard-system-light-meter/ Sekonic L-478DR Product Page]

[https://sekonic.com/faqs/ Sekonic Support FAQs: (US)]

'''Note:''' If you are outside North America, you will have to first visit [http://www.sekonic.com/ Sekonic’s homepage] and select the appropriate country.
 
 

{{CustomerService}}

Sekonic L-478DR

2024-05-02T18:23:03Z

Heathers: complete rework including adding E Release info

[[File:Sekonic L478DR.jpg|right|250px|Sekonic L-478DR]]
==Product Description==
The Sekonic L-478DR has an integrated PocketWizard transmitter with the ability to control the output power of compatible remote flashes connected to PocketWizard ControlTL receivers. The meter comes with PocketWizard Legacy firmware installed but can be upgraded to the E Release firmware protocol.

Using the meter’s zone control features, you can adjust the power levels of compatible Nikon or Canon Speedlights attached to FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 Transceivers. You can also control the power of certain studio flashes from Elinchrom and Paul C. Buff equipped with receivers like the PowerST4 and PowerMC2. The L-478DR also includes the ability to switch zones on and off to make measuring individual lights easier.

The L-478DR works just like the MiniTT1 and AC3 ZoneController when used off camera to set power levels, but with the added ability to measure the light.

The meter also works with all PocketWizard radios like the Plus and MultiMAX radios, as well as with flash units incorporating Standard PocketWizard radio receivers. You won’t be able to control the power of these flashes, but you may be able to toggle on and off specific zones of light to control how you meter the scene.
 
 

==PocketWizard Firmware & Radio Compatibility==

The Sekonic L-478DR comes from the factory with the PocketWizard Legacy firmware installed and can trigger any PocketWizard using Legacy firmware. Plus and MultiMAX radios use Standard and QuadZone Triggering Channels, as well as some studio packs with integrated PocketWizard receivers. FlexTT5 and FlexTT6 transceivers, as well as PowerMC2 and PowerST4 receivers, use ControlTL Channels.
*Standard Channels 1-16: the meter will trigger all remotes set to the same Channel
*QuadZone Triggering Channels 17-32: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose.
*ControlTL Channels: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose. The meter can also adjust power to each individual Zone.

With PocketWizard E Release firmware, the meter can trigger any PocketWizard using E Release firmware. E Release firmware is available for Plus III, Plus IV, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 transceivers and PowerMC2 receivers.
*E Release Channels 1-32 with Plus radios: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose.
*E Release Channels 1-32 with ControlTL radios: the remote radios can be set to specific Zones. The meter can trigger each Zone independently or can trigger as many Zones at the same time as you choose. The meter can also adjust power to each individual Zone.

*E Release LR Channels 1-80: The L-478DR is not compatible with E Release LR Channels.

''The Sekonic L-478DR can be shipped to LPA Design to have the E Release firmware installed in the unit. It can only be done at our corporate office in Vermont, it is not user upgradeable. For more information about the E Release firmware protocol, please see our [[PocketWizard Firmware]] wiki page. For more information about upgrading your meter, please [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact PocketWizard support.]''

'''NOTE:''' as with all PocketWizard radios, the L-478DR is available with either FCC or CE frequency. The meter's frequency must match the PocketWizard radio frequency. An FCC meter cannot trigger CE PocketWizards or vice versa.

==TTL Compatibility==

The Sekonic L-478DR does not have specific features for measuring or integrating information about TTL flash pulses from remote Speedlights. TTL (Through The Lens) metering is calculated by the camera using pre-flashes, and the flash power level used can vary dramatically from shot to shot. With a Sekonic L-478DR, the meter, not the camera, is used to make precision calculations. You control your lighting with exact repeatable results shot to shot. We typically suggest using manual power control when using the meter for best results.

'''Note:''' When using the L-478DR to trigger a remote Speedlight on a FlexTT5, the Speedlight will still need to be set to TTL (normal operation for any FlexTT5-mounted Speedlight – set it to TTL, not MASTER or REMOTE/SLAVE). This allows the FlexTT5/FlexTT6 to control the Speedlight for all kinds of flash triggering, including manual power control operation from a Sekonic L-478DR. If you set the FlexTT5-mounted Speedlight to Manual using the Speedlight’s controls, you will not be able to control its power level with your Sekonic L-478DR.

If you want to know how much light was emitted during a camera-controlled TTL exposure, you can get an approximate power value by setting your meter to “Cordless multiple (cumulative) flash mode” and pressing the measuring button up to 90 seconds before triggering the camera. This measurement will include light emitted from all communication and pre-flashes which are not included in the camera’s exposure, and are not always of a repeatable value. You will need to account for this extra light in your interpretation of the meter’s readings.
 
 

==No Change (Trigger Only):==

ControlTL receivers will respond to the last power level command they receive from any ControlTL transmitter on the same channel and zone. To ensure the L-478DR is exclusively controlling the power level of remote flashes, the on-camera/transmitting MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6 should be set to “No Change (Trigger Only)” mode. This will allow the meter to be the master power controller, and make sure the camera triggers the remote flashes but does not change their power levels. The meter can turn off individual Zones for measuring their values, but the transmitting radio will always fire all Zones, regardless of the meter's setting.

With the PocketWizard Utility running on your computer, follow these steps:

#Connect your transmitting PocketWizard (MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6) to the computer using a USB cord.
#Click the “Advanced Mode” check box located on the bottom left to reveal all available options and tabs.
#Select the FLASH tab.
#In the SPEEDLIGHT section, click the drop down and select “No Change (Trigger Only).
##If you are using a FlexTT5/FlexTT6 as a Transmitter, you may want to take this opportunity to set it to “Transmitter Only” Mode. With this mode set, your on-camera FlexTT5 will not respond to triggers or power level commands from the L-478DR and will instead give its full attention to triggers from your camera. “Transmitter Only” mode is set on the MISC tab.
#Click “Apply Changes” to set these features in your radio.

These modes only need to be engaged for your on-camera/transmitting MiniTT1, FlexTT5, or FlexTT6. Do not need engage this setting for remote radios triggering flashes.
 
 

==AC3 & PowerTracking==

When using the L-478DR to meter and adjust your lights, it is possible to also use the AC3 attached to a transmitting radio with PowerTracking enabled to make adjustments from your camera. To do this, use the following procedure:

#Set the transmitter to use your desired PowerTracking method
#Trigger the remote strobes with the L-478DR
#Make adjustments to power levels on the meter’s sliders
#Note the meter’s measurement (aperture and shutter speed) as well as the slider positions
#Before firing the camera, manually change the AC3’s dials to match meter’s sliders. Setting any Zone on the AC3 to 0 will disable that respective Zone from triggering its flash
#Before firing the camera, manually change the aperture and shutter speed to match the L-478DR’s reading
#Fire your first shot on the camera (set PowerTracking center to same power level used by the meter)
#Use PowerTracking to make fine adjustments, or to adjust depth of field & ISO
#If metering again, repeat in reverse (set the meter to match your adjusted camera settings before pressing the meter’s measurement button)
 
 

==Useful Links==

If you would like to learn more about the Sekonic L-478DR visit the following links:

[http://www.sekonic.com/Support/InstructionManualUserGuideDownload.aspx Sekonic L-478DR User Manual]

[http://www.sekonic.com/l-478/photographers.html Sekonic L-478DR Product Page]

[http://www.sekonic.com/Support/FAQs/Sekonic-L-758DR.aspx Sekonic Support FAQs: (US)]

'''Note:''' If you are outside North America, you will have to first visit [http://www.sekonic.com/ Sekonic’s homepage] and select the appropriate country.
 
 

{{CustomerService}}

Remote Camera Triggering

2024-03-25T21:08:20Z

Heathers: /* Triggering a Remote Camera from a Handheld Camera */ added line in first paragraph about handheld radio/cable

__FORCETOC__
[[File:PlusIIIE RemoteCamera.jpg|350px|thumb|right|Sony a9, Plus IIIe, and S-VPR1-ACC cable]]
All PocketWizard radios can be used to remotely trigger a remote camera. You will need at least 2 PocketWizard radios and the correct PocketWizard remote camera cable. Different camera bodies have different remote camera connectors and require different cables. To find the right cable for your particular camera, you can use the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ Cable Finder].

==Basic Remote Camera Setup==
# Set the transmitting radios and the receiving radio on your camera to the same [[Channels|Channel]] and Zone (if applicable).
# Attach the [https://pocketwizard.com/cable-finder/ remote camera cable] to your camera's remote port and the sync port on the camera's receiving radio.
# Turn on your equipment top to bottom (radio, then camera)
# Press TEST on the transmitting radio in your hand to trigger the remote camera.

===Best Practices===
*Be sure to press the TEST button deliberately, do not "jab" it. If you press too fast, the remote camera may not have time to wake up and confirm focus and exposure. If you are using a Plus III/IIIe as the transmitter with a Plus III or Plus IV as a receiver, you can half press the TEST button to pre trigger the camera. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)
*Remote cameras are often set up in places where photographers cannot go. This means that the remote camera could be positioned in situations that are less than ideal for good reception, like on the ground behind a soccer goal, in a tree hidden from view, or on a stanchion behind a basketball goal. The receiving PocketWizard does not need to be in the hot shoe to trigger the camera. Cables are available in either 1' or 3' lengths and we have a 10' extension cable (the MMX) so you can put the camera where you want but put the radio in a position where it will be able to have the best reception.
*The type of cable does make a difference. PocketWizard remote camera cables are designed to be durable and last. They are also wired to be used with PocketWizard radios that can pre trigger the camera. Aftermarket cables may or may not be wired the correct way to work properly with the radios.
*Some radios have special modes such as LR (Long Range) and RP (Repeater) that can help with tricky setups. Be sure to check your radio's quick guide or the PocketWizard Wiki for details.

===Important Notes===
*When using a MiniTT1/FlexTT5/FlexTT6 remote camera setup using default radio settings, a remote camera can only be triggered in single shot mode and there will be a delay between shots. When the camera's meter is "awake" and the internal LED is active, the receiving radio cannot listen for an incoming signal. For Canon cameras, the delay is typically 2-3 seconds before the meter sleeps. For Nikon cameras, you can adjust the length of the delay by going into the custom menu settings and changing the setting. It's called Auto Meter Off or Standby and the shortest delay is 4 seconds.

Continuous triggering with ControlTL radios is possible if the FlexTT5 / FlexTT6 attached to the camera has either Disable Shoe Communications or [[Misc_Tab#Basic_Trigger|Basic Trigger Mode]] set via the [[PocketWizard Utility]]. Basic Trigger mode is the recommended setup for remote camera triggering with ControlTL radios. With this setting, the radios only need to send a simple "fire now!" signal, instead of having to send information about power levels and sync speed, which you don't need with a remote camera.

==Triggering a Remote Camera from a Handheld Camera==
The setup is very similar to the Basic Remote Camera setup but there are a couple important differences. When you are triggering from a handheld PocketWizard to a remote camera, the radio will send hundreds of packets of triggers through the air. When you have a PocketWizard in the hot shoe of your handheld camera, the camera thinks the radio is a flash. That means it won't send a signal until the handheld camera's shutter is tripped. It then sends a very quick pop (because the camera thinks it only needs to pop a flash) to the radio in its hot shoe. Because the radio is getting a very short signal, it only has enough time to send out one or two trigger packets. If the remote camera is not completely ready when its radio gets the trigger, it may not fire because it is still checking the settings and will miss the packet. Adding a remote camera cable to your transmitting radio and handheld camera usually solves this issue. This is just a quick overview but there are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

===Best Practices===
*Always make sure you have the most recent firmware in your radio.
*Use the PTMM adapter. This adapter connects to your remote camera cable and has a switch on it. When you turn the switch "on", it will pre trigger your remote camera and keep it in a pre triggered state, as though you were constantly half pressing the shutter button. Note: It will use more battery power than usual, as your camera is kept constantly awake.
*Use a cable on BOTH the handheld and remote camera. With this setup, if you are using Plus III radios, when you half press the shutter button of the camera in your hand, it will send a half press signal to the remote camera at the same time. This will pre trigger the camera so it responds faster when you take the photo. With any other radio, it will ensure that a signal is sent out to the remote radio. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware)

===Important Notes===
*With most mirrorless cameras, when you set the camera to continuous high speed shooting, the hot shoe will be disabled. For that setup, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera as well as the remote camera because the handheld camera won't send a signal to the transmitting radio through the hot shoe. (note: continuous high speed shooting and silent shooting modes also usually disable the hot shoe)
*When you are shooting from a handheld camera to a remote camera, there will be a delay between shots. This is because the transmitting camera will not send the signal to the hot shoe until AFTER the shutter moves. Using a PTMM or cables on both cameras will help lessen (though not completely eliminate) this time difference because the remote camera will be at half press and ready to receive a signal.
*There are many more helpful tips about this setup on the [[PocketWizard_Games#The_Essentials_of_Remote_Camera_Triggering_-_Tips_from_Shawn|PocketWizard Games]] Wiki page.

==Relay Mode==
Sometimes you want to use a flash with your remote camera, for situations like self portraits or maybe taking a photo of a bear at night in the wild. Relay mode allows you to trigger a remote camera and to have that remote camera trigger a remote flash.

For Relay, you need at least 3 PocketWizards. One to send the signal, one on the camera, then one attached to the flash. You will also need the appropriate remote camera cable. It seems logical to set the radios all to the same Channel but if you do that, you will find they will not sync properly. A flash only needs a quick "fire now!" signal to fire while a camera has to verify that the exposure is correct and that the focus is confirmed before it will shoot, even if both of those are set to manual. When you set everything to the same Channel, the flash will fire before the camera, resulting in a dark exposure.

When you use our Relay mode, you use 2 different Channels. Here's how Relay works:
#The PocketWizard in your hand sends out a signal on a specific Channel.
#The PocketWizard for the camera will receive that incoming signal and trigger the camera. The camera then sends a sync pulse through the hot shoe. (note: the PocketWizard MUST be in the camera's hot shoe)
#The PocketWizard on the camera senses the trigger from the camera's hot shoe and automatically sends out a new signal on a different Channel.
#The PocketWizard connected to the flash receives the signal on the secondary Channel and fires the flash.

For example, the transmitting radio will be set to Channel 1. The radio on the camera will be set to TxRx Channel 1 and receives on Channel 1. When it gets the trigger from the camera's hot shoe, it will automatically send out a new trigger on Channel 2. The radio connected to the flash should be set to Channel 2 to receive the signal.

Any PocketWizard Auto Sensing Transceiver will automatically send out a signal one Channel higher.
*A FlexTT5 or FlexTT6 will automatically send the signal one Channel higher but you can program the radios in the PocketWizard Utility to send out the Relayed signal on a different Channel if you wish to.
*With the MultiMAX, you can choose which Channel you use for the Relayed signal.

For more information, please see our [[Relay Mode]] page.

'''Note:''' If you are using a FlexTT5 or FlexTT6, you can use a flash in the receiving camera's hot shoe, simply set it to Master, just as you would if you were firing directly from the camera.

==Auto Focus vs Manual Focus==
We strongly suggest using Manual focus for remote cameras. A remote camera that is using AutoFocus but has not been pre-released (with a pre-trigger cable or a half-press from a Plus III) will still attempt to focus a remote camera before firing an exposure. Depending on the AF setting that you have chosen for your remote camera, the auto focus behavior will look a little different:

* When the camera is set to AF-S (Single), the camera will not release the shutter button until it can confirm the focus. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will attempt to autofocus before releasing the shutter button.
* When the camera is set to AF-C (Continuous), the focus is continuous up until the point of the full shutter release. When using this setting on the camera, the camera will first attempt to focus and will then fire regardless of focus confirmation.

In AF-S there is the possibility of missing shots, if focus cannot be confirmed, and in AF-C there is the possibility of getting an out-of-focus shot. These limitations are tied to the camera’s auto-focus system – you will see the same behavior with or without PocketWizard radios.

==Remote Camera Cables==

To trigger a remote camera, you will need the correct remote camera cable for your camera. A remote camera cable has a stereo 3.5mm (1/8") connection for the PocketWizard and the other end is specific to the camera's remote port connection.

The most common cables are:
*'''Canon CM-E3-ACC:''' this cable has a 2.5mm connection. It fits Canon cameras with the E3 connection. It also usually works with most other cameras that have a 2.5mm connection, such as Fuji or Olympus, or with any flashes with a 2.5mm sync port. (Note: the Panasonic cameras will not work with this cable. You would need to use the PANA-ACC cable.)
*'''Canon CM-N3-ACC:''' this cable has a 3 prong connection. It fits Canon cameras with the N3 connection.
*'''Nikon N-MCDC2-ACC:''' this cable has a rectangular 4 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MCDC2 connection.
*'''Nikon N10-ACC:''' this cable has the Nikon 10 pin connection. It fits Nikon cameras with the MC30/10 pin connection.
*'''S-VPR1-ACC:''' this cable has the Sony micro connection. It fits Sony cameras with the VPR1 / micro USB connection.

These cables are all stereo cables and are capable of pre triggering the camera from the test button if you are using a Plus IIIe radios, or by enabling or disabling a Zone if you are using MultiMAX radios. The half press function is only available on Quad Zone Triggering Channels. (Channels 17-32 with Legacy firmware, Channels 1-32 with E Release firmware) MultiMAX radios with -ACC ports are also capable of pre triggering by activating Zones.

You can add the PTMM adapter to any of these cables to have pre-trigger constantly on, regardless of the PocketWizard radios you are using. By pre-triggering the radio, the remote camera will be kept in a state of half press so it will respond to the trigger faster. The PTMM has a switch built in and when the switch is engaged, the connected camera behaves as if its shutter button is held down half way. This lets the camera respond more quickly and consistently, but at the expense of battery life. Pre-release cables can be used with Plus IIs, MultiMAXes, and FlexTT5s set to Basic Trigger Mode.

'''IMPORTANT NOTES:'''
*If you have older radios, like the Plus II, Plus Receiver, or use the MultiMAX top port, that requires a mono connection. Add the PTMM or an MSMM adapter. The Plus IIIe, Plus IVe, and PlusX radios can all use either stereo or mono cables.
*As noted above, if you are triggering a remote camera while shooting from a handheld camera with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe, we suggest using cables on both cameras for best results. For most mirrorless cameras, you MUST use a cable on the handheld camera and transmitting radio, as the camera's hot shoe might be disabled.
*If you are using MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and/or FlexTT6 radios for remote camera triggering, we strongly suggest using Basic Trigger mode for best results.

PocketWizard Games

2024-02-26T01:07:52Z

Heathers: /* Troubleshooting & Best Practices */ updated FW version and changed pandemic line

'''You can use Google Translate to view this Wiki in a different language. Go to [https://translate.google.com translate.google.com], then type ''wiki.pocketwizard.com'' into the box. Click the arrow in the box to see the new page.'''

This page was specifically designed to help support photographers at The Games in Tokyo for July 2021. The information here can also be helpful for any events with large quantities of photographers. This page was created by Shawn Cullen, a veteran of many large sporting events and Heather Simons, PocketWizard Tech Support Manager. It is designed to help you with setup, answer questions, and includes basic troubleshooting ideas. It will also let you know about special features that you may not be aware of. For best results, we suggest that photographers use Plus III radios with the E Release firmware and strongly consider installing a Custom ID on their units.

==PocketWizard Radios and Firmware==

'''August 1, 2020: SEE NOTE [[#The E Release and Custom IDs|BELOW]] FOR NEW PLUS III FIRMWARE UPDATE!'''

MultiMAX radios have been the gold standard for triggering remotes at sporting events and are known for their rock solid reliability. Our firmware has worked well over the past 30 years but since it was released, there have been many changes in technology. In today’s world, there are a lot more products that can cause RF interference than ever before, between television cameras, LED scoreboards, and simply far more photographers on the field at the same time.

At PocketWizard, we wanted to ensure that photographers would never miss a shot. We released the new E Release firmware protocol on September 19th, 2019. This new special firmware upgrade for PocketWizard Plus III radios extends the signal range drastically. It is also less susceptible to RF interference.

PocketWizard FCC radios use a frequency range of 340-354 MHz. With Legacy firmware, Standard Channels 1-16 have the same frequency of 344.04 while the frequency of QuadZone Triggering Channels 17 to 32 ranges from 346.50 to 354.00 MHz. These Channels allow the user to assign their radios to 4 different Zones as well as having more advanced coding functions and features.

The E Release can more than double the shooting distance of our Legacy firmware and now offers QuadZone Triggering on all Channels. It has E Release Channels 1-32 for flash triggering and adds new LR Channels 1-80, designed specifically for triggering remote cameras. With the new E Release firmware upgrade, each individual channel now has its own separate frequency, so no more Channels sharing the same frequencies, as 1-16 used to. This is especially helpful to increase channel and frequency separation between users.

Besides the increase in the number of additional channels, the E Release firmware enhances the frequency reliability by eliminating frequency drift and making it a more stable frequency over a longer distance.

The E Release firmware is available for the Plus III, the Plus IV, and the Nikon FlexTT5. It is not currently available for the MultiMAX radios. Any new Plus III or Plus IV radios were shipped with the firmware pre-installed and are now called Plus IIIe or Plus IVe radios. You can upgrade any existing units to the E Release by simply purchasing a license for each radio and upgrading through our Utility program. Learn more [https://pocketwizard.com/e-release-firmware/ here].

==Custom IDs and Frequency==

===The Truth about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID can be a valuable asset to a photographer at a major event, as it ensures that nobody else can trigger your Channel.

===A Misconception about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID is NOT a "private frequency"! It is a common misconception that you are getting your own frequency, you are not! A Custom ID which is an exclusive digital code that rides on top of the PocketWizard device frequencies. This exclusive digital code prevents other users from triggering your remote camera or strobes. However, this does not mean you are completely protected. It is possible that other PocketWizard users on the same frequency can block your signal to your receiver, and you can block theirs, even though you have this digital code.

===How Custom IDs Actually Work===

When a Custom ID is created for your device, you are given a 3 digit Custom ID and it is traditionally assigned to Channel 17. However, the Custom ID channel does not use Channel 17’s frequency. The actual frequency used for the ID will vary, depending on your Custom ID code. Most Custom ID’s are placed within channel 17 to 32 since channels 1-16 share the same frequency. Custom ID code information is kept securely and confidentially on file by PocketWizard. Nobody can be assigned to your code and there are no duplicates.

The reason for assigning the Custom ID to Channel 17 with Legacy firmware is due to the Reset feature within the MultiMAX, MultiMAX II, and Plus III. It is recommended every time you turn on your device, do a reset at start up so that any timing delays or other features last use are cleared out, and the device is set to factory default which is Channel 17 with all Zones active.

==Knowing your PocketWizard Frequency==

In situations where you have multiuser environments such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, you need to know your exact Custom ID frequency. This way you know if others will be triggering on your frequency, which could cause issues. If you need to change your Custom ID to another channel for channel separation from other users, you can move the ID to a different frequency if you are using MultiMAX and MultiMAX II radios. However, you can only move it within the 16-channel spread between Channels 17-32.

Switching from TxRx to LR (Long Range mode) does not change your frequency or create channel separation from other users if you have Legacy firmware! LR uses the exact same frequencies, and your receiver can still be blocked by other users. To view your Custom ID and the frequency it is on, for the MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, you can press and hold "A" on your MultiMAX and slide the power switch to one of the ON positions (Transmit or Receive) to display your Custom ID. For the Plus III there should be a label inside the battery compartment with your Custom ID and frequency information.

Let’s use the 100-meter dash at the Games as an example. There will be at least 50+ photographers covering the event, and just think how many remote cameras will be set up just for the finish line. With every photographer triggering their remotes all at the same time as the athletes cross the finish line, with all of those frequencies in the air, the potential for signal blocking is very high! Remember, every Channel between 17 to 32 has a different frequency, but there are only 16 Channels from 17 to 32, so there will be some overlap with Custom IDs. Because Channels 1-16 share the same frequency, 344.04MHz, so there is no point in having your Custom ID set to this frequency. So, with 50+ photographers and possibly 25-30 remotes set up, with only a 16-channel spread for all those Custom ID’s to be placed on, you can see why it is important to know your Custom ID frequency. You need to know what frequency will work best for you and possibly get some Channel separation from everyone else. You can look at the PocketWizard Channel sign-up sheet in the media room to see who is set up on the different channels and know if anyone is set up on the same frequency as your Custom ID.

You can find the frequencies for the different Channels on our [[Channels]] Wiki page.

==The E Release and Custom IDs==

The Plus III units with the E Release and Custom IDs work a little differently. Unlike the Legacy firmware, your Custom ID will use the frequency that the ID is assigned to. For example, when you use your Plus III with Legacy firmware, your Custom ID is assigned to Channel 17 (346.5 MHz) but it may actually trigger on Channel 23’s frequency (349.5 MHz). When you upgrade your radio to the E Release, your Custom ID will trigger on the same frequency as Channel 17, but with E Release frequencies (345.80 MHz for regular Channels or 343.20 MHz for LR Channels).

'''You can now move the Custom ID installed on your Plus IIIe radio to a different frequency and Channel. Please see the '''[[Plus III#Plus_III_CUSTOM_ID|Plus III Custom ID]]''' page for details.'''

==The Essentials of Remote Camera Triggering - Tips from Shawn==

When setting up your remote camera there is a lot to consider and think about. Obviously, you want to select the best spot for composition of the image but the way your PocketWizard device is also very important. You will need to determine the best location to mount the receiver, plus consider other factors as well to ensure that receiver unit can receive the signal from the transmitter consistently and reliably. Shawn has set up literally thousands of cameras at various events, from small gyms to international stadiums, all around the world. His tips and tricks are incredibly valuable and have served him well over the years.

{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
|'''NEW FIRMWARE UPDATES'''

Firmware 2.717 or higher: This firmware adds a new mode: Rx LR. This mode is specifically designed for remote camera triggering, when you have a camera in your hand transmitting to a remote camera. Use regular LR mode for the transmitting radio and Rx LR on the remote radio. IMPORTANT: You should also DISABLE the hot shoe on the remote camera. You can do this by taking it out of the hot shoe, turning the camera's hot shoe off, or by holding in the D button till the display changes from CH to Cd to indicate the Plus III's hot shoe is disabled.

'''Plus IIIe current firmware:'''

'''2.740''': This firmware is for most cameras. This will allow the Plus III to be connected to either a mono or stereo cable. If you are using a button trigger or footpedal with the transmitting radio, you MUST use this firmware version for the transmitter, even if you are using remote Sony camera.

'''2.840''': This firmware is for Sony cameras. The Plus III will ONLY trigger with a stereo cable. If you are using a remote Sony camera, you MUST use 2.840 on the remote Plus III. You can use 2.740 on the transmitting radio, even if you are transmitting from another camera (Sony or otherwise) or from a mono connection. You can also use 2.840 on the transmitting radio as long as you have a stereo connection.

Please contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] if you need more help.
|}

===CABLES ARE CRITICAL!===

To trigger a remote camera, you need to use a remote camera cable to connect the PocketWizard to the camera. This allows the radio to trigger the camera through the camera's remote port.

When you are using a mirrorless camera in your hand (with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe) to trigger a remote camera, you '''MUST''' use a cable on the handheld camera as well as one on the remote camera. Many settings on the camera will automatically disable the hot shoe. Using a cable connected to the remote port will ensure the transmitting radio will get a trigger signal from the handheld camera. It is always more reliable than the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. We also suggest disabling the hot shoe on Plus III radios for best results. Hold in the D Zone button for a few seconds until the display changes from CH to Cd.

'' '''SONY USERS:''' for your transmitting camera/PocketWizard, you '''MUST''' use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your handheld camera as well as one on the remote camera. For the remote cameras, you can use the S-VPR1-ACC, the 13377-S, OR the 13369-S (with the USB power tail).''

There are 5 main cables, based on camera connections:
*N10-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 10 pin connection, like the D6
*N-MCDC2-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 4 pin MCDC2 port, like the Z series
*CM-N3-ACC: for Canon cameras with the 3 pin port, like the 1DX Mark III
*CM-E3-ACC: for cameras with the 2.5 mm subminiphone port, like most Canon mirrorless as well as many Fuji or Olympus cameras
*S-VPR1-ACC: for Sony cameras with the micro USB port, like the a9 II.
If you are not sure which cable you need, you can [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact us] at PocketWizard support.

===TxRx or LR mode===
The main options are: TxRx (Transmit or Receive), Tx Only (Transmit Only), Rx
Only (Receive Only), and LR (Long Range mode). With Plus III firmware 2.716 or higher, you will also have RxLR. For more details and other modes, please see the MultiMAX or Plus III pages. Rx LR mode increases the contact time for your remote camera, which gives you more reliable and consistent triggering, especially in continuous drive mode.

Personally, I always choose LR (Long Range) mode for triggering remote cameras. It is a slightly slower traveling signal, specifically designed for frequency stability. This keeps the signal true to the transmitted frequency, limiting the frequency drift to prevent it from spreading to adjacent frequencies or Channels. This frequency stability increases signal reliability and distance. The new Rx LR mode also increases contact time on the remote camera, resulting in more reliable triggering. If you have that option, you should be using LR mode on your transmitting radio and RxLR mode for the remote radios.

TxRx mode is mostly intended for use with strobes. It has smaller packets of data being transmitted which allows it to be transmitted and received at faster speeds. These signals allow you to trigger up to X-sync. LR mode has much larger packets of data which transmit at slower speeds. This holds the frequency stable but you will lose a stop or two of sync speed. TxRx mode cannot accept these larger packets with is why you cannot combine the different modes.

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR SONY SHOOTERS: If triggering from a handheld camera to a remote camera with Plus III radios: you must use firmware 2.716 or higher. Use LR mode for your transmitting radio and use RxLR for your remote radios.

===Placement of the Receiver: Hot Shoe vs Railing===

This really depends on the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, and how close the receiver might be to metal objects when placed in the hot shoe. As a general rule, you want to keep the radios away from metal. All digital products, including cameras, are known to put out small amounts of RFN noise or interference. With the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, this amount of RF Noise could definitely be a factor in the transmitted signal being blocked from the receiver. Whenever possible, mount the receiver to a metal railing for stability, using an Isolation/Mounting bar and super clamp to extend the distance away from the metal railing. I fully understand how much space and weight a Super Clamp requires, however it can mean the difference in the ability to trigger the remote camera or not. I never ever suggest putting the receiver on the ground. If the remote camera is set up on the floor, then the hot shoe would be best spot, to at least get the unit higher off the ground. Also, try to avoid placing your receiver next to any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content.

===Height of PocketWizard Device from Ground Level===
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
The height of the PocketWizard device from the ground level is an extremely significant factor to think about. The ground can definitely cut down the signal distance and quality, plus increase the frequency spread to other frequencies. You do not need to mount the receiving radio in the hot shoe of the camera. You can mount the radio in a better position for reception and put the camera where you want it. Remote camera cables are available in 1’ or 3’ lengths and a 10’ extension cable is available to help with extreme situations

===Maintain line of sight to transmitter===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
In smaller venues this may not be such a big deal, but why risk it? With so much RF noise at major events, line of sight to the transmitter should be the top priority when setting up the receiver. Always make sure you can see the transmitter from the receiver once it is mounted and keep the antennas parallel. The only exception to keeping the antennas parallel is when setting up remote cameras in higher elevated positions. I routinely place the receiver upside down so the antenna is more exposed to the rising signal at a lower level. (Note from PocketWizard: upside down is usually not recommended but in extreme situations may be the best course of action.)

===Mini phone extensions and Isolation/Mounting Bar===
I always make it a practice to carry some miniphone extension cables like the PocketWizard MMX for those situations where I need to mount the receiver in places the remote camera cable will not reach. There are also situations where you might want to place the transmitter off the camera to obtain line of sight to the receiver unit. For example, when shooting under an overhang, or dugout. I suggest having options from 10’ to 20’ mini phone extensions just to make sure you can place the receiver in the best spot possible. However, with the longer cables try to avoid running your cables near any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content. The MMX is a 10' cable.

As mentioned earlier, Isolation/Mounting bars are very useful in placing your PocketWizard device in a more optimal position for receiving or transmitting a signal. These are called MB4s and are sold in 4” lengths, however you can connect two of them together by threading one into the other to make an 8” length. And don’t forget about key rings to run your safety cables through. Never ever use the lanyards that come with the PocketWizard devices. They were not designed with intent to be used as a safety when mounting remote cameras. Make sure that the key ring is big enough to slip through the eyelet on the Plus III, and big enough to to slip the safety cable through.

===Hot Shoe Disable===
This feature that allows the photographer to disable the hot shoe contact of their radios. Hot Shoe Disable can be used on both the transmitter and receiver. There are a few reasons to use this feature.

When you’re using a handheld camera with a radio in the top shoe and triggering remote cameras, you may sometimes want to disable the hot shoe of the transmitting radio. This prevents the handheld camera from triggering your remotes with every picture taken, as the radio in the hot shoe won’t get the sync signal from the camera. Turning off the hot shoe gives the photographer the ability to use a trigger button cable (like the BT1) plugged into the transmitting radio, to trigger the remotes when you see fit, just by pressing on the trigger button.

The reason for disabling the hot shoe contact of the receiver is to prevent Auto Relay Mode from engaging. When using a Plus III in the hot shoe of a remote camera, connected by a remote cable, after triggering the camera, the Plus III will automatically transmit a relay signal one Channel higher than the signal it received. For example, if the transmitting radio and the Plus III receiver connected to the remote camera are set to Channel 1, the remote Plus III will then relay a transmitting signal on Channel 2 to trigger a third Plus III unit set to receive and set to Channel 2. This feature was designed in order to trigger strobes with the third Plus III unit. This is the way the product is designed to work.

However, if a second photographer is using Channel 2 and the first photographer is not using relay but just a remote camera, the relay signal could inadvertently trigger the second photographer’s equipment.

In a situation such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, photographers need to register the Channels they plan to use. If a photographer is only planning on triggering remote cameras on (for example) Channel 24, another photographer could be assigned Channel 25. When the photographer using Channel 24 fires his camera remotely, his connected Plus III will trigger any PocketWizard receiver set to Channel 25.

We have also found that the hot shoes of some mirrorless cameras seem to behave differently with a radio in their hot shoe and may note properly trigger the camera. We suggest disabling the hot shoes of your Plus III radios for best results, especially if you are using a mirrorless camera.

====How to Disable a Plus III Hot Shoe====

Hold down the Zone D button for three seconds until the “CH” on the display changes to “Cd”. The Plus III will not receive any signal from its hot shoe. To enable the hot shoe contacts, simply hold the Zone D button for another three seconds until “Cd” switched back to “CH” on the display or turn the radio off. When the radio is turned back on, it will return to an active hot shoe.

*Legacy Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 1.215
*E Release Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 2.505 or greater

====How to Disable a MultiMAX Hot Shoe====

Start by turning on your MultiMAX to transmit. Then press the *MENU button. Next press the “L” button for Other Functions. Now you will press “B” for Hot Shoe Off. The MultiMAX will show what function is active. For example, if it says "Hot Shoe Off", the shoe is disabled. When you press *MENU L B again, it will change to "Hot Shoe On" and the shoe will be active again.

====Other Ways to Disable a Hot Shoe====

The camera thinks the PocketWizard in its shoe is a flash, which it triggers through the center pin contact. To disable this function, you need to break the connection between the radio and camera's center pins.

The easiest solution is to take the radio out of the remote camera's hot shoe. Unless you are using Relay mode, it does not need to be the in shoe.

One simple way to disable the hot shoe is to physically block the center pin connection, using a thin piece of tape or paper.

You can also turn the hot shoe off by using the camera's flash settings. Simply set the flash setting to "off".

Some settings in your camera will automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent mode, continuous high speed drive, and with Nikons, certain Live View options in the Custom Setting menu (usually d8-"Apply Changes to Live View"). Check your camera's instruction manual for details.

===Batteries vs AC Power Supplies===

Batteries have a finite life span, 50 to 60 hours, whereas AC power supplies can provide continuous power to your PocketWizard device for the duration of your needs, as long as a power outlet is within an acceptable distance.

You can use either AA alkaline or Lithium batteries to power the MultiMAX or Plus III. The Lithium batteries will only last about 10-20% longer than Alkaline batteries. However, they will die off at a faster rate at the end of their capacity than Alkaline batteries. You will need to keep an eye out for this.

AC power supplies obviously need a power outlet to plug into to power your PocketWizard device. It is up to you, the user, to decide what is an acceptable distance to run an extension cord to the nearest power outlet. Most modern arenas, stadium, and sports venues now have power outlets within 10’-20’ of each other eliminating the need for long extension cord runs.

The type of AC power supply depends on your PocketWizard device. The original MultiMAX has three options depending on what version of the MultiMAX you have. Please see the [[AC Adapters]] Wiki page to find the correct adapter for your specific MultiMAX.

The AC power supply for the MultiMAX II, Plus IV, and Plus III is the PW-AC-USB. In all honesty, if you find yourself in a pinch to power your Plus III with AC, you could even use an iPhone charging cube and a USB Mini B cable.

In the event of a power failure or a tripped circuit breaker for the outlet the AC power supply is plugged into, the MultiMAX USB, MultiMAX II, Plus III, and Plus IV, will all still operate as long as two fresh AA batteries are installed. Unfortunately, the first generation MultiMAX using the PW-AC-MX power supply will not work even with batteries installed.

==Troubleshooting & Best Practices==

It is important to know some basic troubleshooting techniques. When you are out in the field and have an issue, you can often isolate and solve the problem by just knowing what to do first. Below are the most common solutions. For more detailed information and for other troubleshooting ideas, please download [[Media:Trouble Shooting - Remote Camera.pdf|this PDF]].

'''Sometimes we all just need a good reset.'''
A reset is ALWAYS one of the best places to start. It is easy to change something without realizing it. Here’s how to reset your radio:

MultiMAX: To reset your MultiMAX unit start with the unit turned OFF. Then press and hold in the C button and slide the power switch to Transmit. When you see the "CLEAR/RESET" message on the LCD screen, release the C button. The radio has now been reset to factory defaults and will automatically reset to channel 17 with all Zones enabled.

Plus III: To reset your Plus III unit, start by holding in the TEST button as you power the radio on. Once you see the LCD screen turn on you can release the TEST button.

*Legacy Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 17 with all Zones enabled.
*E Release Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 1 with all Zones enabled

'''Check your Firmware'''
It is always best to have the most recent firmware version running. To update all PocketWizard device’s that have a USB port you can use the PocketWizard Utility. You can learn more about it here.
To download the PocketWizard Utility click here

Here are the most up to date firmware available for PocketWizard devices
*MultiMAX with USB 7.53
*MultiMax II 8.117
*Plus III Legacy 1.215
*Plus IIIe (E Release) 2.740 / 2.840

'''Check or change your batteries and check your battery contacts'''
Fresh batteries are always a good idea. Also, check your internal battery contacts for signs of corrosion (usually blue or green) or rust. If the contacts are damaged, you can try cleaning them with a pencil eraser, rubbing them with aluminum foil, adding a drop or two of lemon juice or alcohol if needed. Be careful about getting any liquid onto the main board. If the damage is bad, you can usually replace the contacts or back cover.

'''Watch the Lights'''
The LED on your radio should go red briefly any time it sends or receives a signal.
-If your transmitter is not going red, check to see if you disabled the hot shoe on your radio or on your camera. (hint: Silent Shooting mode usually disables the shoe!). You can also use a pencil eraser to clean the hot shoe contacts on your camera and radio. Seems basic but has “fixed” a lot of “broken” equipment over the years.
-If your receiver is not going red, check to see if the radios are on the same Channels, Zones, and/or modes.
-If everything is going red but your remotes are not firing, check your cable. Press test on the radio connected to the camera or flash. If it doesn’t fire, there is an issue with the radio, the cable, or the sync port on the remote equipment.

'''Label Your Radios!'''
If you have 10 Plus III radios and have a problem with one unit, you’ll probably just swap it out for an immediate fix if you’re in a tight spot. But if you don’t know which radio you swapped out and that unit has a problem, how will you know that for next time? When testing equipment, it’s a good idea to label everything-your cameras, flashes, radios, and cables. Then you can swap things around and know what did or didn’t work and can narrow down the issue.

We hope these tips will help ensure a troublefree and successful photo shoot. Please do not hesitate to reach out to PocketWizard tech support for assistance if you are stuck. When contacting us, keep in mind we are typically available from about 10 am – 4 pm EST, Monday through Friday. We do work remotely sometimes and are not always in the office. If you have an urgent matter, please email us at [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] with the word URGENT in the subject line, so we can better see it. We will try to respond as soon as possible. We do check email on the weekends sometimes and will do our best to contact you as soon as possible.

PocketWizard Games

2024-02-26T01:04:41Z

Heathers: /* Batteries vs AC Power Supplies */

'''You can use Google Translate to view this Wiki in a different language. Go to [https://translate.google.com translate.google.com], then type ''wiki.pocketwizard.com'' into the box. Click the arrow in the box to see the new page.'''

This page was specifically designed to help support photographers at The Games in Tokyo for July 2021. The information here can also be helpful for any events with large quantities of photographers. This page was created by Shawn Cullen, a veteran of many large sporting events and Heather Simons, PocketWizard Tech Support Manager. It is designed to help you with setup, answer questions, and includes basic troubleshooting ideas. It will also let you know about special features that you may not be aware of. For best results, we suggest that photographers use Plus III radios with the E Release firmware and strongly consider installing a Custom ID on their units.

==PocketWizard Radios and Firmware==

'''August 1, 2020: SEE NOTE [[#The E Release and Custom IDs|BELOW]] FOR NEW PLUS III FIRMWARE UPDATE!'''

MultiMAX radios have been the gold standard for triggering remotes at sporting events and are known for their rock solid reliability. Our firmware has worked well over the past 30 years but since it was released, there have been many changes in technology. In today’s world, there are a lot more products that can cause RF interference than ever before, between television cameras, LED scoreboards, and simply far more photographers on the field at the same time.

At PocketWizard, we wanted to ensure that photographers would never miss a shot. We released the new E Release firmware protocol on September 19th, 2019. This new special firmware upgrade for PocketWizard Plus III radios extends the signal range drastically. It is also less susceptible to RF interference.

PocketWizard FCC radios use a frequency range of 340-354 MHz. With Legacy firmware, Standard Channels 1-16 have the same frequency of 344.04 while the frequency of QuadZone Triggering Channels 17 to 32 ranges from 346.50 to 354.00 MHz. These Channels allow the user to assign their radios to 4 different Zones as well as having more advanced coding functions and features.

The E Release can more than double the shooting distance of our Legacy firmware and now offers QuadZone Triggering on all Channels. It has E Release Channels 1-32 for flash triggering and adds new LR Channels 1-80, designed specifically for triggering remote cameras. With the new E Release firmware upgrade, each individual channel now has its own separate frequency, so no more Channels sharing the same frequencies, as 1-16 used to. This is especially helpful to increase channel and frequency separation between users.

Besides the increase in the number of additional channels, the E Release firmware enhances the frequency reliability by eliminating frequency drift and making it a more stable frequency over a longer distance.

The E Release firmware is available for the Plus III, the Plus IV, and the Nikon FlexTT5. It is not currently available for the MultiMAX radios. Any new Plus III or Plus IV radios were shipped with the firmware pre-installed and are now called Plus IIIe or Plus IVe radios. You can upgrade any existing units to the E Release by simply purchasing a license for each radio and upgrading through our Utility program. Learn more [https://pocketwizard.com/e-release-firmware/ here].

==Custom IDs and Frequency==

===The Truth about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID can be a valuable asset to a photographer at a major event, as it ensures that nobody else can trigger your Channel.

===A Misconception about PocketWizard Custom IDs===
A Custom ID is NOT a "private frequency"! It is a common misconception that you are getting your own frequency, you are not! A Custom ID which is an exclusive digital code that rides on top of the PocketWizard device frequencies. This exclusive digital code prevents other users from triggering your remote camera or strobes. However, this does not mean you are completely protected. It is possible that other PocketWizard users on the same frequency can block your signal to your receiver, and you can block theirs, even though you have this digital code.

===How Custom IDs Actually Work===

When a Custom ID is created for your device, you are given a 3 digit Custom ID and it is traditionally assigned to Channel 17. However, the Custom ID channel does not use Channel 17’s frequency. The actual frequency used for the ID will vary, depending on your Custom ID code. Most Custom ID’s are placed within channel 17 to 32 since channels 1-16 share the same frequency. Custom ID code information is kept securely and confidentially on file by PocketWizard. Nobody can be assigned to your code and there are no duplicates.

The reason for assigning the Custom ID to Channel 17 with Legacy firmware is due to the Reset feature within the MultiMAX, MultiMAX II, and Plus III. It is recommended every time you turn on your device, do a reset at start up so that any timing delays or other features last use are cleared out, and the device is set to factory default which is Channel 17 with all Zones active.

==Knowing your PocketWizard Frequency==

In situations where you have multiuser environments such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, you need to know your exact Custom ID frequency. This way you know if others will be triggering on your frequency, which could cause issues. If you need to change your Custom ID to another channel for channel separation from other users, you can move the ID to a different frequency if you are using MultiMAX and MultiMAX II radios. However, you can only move it within the 16-channel spread between Channels 17-32.

Switching from TxRx to LR (Long Range mode) does not change your frequency or create channel separation from other users if you have Legacy firmware! LR uses the exact same frequencies, and your receiver can still be blocked by other users. To view your Custom ID and the frequency it is on, for the MultiMAX and MultiMAX II, you can press and hold "A" on your MultiMAX and slide the power switch to one of the ON positions (Transmit or Receive) to display your Custom ID. For the Plus III there should be a label inside the battery compartment with your Custom ID and frequency information.

Let’s use the 100-meter dash at the Games as an example. There will be at least 50+ photographers covering the event, and just think how many remote cameras will be set up just for the finish line. With every photographer triggering their remotes all at the same time as the athletes cross the finish line, with all of those frequencies in the air, the potential for signal blocking is very high! Remember, every Channel between 17 to 32 has a different frequency, but there are only 16 Channels from 17 to 32, so there will be some overlap with Custom IDs. Because Channels 1-16 share the same frequency, 344.04MHz, so there is no point in having your Custom ID set to this frequency. So, with 50+ photographers and possibly 25-30 remotes set up, with only a 16-channel spread for all those Custom ID’s to be placed on, you can see why it is important to know your Custom ID frequency. You need to know what frequency will work best for you and possibly get some Channel separation from everyone else. You can look at the PocketWizard Channel sign-up sheet in the media room to see who is set up on the different channels and know if anyone is set up on the same frequency as your Custom ID.

You can find the frequencies for the different Channels on our [[Channels]] Wiki page.

==The E Release and Custom IDs==

The Plus III units with the E Release and Custom IDs work a little differently. Unlike the Legacy firmware, your Custom ID will use the frequency that the ID is assigned to. For example, when you use your Plus III with Legacy firmware, your Custom ID is assigned to Channel 17 (346.5 MHz) but it may actually trigger on Channel 23’s frequency (349.5 MHz). When you upgrade your radio to the E Release, your Custom ID will trigger on the same frequency as Channel 17, but with E Release frequencies (345.80 MHz for regular Channels or 343.20 MHz for LR Channels).

'''You can now move the Custom ID installed on your Plus IIIe radio to a different frequency and Channel. Please see the '''[[Plus III#Plus_III_CUSTOM_ID|Plus III Custom ID]]''' page for details.'''

==The Essentials of Remote Camera Triggering - Tips from Shawn==

When setting up your remote camera there is a lot to consider and think about. Obviously, you want to select the best spot for composition of the image but the way your PocketWizard device is also very important. You will need to determine the best location to mount the receiver, plus consider other factors as well to ensure that receiver unit can receive the signal from the transmitter consistently and reliably. Shawn has set up literally thousands of cameras at various events, from small gyms to international stadiums, all around the world. His tips and tricks are incredibly valuable and have served him well over the years.

{| class ="wikitable" style="background-color: #fccccc;"
|'''NEW FIRMWARE UPDATES'''

Firmware 2.717 or higher: This firmware adds a new mode: Rx LR. This mode is specifically designed for remote camera triggering, when you have a camera in your hand transmitting to a remote camera. Use regular LR mode for the transmitting radio and Rx LR on the remote radio. IMPORTANT: You should also DISABLE the hot shoe on the remote camera. You can do this by taking it out of the hot shoe, turning the camera's hot shoe off, or by holding in the D button till the display changes from CH to Cd to indicate the Plus III's hot shoe is disabled.

'''Plus IIIe current firmware:'''

'''2.740''': This firmware is for most cameras. This will allow the Plus III to be connected to either a mono or stereo cable. If you are using a button trigger or footpedal with the transmitting radio, you MUST use this firmware version for the transmitter, even if you are using remote Sony camera.

'''2.840''': This firmware is for Sony cameras. The Plus III will ONLY trigger with a stereo cable. If you are using a remote Sony camera, you MUST use 2.840 on the remote Plus III. You can use 2.740 on the transmitting radio, even if you are transmitting from another camera (Sony or otherwise) or from a mono connection. You can also use 2.840 on the transmitting radio as long as you have a stereo connection.

Please contact [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] if you need more help.
|}

===CABLES ARE CRITICAL!===

To trigger a remote camera, you need to use a remote camera cable to connect the PocketWizard to the camera. This allows the radio to trigger the camera through the camera's remote port.

When you are using a mirrorless camera in your hand (with a PocketWizard in the hot shoe) to trigger a remote camera, you '''MUST''' use a cable on the handheld camera as well as one on the remote camera. Many settings on the camera will automatically disable the hot shoe. Using a cable connected to the remote port will ensure the transmitting radio will get a trigger signal from the handheld camera. It is always more reliable than the sync pulse from the camera's hot shoe. We also suggest disabling the hot shoe on Plus III radios for best results. Hold in the D Zone button for a few seconds until the display changes from CH to Cd.

'' '''SONY USERS:''' for your transmitting camera/PocketWizard, you '''MUST''' use the S-VPR1-ACC cable on your handheld camera as well as one on the remote camera. For the remote cameras, you can use the S-VPR1-ACC, the 13377-S, OR the 13369-S (with the USB power tail).''

There are 5 main cables, based on camera connections:
*N10-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 10 pin connection, like the D6
*N-MCDC2-ACC: for Nikon cameras with the 4 pin MCDC2 port, like the Z series
*CM-N3-ACC: for Canon cameras with the 3 pin port, like the 1DX Mark III
*CM-E3-ACC: for cameras with the 2.5 mm subminiphone port, like most Canon mirrorless as well as many Fuji or Olympus cameras
*S-VPR1-ACC: for Sony cameras with the micro USB port, like the a9 II.
If you are not sure which cable you need, you can [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ contact us] at PocketWizard support.

===TxRx or LR mode===
The main options are: TxRx (Transmit or Receive), Tx Only (Transmit Only), Rx
Only (Receive Only), and LR (Long Range mode). With Plus III firmware 2.716 or higher, you will also have RxLR. For more details and other modes, please see the MultiMAX or Plus III pages. Rx LR mode increases the contact time for your remote camera, which gives you more reliable and consistent triggering, especially in continuous drive mode.

Personally, I always choose LR (Long Range) mode for triggering remote cameras. It is a slightly slower traveling signal, specifically designed for frequency stability. This keeps the signal true to the transmitted frequency, limiting the frequency drift to prevent it from spreading to adjacent frequencies or Channels. This frequency stability increases signal reliability and distance. The new Rx LR mode also increases contact time on the remote camera, resulting in more reliable triggering. If you have that option, you should be using LR mode on your transmitting radio and RxLR mode for the remote radios.

TxRx mode is mostly intended for use with strobes. It has smaller packets of data being transmitted which allows it to be transmitted and received at faster speeds. These signals allow you to trigger up to X-sync. LR mode has much larger packets of data which transmit at slower speeds. This holds the frequency stable but you will lose a stop or two of sync speed. TxRx mode cannot accept these larger packets with is why you cannot combine the different modes.

IMPORTANT NOTE FOR SONY SHOOTERS: If triggering from a handheld camera to a remote camera with Plus III radios: you must use firmware 2.716 or higher. Use LR mode for your transmitting radio and use RxLR for your remote radios.

===Placement of the Receiver: Hot Shoe vs Railing===

This really depends on the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, and how close the receiver might be to metal objects when placed in the hot shoe. As a general rule, you want to keep the radios away from metal. All digital products, including cameras, are known to put out small amounts of RFN noise or interference. With the distance from the receiver to the transmitter, this amount of RF Noise could definitely be a factor in the transmitted signal being blocked from the receiver. Whenever possible, mount the receiver to a metal railing for stability, using an Isolation/Mounting bar and super clamp to extend the distance away from the metal railing. I fully understand how much space and weight a Super Clamp requires, however it can mean the difference in the ability to trigger the remote camera or not. I never ever suggest putting the receiver on the ground. If the remote camera is set up on the floor, then the hot shoe would be best spot, to at least get the unit higher off the ground. Also, try to avoid placing your receiver next to any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content.

===Height of PocketWizard Device from Ground Level===
[[File:P3radioscience.jpg|right|300px|]]
The height of the PocketWizard device from the ground level is an extremely significant factor to think about. The ground can definitely cut down the signal distance and quality, plus increase the frequency spread to other frequencies. You do not need to mount the receiving radio in the hot shoe of the camera. You can mount the radio in a better position for reception and put the camera where you want it. Remote camera cables are available in 1’ or 3’ lengths and a 10’ extension cable is available to help with extreme situations

===Maintain line of sight to transmitter===
[[File:P3orientation.jpg|right|300px|]]
In smaller venues this may not be such a big deal, but why risk it? With so much RF noise at major events, line of sight to the transmitter should be the top priority when setting up the receiver. Always make sure you can see the transmitter from the receiver once it is mounted and keep the antennas parallel. The only exception to keeping the antennas parallel is when setting up remote cameras in higher elevated positions. I routinely place the receiver upside down so the antenna is more exposed to the rising signal at a lower level. (Note from PocketWizard: upside down is usually not recommended but in extreme situations may be the best course of action.)

===Mini phone extensions and Isolation/Mounting Bar===
I always make it a practice to carry some miniphone extension cables like the PocketWizard MMX for those situations where I need to mount the receiver in places the remote camera cable will not reach. There are also situations where you might want to place the transmitter off the camera to obtain line of sight to the receiver unit. For example, when shooting under an overhang, or dugout. I suggest having options from 10’ to 20’ mini phone extensions just to make sure you can place the receiver in the best spot possible. However, with the longer cables try to avoid running your cables near any power control panels, conduit, Wifi routers, radio antennas, or objects with high water content. The MMX is a 10' cable.

As mentioned earlier, Isolation/Mounting bars are very useful in placing your PocketWizard device in a more optimal position for receiving or transmitting a signal. These are called MB4s and are sold in 4” lengths, however you can connect two of them together by threading one into the other to make an 8” length. And don’t forget about key rings to run your safety cables through. Never ever use the lanyards that come with the PocketWizard devices. They were not designed with intent to be used as a safety when mounting remote cameras. Make sure that the key ring is big enough to slip through the eyelet on the Plus III, and big enough to to slip the safety cable through.

===Hot Shoe Disable===
This feature that allows the photographer to disable the hot shoe contact of their radios. Hot Shoe Disable can be used on both the transmitter and receiver. There are a few reasons to use this feature.

When you’re using a handheld camera with a radio in the top shoe and triggering remote cameras, you may sometimes want to disable the hot shoe of the transmitting radio. This prevents the handheld camera from triggering your remotes with every picture taken, as the radio in the hot shoe won’t get the sync signal from the camera. Turning off the hot shoe gives the photographer the ability to use a trigger button cable (like the BT1) plugged into the transmitting radio, to trigger the remotes when you see fit, just by pressing on the trigger button.

The reason for disabling the hot shoe contact of the receiver is to prevent Auto Relay Mode from engaging. When using a Plus III in the hot shoe of a remote camera, connected by a remote cable, after triggering the camera, the Plus III will automatically transmit a relay signal one Channel higher than the signal it received. For example, if the transmitting radio and the Plus III receiver connected to the remote camera are set to Channel 1, the remote Plus III will then relay a transmitting signal on Channel 2 to trigger a third Plus III unit set to receive and set to Channel 2. This feature was designed in order to trigger strobes with the third Plus III unit. This is the way the product is designed to work.

However, if a second photographer is using Channel 2 and the first photographer is not using relay but just a remote camera, the relay signal could inadvertently trigger the second photographer’s equipment.

In a situation such as the World Series, NCAA Final Four, Track and Field World Championships, FIFA World Cup, or the Games, photographers need to register the Channels they plan to use. If a photographer is only planning on triggering remote cameras on (for example) Channel 24, another photographer could be assigned Channel 25. When the photographer using Channel 24 fires his camera remotely, his connected Plus III will trigger any PocketWizard receiver set to Channel 25.

We have also found that the hot shoes of some mirrorless cameras seem to behave differently with a radio in their hot shoe and may note properly trigger the camera. We suggest disabling the hot shoes of your Plus III radios for best results, especially if you are using a mirrorless camera.

====How to Disable a Plus III Hot Shoe====

Hold down the Zone D button for three seconds until the “CH” on the display changes to “Cd”. The Plus III will not receive any signal from its hot shoe. To enable the hot shoe contacts, simply hold the Zone D button for another three seconds until “Cd” switched back to “CH” on the display or turn the radio off. When the radio is turned back on, it will return to an active hot shoe.

*Legacy Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 1.215
*E Release Firmware: This feature is available in firmware version 2.505 or greater

====How to Disable a MultiMAX Hot Shoe====

Start by turning on your MultiMAX to transmit. Then press the *MENU button. Next press the “L” button for Other Functions. Now you will press “B” for Hot Shoe Off. The MultiMAX will show what function is active. For example, if it says "Hot Shoe Off", the shoe is disabled. When you press *MENU L B again, it will change to "Hot Shoe On" and the shoe will be active again.

====Other Ways to Disable a Hot Shoe====

The camera thinks the PocketWizard in its shoe is a flash, which it triggers through the center pin contact. To disable this function, you need to break the connection between the radio and camera's center pins.

The easiest solution is to take the radio out of the remote camera's hot shoe. Unless you are using Relay mode, it does not need to be the in shoe.

One simple way to disable the hot shoe is to physically block the center pin connection, using a thin piece of tape or paper.

You can also turn the hot shoe off by using the camera's flash settings. Simply set the flash setting to "off".

Some settings in your camera will automatically disable the hot shoe, such as electronic shutter, silent mode, continuous high speed drive, and with Nikons, certain Live View options in the Custom Setting menu (usually d8-"Apply Changes to Live View"). Check your camera's instruction manual for details.

===Batteries vs AC Power Supplies===

Batteries have a finite life span, 50 to 60 hours, whereas AC power supplies can provide continuous power to your PocketWizard device for the duration of your needs, as long as a power outlet is within an acceptable distance.

You can use either AA alkaline or Lithium batteries to power the MultiMAX or Plus III. The Lithium batteries will only last about 10-20% longer than Alkaline batteries. However, they will die off at a faster rate at the end of their capacity than Alkaline batteries. You will need to keep an eye out for this.

AC power supplies obviously need a power outlet to plug into to power your PocketWizard device. It is up to you, the user, to decide what is an acceptable distance to run an extension cord to the nearest power outlet. Most modern arenas, stadium, and sports venues now have power outlets within 10’-20’ of each other eliminating the need for long extension cord runs.

The type of AC power supply depends on your PocketWizard device. The original MultiMAX has three options depending on what version of the MultiMAX you have. Please see the [[AC Adapters]] Wiki page to find the correct adapter for your specific MultiMAX.

The AC power supply for the MultiMAX II, Plus IV, and Plus III is the PW-AC-USB. In all honesty, if you find yourself in a pinch to power your Plus III with AC, you could even use an iPhone charging cube and a USB Mini B cable.

In the event of a power failure or a tripped circuit breaker for the outlet the AC power supply is plugged into, the MultiMAX USB, MultiMAX II, Plus III, and Plus IV, will all still operate as long as two fresh AA batteries are installed. Unfortunately, the first generation MultiMAX using the PW-AC-MX power supply will not work even with batteries installed.

==Troubleshooting & Best Practices==

It is important to know some basic troubleshooting techniques. When you are out in the field and have an issue, you can often isolate and solve the problem by just knowing what to do first. Below are the most common solutions. For more detailed information and for other troubleshooting ideas, please download [[Media:Trouble Shooting - Remote Camera.pdf|this PDF]].

'''Sometimes we all just need a good reset.'''
A reset is ALWAYS one of the best places to start. It is easy to change something without realizing it. Here’s how to reset your radio:

MultiMAX: To reset your MultiMAX unit start with the unit turned OFF. Then press and hold in the C button and slide the power switch to Transmit. When you see the "CLEAR/RESET" message on the LCD screen, release the C button. The radio has now been reset to factory defaults and will automatically reset to channel 17 with all Zones enabled.

Plus III: To reset your Plus III unit, start by holding in the TEST button as you power the radio on. Once you see the LCD screen turn on you can release the TEST button.

*Legacy Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 17 with all Zones enabled.
*E Release Firmware: The default mode after a reset is TxRx on Channel 1 with all Zones enabled

'''Check your Firmware'''
It is always best to have the most recent firmware version running. To update all PocketWizard device’s that have a USB port you can use the PocketWizard Utility. You can learn more about it here.
To download the PocketWizard Utility click here

Here are the most up to date firmware available for PocketWizard devices
*MultiMAX with USB 7.53
*MultiMax II 8.117
*Plus III Legacy 1.215
*Plus IIIe (E Release) 2.704

'''Check or change your batteries and check your battery contacts'''
Fresh batteries are always a good idea. Also, check your internal battery contacts for signs of corrosion (usually blue or green) or rust. If the contacts are damaged, you can try cleaning them with a pencil eraser, rubbing them with aluminum foil, adding a drop or two of lemon juice or alcohol if needed. Be careful about getting any liquid onto the main board. If the damage is bad, you can usually replace the contacts or back cover.

'''Watch the Lights'''
The LED on your radio should go red briefly any time it sends or receives a signal.
-If your transmitter is not going red, check to see if you disabled the hot shoe on your radio or on your camera. (hint: Silent Shooting mode usually disables the shoe!). You can also use a pencil eraser to clean the hot shoe contacts on your camera and radio. Seems basic but has “fixed” a lot of “broken” equipment over the years.
-If your receiver is not going red, check to see if the radios are on the same Channels, Zones, and/or modes.
-If everything is going red but your remotes are not firing, check your cable. Press test on the radio connected to the camera or flash. If it doesn’t fire, there is an issue with the radio, the cable, or the sync port on the remote equipment.

'''Label Your Radios!'''
If you have 10 Plus III radios and have a problem with one unit, you’ll probably just swap it out for an immediate fix if you’re in a tight spot. But if you don’t know which radio you swapped out and that unit has a problem, how will you know that for next time? When testing equipment, it’s a good idea to label everything-your cameras, flashes, radios, and cables. Then you can swap things around and know what did or didn’t work and can narrow down the issue.

We hope these tips will help ensure a troublefree and successful photo shoot. Please do not hesitate to reach out to PocketWizard tech support for assistance if you are stuck. When contacting us, keep in mind we are typically available from about 10 am – 4 pm EST, Monday through Friday. Due to the pandemic, we are not always in the office so email is typically best. If you have an urgent matter, please email us at [https://pocketwizard.com/contact/ PocketWizard tech support] with the word URGENT in the subject line, so we can better see it. We will try to respond as soon as possible. We do check email on the weekends sometimes and will do our best to contact you as soon as possible.

Factory Reset

2024-02-25T16:58:43Z

Heathers: /* Reset B - Factory Defaults (RECOMMENDED) */ tweaked wording a bit

{{recommended reading|Basic Wireless TTL|}}
If you are having any trouble with your radios or simply want to start fresh after making changes, a simple reset can be the best and easiest option. A reset will not change the radio's firmware.

Note: there are no manual reset options for the PlusX, Plus II, or Plus radios. You can remove the batteries for 10 minutes to see if that may help if you are having trouble.

== Factory Reset with the PocketWizard Utility Program ==

'''For best results, we typically suggest doing a full manual reset as described below.'''

You also can perform a “Factory Reset” from within the [[PocketWizard Utility]] for your USB enabled radios. In addition, when you update your radios via the Utility, factory reset will be performed automatically which can be a real time saver.
With ControlTL radios, your previous settings will be saved, and when possible, you will be able to re-load them after the firmware update and factory reset. A large jump in firmware versions or a specific change in the firmware may make it impossible to re-load, so be sure to write down any custom settings for Configuration 1 or Configuration 2 before you reset your radios so you can re-apply them after the upgrade.

== Firmware Updates or Upgrades ==

After updating your firmware, always perform a full manual reset. While the PocketWizard Utility performs a factory reset automatically when you upgrade the firmware, and has a Factory Reset button on the Update tab, a manual reset remains the recommended method after a firmware change, especially for the ControlTL radios. A reset (either manually or through the Utility program) will not change the firmware version.

== Plus III/IIIe and Plus IV/IVe Reset ==

#Turn the radio off
#While holding the test button turn on the radio by either pressing the power button (Plus III) or sliding the switch (Plus IV).
#Continue holding the test button until everything is all the segments light up and are displayed on the screen.
#Release the test button. The radio is now set to factory default.
Factory default settings: TxRx, Zones ABCD, and Channel 17 (for Legacy firmware) or Channel 01 (E Release firmware).

== MultiMAX / MultiMAX II Reset ==

#Turn the radio off
#While holding C, slide the power switch to TRANSMIT (TRANSMIT and RECEIVE are always reset together).
#When you see the "CLEAR/RESET" message on the LCD, release C. The radio is now reset to factory default.

== MiniTT1, FlexTT5, and FlexTT6 Reset ==
With the ControlTL radios, there are 2 levels of reset available. We typically suggest a full manual reset (Reset B) for most situations.

RESET A, a Simple Reset, allows you to reset learned Channels to the Channels last set in the Utility (C1 and C2 configurations). This reset option will retain all features set via the Utility.

RESET B, a Factory Default Reset, will reset all features and Channels to the Factory Default Settings.

'''IMPORTANT:''' Factory Reset and [[Learn Mode]] both use the TEST button for a long time. If you are not sure if you are engaging Learn Mode or Factory Reset, read about the [[Status LED]] to see the difference.

===Reset A - Reset Channels Only ===

RESET A: Returns both C1 and C2 to the Channels you last set in the PocketWizard Utility. Reset A is primarily used for resetting Channels that were taught in the field. It will not change Utility settings. A reset will not change the radio's firmware.

#Turn the radio off
#While holding TEST, slide the power switch to C1 (C1 and C2 are always reset together).
#Keep holding TEST for a few seconds until you see 2 green blinks, then release TEST. You should see one green blink, then a pause, then the 2 green blinks.
#Turn the radio off. It is now ready to be used again.
The Channels are restored to their last Utility values. If you’ve never set the channels using the Utility, then the Channels are restored to factory defaults (Channel 1 for C1 - Configuration 1, Channel 2 for C2 - Configuration 2).

=== Reset B - Factory Defaults (RECOMMENDED) ===
<div style="float: right;"><videoflash>b1ZUvRgk-0Y&loop=0&rel=0&autoplay=0|225|155</videoflash></div>
RESET B Returns all of your radio’s settings, including channels and all settings from the [[PocketWizard Utility]], to factory defaults. A reset will not change the radio's firmware.

#Turn the radio off
#Hold in the TEST button and slide the power switch to C1 (C1 and C2 are always reset together).
#Keep holding TEST for about 15 seconds until you see 4 green blinks, then release TEST. During this process, you should see 1 green blink (or a red green if you have E Release firmware), then a pause, then 2 green blinks, then a longer pause, then 4 green blinks.
#Turn the radio off. It is now ready to be used again.
The radio is now completely reset to factory defaults.
 
 

== ControlTL Default Settings ==

When you perform a Factory Reset, the settings below are used.

=== MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Default Settings ===
{{Utility Tab Quick Links}}
;[[Channel Tab]]
:C.1 = ControlTL Transmit Channel = 1
:::Standard Transmit Channel = 1
:C.2 = ControlTL Transmit Channel = 2
:::Standard Transmit Channel = 2
:ControlTL Transmit Priority at X-Sync = enabled - Nikon FlexTT5 Only
:Use ControlTL for Receive Channel = enabled - FlexTT5 Only
:C.1 = ControlTL Receive Channel = 1 - FlexTT5 Only
:::Standard Receive Channel = 1 (but disabled) - FlexTT5 Only
:C.2 = ControlTL Receive Channel = 2 - FlexTT5 Only
:::Standard Receive Channel = 2 (but disabled) - FlexTT5 Only

;[[Flash Tab]]
:Rear Curtain Sync Begins At: = Off
:Optimized Rear Curtain Sync / Manual Shutter Speeds = disabled
:Speedlite = Normal E-TTL/i-TTL
:Force TTL Master Mode = enabled - Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Only
:Pre-Flash Boost Mode = Disable Pre-Flash Boost - Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Only
:Remote Beeper = No Change On Wakeup
:Remote Optical Trigger = No Change On Wakeup

;[[HyperSync/HSS Tab]]
:HyperSync Only (Disable HSS/FP) = disabled
:HSS/FP Begins At (HyperSync Ends) = 1/250th
:HyperSync Flash Duration for Standard Channels = 7
:Manual HyperSync For Standard Channels = disabled
:Manual HyperSync Offset (slider) = 0 (but disabled)

:AC9 Flash = AB800 - FlexTT5 Only
:Optimize HyperSync Automation For: = Reduced Clipping - FlexTT5 Only
:P2 HyperSync Flash Duration = 7 - FlexTT5 Only

;[[PowerTracking Tab]]
:[[PowerTracking]] = Full Manual
:Aperture Centered On: = F:11 (but disabled)
:ISO Centered On: = ISO 100 (but disabled)
:AC9 Flash Exposure Compensation = 0.0 - FlexTT5 Only

;[[Modeling Tab]]
:Modeling Light Control = disabled
:Control Mode = Camera Wake (but disabled)
:Modeling Light Autotrack = disabled
:Modeling Light Active = 100% (but disabled)
:Modeling Light Sleep = disabled
:Modeling Light Sleep = 10% (but disabled)
:Modeling Light Sleep Delay After Camera Sleeps = 30 secs (but disabled)
:Modeling Light Delay After AF-Assist = 2 secs (but disabled)

;[[Sleep Tab]]
:Remote TTL Flash Sleep = disabled
:Remote TTL Flash Delay = 600 secs (but disabled)
:Local Flash Sleep = disabled - FlexTT5 Only
:Local Flash Delay = 600 secs (but disabled) - FlexTT5 Only

;[[Misc Tab]]
:Basic Trigger Mode = disabled
:Transmitter Only = disabled - FlexTT5 Only
:Disable Shoe Communications = disabled - FlexTT5 Only
:SpeedCycler = disabled
:Top Shoe Detection Mode = AC3/AC9 - Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Only
:Camera Model = Auto - Canon MiniTT1 and FlexTT5 Only

=== [[PowerST4]] Default Settings ===
NOTE: The PowerST4 can only be reset via the PocketWizard Utility program.
;[[Channel Tab]]
:Use ControlTL for Rx Channel = enabled
:ControlTL Channel 1, Standard Channel 1

;[[Exposure Tab]]
:Exposure Compensation = 0.0

;[[Sleep Tab]]
:Modeling Light Sleep Mode = enabled
:Modeling Light Sleep Delay = 600 secs/10 minutes

;[[Misc Tab]]
:Ranger RX Head Selection = S-Head
:Digital 1200/2400RX Head Selection = Digital S

===[[PowerMC2]] Default Settings===
NOTE: The PowerMC2 can only be reset via the PocketWizard Utility program.

;[[Exposure Tab]]
:Flash Exposure Compensation = 0

;[[Sleep Tab]]
:Modeling Light Sleep Mode = enabled
:Modeling Light Sleep Delay = 600 secs
:Hibernate Mode = enabled
:Hibernate Delay = 60 min